GOLDSMITH S HANDBOOK

C O NT AINING

FUL L INS TRUC TIO NS

l7 FO R T H E

A L L 0 YJNG A ND WORKING
'

OF G OL D

INC L U D ING
TH E A RT O F A LLO YING , U
M E LTING , RE D C ING , C OL O RING , C O LLECTING
,
U
AND RE F INING TH E PROC ES SE S o n M ANIP ULATION , RE C O VE RY
OF WA ST E , C H EM IC AL A ND PH YS IC AL PROPERTIE S O F

G OLD ; WITH A NE W S YSTE M O F M IXING ITS

ALL OYS ; S OLD E RS , E NAM E L S , A ND OTH E R

U SE F U L U
R L E S A ND RE C IPE S .

BY G EO RG E E . GE E
“
GO LD SMITH AND S ILV E RS NITH , AUTH OR or THE S ILV E RS NITH S H ANDBOOK
’

S .

S E C OND E D ITION, C ONS ID E RAB L Y E NL AR GE I)

L ONDON

CRO SBY LOC KW O O D CO .

7 , STATIO NE RS
’
H AL L C O URT , LUDG ATE B IL L

1 88 1
 PRE FAC E TO T H E FIRS T E D ITIO N .

HAVING been frequently applied to by gold

w orkers and others w ith reference to cert a i n
,

difli cul t i e s r elating to their trade which they were

,

un a ble to overcome} m echa n ic allyh tl idea pre

a
s ented itself to the mind of the Author that a ,

w ork practz ca lé U A
'

y treating on the ses and pp l i

c a tions of G old having special regard to the

,

bus i n ess of the goldsmith and jeweller would be ,

'

a u seful auxiliary to the a rt ifi c er also by

,
a fi ordi n
g
him a constant means for consultation and in s truc

ti on .

F rom an intimate connection with this craft

or art , of a very practical nature extending over ,

a p e riod bordering up on twenty years ; and h aving

h el d duri n g nearly the w ho l e of that time a

S H L
‘
‘

S S
iv P RE FA C E .

position of trust and responsi b ility with several

l eading manufacturing fi rms ; also from his e xp e

r i en c e a j eweller s manager he is not only

’
as ,

enabled to place before the reader the results of

his own personal experience but also that of others ,

who have been under his direction and control .

An d further, having given considerable attention

to the intricacies of
trade generally he has th e , ,

—
as a natural conse quence i n com m on with others
—met with many diffi culti es c on ne cted with it ;
besides other obstacle s which are to be found in
the path of the younger craftsmen . These howeve r
have been ulti mately overcome by the exercise
of patience careful observation and perseverance
, ,
.

To guide ,
therefore the workman and young
,

apprentice and as , ,
fa r as possible to prevent ,

them from experiencing similar perplexiti es by

pointing out their chief causes and the remedi es ,

as well as to supply some additional information

which will it is hoped contribute both to their e ffi
'

, ,

c i e n cy and advancement is the aim , of the writer .

D irections for m ixing gol d ,

s olders enamel, ,

&c .
,
are here given of a thoroughly e xperimental
ch aracter . Th e p rocesses of colouri n g collecti n g
, ,
 PRE FA C E .

refining ,
an d some other modes of treatment of

the precious metal are also described and ,

for

accuracy they can b e safely depended upon .

The A uthor has endeavoured to avoid as much ,

as possible technical expressions ; having regard

,

all through to the main obj ect of this littl e volume ,

namely the benefit

,
of that class of practical gold
workers who take an interest in the daily business
of their life to which perhaps chance or choice
, , ,

h as called them ; but who unfortunately may be

una ble to improve their position , from the want

of a higher and more comprehensive knowledge
of their calling . He has therefore tried to make
, ,

t he matter plain and intelligible to all who may

give it their attention . E specially does he desire
that such of his fellow workmen who are steadily
devoting their energies to this in any of its a rt,

s e veral b ranches may through this instrumentality

,

a cquire a knowledge of facts , and a set of useful

r ul es with w hich they h ave perhaps hitherto b een
, ,

un ac quainted .

It only remains to b e added that the greater

p orti on of this work has appeared in the form of

a rt ic l es in the 7 m eller an d M eta l -

wor ker , a well
kn own and valuable j ourna l p ublished in , the

interests of th e trade indicated by its title . M uch

additional matter has however b een here intro
duce d, an d th e who l e careful ly revised ; so that
it may become as it were a manual
, , of reference
and a gui de to th e j ew el ler worksh op
’
s .
PRE FAC E TO TH E S E C O ND E D ITIO N

TH E Auth or, in presenting a second and enlarged

edition of this work to his readers has much plea
,

sure in stating that the additional information as ,

given in the form of an Appendix is thoroughly

,

sound and practical and that good commerci a l

,

successes may be accomplished by following the

directions therein given .

Th e new matter consists partly of the results of

some of the Author s numerous experi ments and

’

researches into the subj ect upon which he writes ,

and partly of the details of modern processes of

working in daily practice in his manufactory such ,

processes having been rendered perfectly successful

and a hope is here indulged that such knowledge
wil l be found available for s ervice in as sisting the
viii P R E FA C E .

labour and promoting the interests of the melter ,

the colourer and the gold worker generally

,
-
.

The title of the work too has b een changed fro m

, ,

”
The Practical G old worker to -
, Th e G oldsmith
’
s
H andb ook in order to make it uniform with its
com p anion volume, Th e S ilversmith s H and
’

book .

G E
. . GE E .

5 8 , TE NBY S TRE E T NORTH , B IRM ING HAM .

1 8 80 .
y uly ,
 C O NT E NT S .

C H APTER I .

H i story an d f
S ources o pp b
Su r.

Introductory
C o l our ofpure G old
H istory of G old
S crip t ural R eferences
An cient Jewish works of Gold
G o l d known and valued by all nations
S ources of G old
America
Australia
A sia
Africa
E urope
Gr ea t Britain
x C ONTENTS .

G o l d S uppl y of Great Britain

Native G old
G ol d found in various mixed sta tes
S eparating G ol d from th e O re
S outh A merican S yste m
Australian S ystem
R ussian System
C rush ing M achi n e s

C H APTER II .

'

P ropertza '

f
o Gold .

S pecific Gravity of Gol d

Pure or fine G ol d
Table of S ub stan c es w ith th e ir S ym b ol s used
by Jewell ers
E quivalent C hemic a l Weight E x pl ain ed

M al l eability of Gold
Go l d Beaters Go l d
’
-

V arious U ses of G ol d
Ducti lity of Gold
Indian F i ligree
L on don an d Birmingham F i ligre e
An ci ent Jewish M et h od of Workin g Gold
Tenacity of G o ld
 C ONTE NTS . xi

C HAPTER III .

Va r ious Q ua l i ti es a n d A lloy s f
o Gold
.

Ta ble of Qualities and V alues

Purchasabl e price of Gold
z z C arat G o l d
-

E nglish G old C oins

Trial of the P y x
Quality and Weight of the Guinea
Australian S overeign
O ld M ethod of C oining
Wedding ring M anufacture
-

D uty on Wedding rings -

z o C arat G o l d
-

I 8 C arat G o l d
-

V arious C o l ours of G old Tables of

,

I5 C arat G old
-

I3 C arat G old
-

I z C ar at G old
-

Io C arat G old
-

9-
C arat G old
8 C arat G old
-

7-
C arat G old
Pure S ilver
Pure C opper
C omposition
H ard G old
Sp elter
xi i C ONTE NTS .

Tab le of Alloys
Table of Specific Gra vities
T ab le of Weights

C H APTER IV .

[Melti n
g an d Rolli ng .

C opper used by Jewellers

P urchasable price of C opper
M aterials for Alloying
Treatment in the c rucible
Tough G old
Jewellers F urnace
’

Best flux for G old

M elting S crap Gold
F luxes employed in R emoving various
purities
L oss in t e melting-

H ow prevented Table of C alculati on s

,

R educing the Quality of G old

Improving the Quality of G old
New System of mixing G old
A practical explanation of
L ocke t makers Bars of G old
’
-

C hain makers Bars of G old

’
-
 C ONTE NTS .
xiii

Preparing strip s of Go ld
C ost of G o ld rol ling
-

C H APTE R V
.

' '

C ozm o
z
g .

M anufacture of C oins
Process in O peration at the M int
S iz e of M int B ars
C utting out Presses
-

D efects in the Process how remedied

,

Brightness of the S overeign

Weight of the S overeign
R emedy for Wear

C H APTER VI .

M a n uf a ctu r ed A r l zoles
'

The Jewell er s b oard

’

M odern Improvements
L ocket making
-

The process of
S oldering th e Joints
C ommon L ockets
Wrought Work
x iv C ONTE NTS .

Press Work
Jewelling
Taking impressions from Jewellers work
’

Fusing Points of the Principal M etals

Fusing Points of the V ari ous Qualities
D aniell s Table
’

O ur Tabl e
Annealing diflere n t Qualiti e s
'

S ilver S olders
F using Point
Z inc in S ilver S olders
A dvantages and D efects of

C H APTER V II .

S ol i a IVi r e m zb
’
/ -
zg.

Wire D raw ing

-

A ncient M ethod
D raw pl ate
-

Al l oys of G old for C h a in making

-

Preparing Wires for C hains

O ur S ystem
Preparing V arious S hapes
S quare Wire
O blong Wire
H oll ow Wire drawing
-
 C ONTENTS .

H o ll ow H alf
u Wire -
ro n d

H ollow F ancy Wire

H o ll ow S quare Wire
O rnamental Wire
G old C hain making -

C H APTE R V III .

M a n ufactur i ng P rocesses .

G old plating
-

S weating Process
S o l dering Process
9
-
C arat P l ating
R ound Wi re plating -

Polishing
Water of Ay r S tone
- -

Was hin g out the Work

'

E n a m elh n g
Arran gement of C olours
Proper ties of E namels
Fritz or Fl ux
various
E namel C o l ours , s everal
D eep C ol ours
Prep a ring th e work to r eceive E nam el
D egree of h eat for O paque C ol ours
F ini s h ing E n amel w ork -

D i am oud work -
Xv i C O NTE NTS .

C H APTER IX .

E ngra vi ng an d C nosi ng .

E ngraving
Niello E ngraving
E n gra v i n g ‘
of th e S ixteenth C entury
G erman Art of

E nglish E ngravers
William H ogarth
D raper
Process of the E ngraver
E ngravers C ement
’

R emoving A rticles from the C ement

C hasing
Benvenuto C ellini
E lectro G ilding
-

C H APTER X .

S olders an d S older i ng.

H ard S older
C oloured G old S olders
Pallions of S older
S oft S older
T reatment of work containing S oft S older
C omposition of S oft S older
M ethod of M elting
x viii C ONTE NTS .

E ffects of C ol ouring
on the O perator
B irmingham Process of Wet C olouring -

Preparing the work

F inishing the work
G erman Process of Wet C o l ouring -

F rosti n g the work

L apping
C omposition of the L a p
H eading in the L a p
-

S quare L apping
Remo ving the Gold from L ap

C H APTER XII .

C ollecti ng and c fi
n i ng waste

Precipitating G old in C olour Water -

G eneral Treatment of C o l our V a ter

V -

M ixture for the C rucible

C ol l ection and Treatment of Jewellers Le me l
’

R esponsi b ilities of Workm en

‘

B urning of Jewellers L emel

’

M ixtu re of L eme l for the C rucible

T reatment in the fire
B a d Workabl e G old
Recovering Jewellers waste
’

Proportions of M ixture prepared for the

C rucible
 C ONTE NTS . x ix

Fluxes E mpl oyed

'

E fie c t s of S altpetre
S eparate M ethods of Treatment
Refi ning L emel
Gr anul ation of Gold
Mix ture of Nitric Acid
’

Jewel l ers waste waters

Reco v ering G o l d from
Variou s M ethods E mpl oyed
Prec ip ita ting G ol d in these w aters
S
’
Jew e l l ers w ee p
Gen e ra l Treatment

C HAPTER XIII .

Ta b Spacific Gra vi ti es, A lloy s, é c

‘
les f
o .

Specific Gravity of a Sovereig n

Va rious Qual iti es of G ol d
C om positio n of the S overeign
z z C arat Re duced t o IB C arat
- -

I8 I6

I8 I5

I8 I4

1 8 13 n

1 8 12 }
xx C O NTE NTS .

R educed

1 3
Wet C oloured S older
-

C hief Places of Jewellery M an u fact ure

R educing S tandard G old to V arious Qual ities
Reducing Fine G o l d to V arious Qualities
Table of Alloys with S tandard G old
Table of A lloys with Fine G o ld
Table of A lloys for Parting
Table of G old V alues
Tab le of C oloured G old A lloys
Tabl e of C oloured G old S olders
Table of theD uty on G old
Tab le showing the easiest M ethod of reduc
ing G old
Assayers Weight
’

Assayers R ep ort
’
 C ONTE NTS . XXI

C H APTER XIV .

L em el
H and wa shing -

G old cutters -

W ork p e op le s ’
A prons
S h Op F loors
T esting G old
C onclusion

APPEND IX .

Res ults f
o E xper i rn en ts an d R esea r ches .

D eta i ls f
o M oder n P r ocesses .

Paragrap h
I . in G old melting
O xidation -

2 . S errated E dges in G old B ars

D efects in Ingot M oulds
3 . New Ingot M oul ds Treatment of ,

4 . P orous Irregularities in G old B ars .

5 . G old A l loys over heating of and mixing

,
-

5 . Position of Ingot M ould wh ile pouring

In the G old

6 . Blue G ol d how to prepare it

,

6 . B lue G old alloying and treati n g

,

7 . Pale Yellow G old

8 . G rey G old
XXII CONTE NTS .

Paragrap h
’

9 . D r Wagner s G old C olour

.

1 0. G o ld and S ilver R enewer or Anti oxide ,

-

II G old col ouring with S ulphuric Acid

-

I2 . C opperas in Waste Waters

I3 . S ulphate of Iron and its A ction with S oda
1 4. Test for Iron or S teel Tools
1 5 . Test for G old
16 . C olouring G old a useful mixture ,

17 . D itto ditt o n ew meth od

, ,

18 . D itto ditt o anoth er mixture

, ,

19 . D issolv ing C opper from G old A rticl es

20 . Tarnished G old to restore it again ,

2 I . M ixture for soldering G o l d with out

changing i t s C olour
22 . D itto ,ditto
23 . G old S olders of various qualities &c , .

24 . L emel its Treatment with Iron F ilings

,

25 . 1 8 carat All oys fi nishing b right

-
,

26 . S ilver S o lder removing from C o l oured

,

G old
27 . Iron dissolving from G old A rticles
,

28 . G o l d melting D iffi culties in

-
,

29 . Pale L emon colour for 1 8 C arat G ol d

- -

30 . Pure Acids ,
 V lu l i b °

TH E

PRA C T IC AL G O L D -
WO RKE R .

C H APTER I
.

G old ; i t s H i s to ry an d S ourc e s of S u p p ly .

To aid th e advancement of scientific knowledge ,

a n d to give assistance to the manipulator or worker

i n the precious metal is the object of the writer of

,

this book ; as well as to enable the artisan and the

u ninitiated to acquire a general knowledge of the

history and useful appli a nces of the chief mate ri a l

,

c onn e cted with the go ldsmith s art In the first

’
.

place with the idea that the subject may be i n

,

t er e s t i n g to the general reader as well as to th e

p ractical man we propose to rev iew the ancient

,

h isto ry of gold together with its modern progress

,

a n d usefulness as regards ornamental art Th e .

l ast menti oned matter will be amply discussed

-

herea fter when the processes and treatment of the

,

precious metal will be explained together with all ,

t h a t can in co mm on fa irness to the tra de of a

,
2 HISTORY AND O
S UR C E S OF S UPPL Y .

manufacturing goldsmith b e published Th is in , .

formation will b e derived b oth from actua l exp e

r i e n c e and from the Study of the works of most of
,

the leading authors who have written upon the

subject .

G old of all meta l s is the most imperishable and ,

consequently the most noble and b e autiful It is .

,

therefore i dentifi ed with everything that is i n tri n

,

s i ca lly valuable and outwardly rich It is the .

most solid of all the metals and when in a state of ,

perfect purity consists of particles so fine in the

grain and so closely united that they can hardly ,

be separated When unalloyed it does not s uffer

.

any diminution or loss by melting ; it does not

tarnish in the air neither is it subj ect to rust if laid
,

by but al w ays retains it s natural appearance ; n o

,

acid or salt of any kind will affect it in the least

degree ; it has moreover a beautiful characteristic
yellow colour and is justly distinguished from all
,

other minerals by th e name of the k In g of metals

“
,
”
or the royal metal .

Th e history of go ld ab ounds in so much that i s

interesting that we have thought it worth while t o
,

trace a little of its ancient production and applica

tions G old has been known from the remotest
.

age Th e sacred writers used to identify it with

.

eve ry thing that was precious a n d speak of it as ,

4 H IST R O Y AND SOUR C E S OF S UPPL Y .

array ed him in vestures of fi n e linen and put a ,

gold chain about his neck A s fa r as we have.

been enabled to ascertai n by reference gold is ,

mentioned in the B ible in all upwards of three

hundred t imes in connection with various things
,

with the manipulation of which the old Jewish

patriarchs must have been tolerably conversant ;
for we read of j ewels crowns bowl s knops bars
, , , , ,

pillars hooks flo w ers rings chains bells plates

, , , , , , ,

tablets ouches and talents of gold ; also cherubi m s

, , ,

candlesticks mercy seats ephods breast plates

,
-
, ,
-
,

and calves all of which were of gold ; there were

,

besides settings of gold tables covered with gold

, ,

houses embellished with gold while the thron e ,

itself is said to have been overlaid with pure gold .

F urther all S olomon s drinking v essels were mad e

’

of this metal ( I Kings x A n d all kin g

“
.

S olomon s drinking vessels were of gol d and all

’

the vessels of the house of the fores t of L ebano n

were of pure gold ; none were of silver : it w a s
nothing accounted of in the days of S olomo n So .

abundant does it appear to have been in his ti m e ,

that it is reported that he received 6 66 tale nt s o f

gold ( equal to about 2 7 tons )in one year .

G old has been known and used by every nati o n ,

b oth uncivilised and civilised from the earli e s t ,

p eriod down to our ow n time A mo n g the o l d .

 A M E RIC AN G OL D F IE L D S .
5

E gyptian monuments it is foun d and semi b ar ,

-

barous nations also used it in the form of dust as

t h e principal medium of exchange When A merica .

was discovered by C olumbus gold was well known ,

to its inhabitants ; the C hinese have used it from

time immemorial ; th e M edes and Persians were
r emarkab l e even more than oth er A siatics for
, ,

their love of gold ; j ewel s of costly descriptions

were emp l oyed to indicate the rank of the wearer ,

a n d this custom is still continued in the E ast at

t h e present day Africa too has l ong been cele

.

bra te d as the l and of gol d dust and it is supposed -

,

that the O phir whence S o lomon obtained so much

w as a country on that coast To S how the sacred .

v alue in ancient times the E gyptians p l a ce d on

, ,

g old ,
it was represented by a circle with a dot in
the middle : this circle amongst that nation bei n g
, ,

the symbol of divinity and perfection .

G old is found in A merica and mines exist in ,

C alifornia M exico Brazil British C olumbia Peru

, , , , ,

C entral A merica G ranada and severa l other

, ,

localitie s in S outh A merica At present the

U nited S tates of A merica contribute more than
on e third of the total supply of gold
-
.

Th e metal is never met with in a pure state in

nature being always all oyed with silver and some
,

times with copper ; the proportion varyn greatly

6 H ISTOR Y AND SOUR C E S OF SUPPLY .

in the different gold mines of the world In C ali .

forn i a n and some other mines of A merica the purity ,

is not quite equal to our standard ; nevertheless ,

this does not alter the fact that America is the

richest gold producing country of the who le worl d
-

at the present ti m e .

C alifornia is the l argest fie ld in A merica pro ,

duc in g gold to th e va l ue of g per annum ;

M exico and S outh A merica contribute 16
(We are indebted f these statistics to “
C assell s ’
or

T echnical E ducator — M ineral and C ommercia l

Products . Previous to 1 8 4 7 ( the year of the dis
covary of go ld in C alifornia) the average produc e
of the whole world was fa r short of that now yearly

produced by C alifornia Professor Tomlinson i n

.
,

his U seful Arts and M anufactures s aid : Ye t

“
,
” “

so comparatively small were t he gatherings of th e

precious metal that in reckoning the averag e
,

produce of al l parts of t he New and Old World for

a series of years previous to 1 8 4 7 it did not am ou n t
,

”
to the annual value of fiv e millions sterli n g .

In Australia gold is fou n d i n New South Wa l e s

, ,

V ictoria M elbourne Sydney R eedy C reek G e e

, , , ,

l ong and numerous oth er places ; but the plac e s

,

just mentioned are the most i mportant and exte n

s ive producing districts in that country Ne w .

Z ealand i s also a gold p roducing country

- Tha t .
 AU STRAL IA AND ASIA .
7

Ne w Z ealand is remarkab l e for its

'

of Australia and
pureness being considerably above our present
,

E nglish standard and containing only about three

,

per cent of alloy or fifteen grains to the ounce

.
,
.

Th e year 1 8 5 1 was a year of Specia l interest to

the E nglish people and memorable to this country
,

in more re s pects than one It was in that year .

that the fi rst International E xhibition of Industry

w as Opened in H yde Park and it was in that year ,

a lso that Australia first began to reveal her

l ong hidden tr easure
-
The fi rst discovery in our
.

Australian possessions was made near Bathurst ,

situated ab out one hundred miles west of Sydney ,

New S outh Wales A gentleman of the name of

.

H argraves who had for some considerable time

,

been familiar with the geology of the district by ,

way of experiment took several baskets of soil ,

from the ground and washed the contents when ,

they were found to contain gold Th e exp eri .

ment was repeated with the assistance of a body

of men and the result fully justified his expecta
,

tions and rewarded him for his l abours This .

brilliant discovery soon however became known ,

and gold digging became a flourishing industry

- .

M ining operations were carri e d on by emigrants

from all parts of the world and in a short space ,

of tim e s im il ar results to those a lready a chieve d in

8 H ISTORY AND S UR C E S OF SUP PL Y O .

C alifornia fol lowed At

the present time the gold
.

producing districts of Australia with Ne w Z ealand , ,

contribute one third of the total supply

- Th e .

purity of the Australian go ld as taken from the

bowels of the earth as we have already remarked i s
,
-

greater than that of any other country in the world .

In A sia the U ral M ountains contain some rich

,

gold districts ; they are situated on the borders of

A siatic R ussia Tibet in the C hinese E mpire
.
, ,

also furnishes gold The islands of S umatra a n d

.

C eylon in the Indian O cean likewise contribute

, ,

to our store ; so do Borneo and Japan in t he ,

Pacific O ce an O ther parts of A sia yield small

.

supplie s such as the rivers of India C hina

, , ,

S umatra and A sia M inor but the tota l supply

, ,

i s not very impo rtant when compared with other

plac es the annual value not exceeding half a
,

million st erlin g ; the chie f districts being the Ural

M ountains and the E ast Indi es .

In Africa gold seems to have been found from

,

the very earliest ages ; and along the coast of C af

fraria the sands abound in gold dust This district - .

is reputed to be the oldest and richest of th e

source s known to the ancients ; it is supposed a s ,

already mentione d that the O phir of the ancients

,

w as part of this coast the place where Kin g ,

S olomon obtai ned so great an abun dance of gold

 AFR IC A AND E U R OPE .
9

(I Ki ngs x .
“
An d the navy also of H ira m ,
”
that brought gold from O phir The chief sources.

here are G uinea and the G old C oast ; the l atter

includes the district betw een D arfur a n d Abyssinia ,

where the principal portion is found A small .

quantity is found in the sands of the rivers G ambia ,

S enegal and Niger ;

”
, and although says Pro ,

fe s s or T om l inson “
Africa i s at once pointed out
,

by her G old C oast as yielding the precious metal

‘ ’
,

the whol e supply from that continent is not esti

mated at more than lbs weight annually . .

The value then of the whole produce of this conti

nent wil l not exceed a quarter of a milli on sterlin g
p e r annu m A
. frica in this respect
,
has lost her ,

an cient position and has become the poorest

quarter of the hemisphere i n the yi eld of the pre
c i ous metal .

H aving now s poken of most of the gold dis

t rict s we come nearer home and it will no , ,

doubt be interesting to our readers to k now

, ,

not only what are the gold yielding local ities of -

E urope , but also in our own country In .

E uro p e the Ural M ountains dividing A siatic

, ,

from E uropean R ussia furnish the largest quanti

,

ties of gol d It is also to be found in the sands

.

of the R hine ( in Prussia ) the R hone ( in F rance)

, ,

th e Tagus ( in S pain ) the D anub e ( in T urkey ) and

, ,

3 3
IO HISTORY AND U
S O R C E S OF SUPPL Y .

many other rivers but it is rarely considered worth

,

working because it exists in these respective

,

places in too smal l a quantity to pay expenses .

Th e provinces of A sturias and G ranada in S pain , ,

formerly furnished a large amount the mines ,

being very rich and valuab le but they are n ow ,

en tirely neglected Italy is not altogether destitute

.
,

for it is known to exist in the neighbourhood of

the A lps and in t he sands of some of the rivers
,
.

A t E de lfus in S weden it has al so been found

, ,
.

Th e C arpathian M ountains in the Austrian E mpire

, ,

als o furnish the precious metal The richest and .

l a rgest mine on the continent of E urope with t h e ,

exception of R ussia perhaps is in H ungary : this ,

and the U ral M ountains furnish the chief E uropean

supply .

O ur own country is not without her gold dis

t ri ct s for s mall quantities have been found i n
,

C ornwall In the reign of Queen E lizabeth exten

.

sive washings for gold were carried on at L ead

hills L anarkshire S cotland
, It has also been
,
.

found at Glen Tu rret in Perthshire at C u m berh ea d ,

in L anarkshire and more recently large quan t ities

,

ha v e been found in S utherlandshire Irelan d .

,

towards the close of the last century supplied a ,

l a rge quantity of gold but the yield lasted only

,

for a short period ; it was found at Arklow in ,

1 2 H ISTOR Y AND S OURC E S OF SUPPL Y .

bre aking up of old rocks containing gold under

-
,

the influence Of storms and torrents which have ,

swept the metal together with soil an d other

,

matters into deep receptacles leaving it often at

, ,

the bottom of rocks and in the bends of rivers .

Th e lowest of these deposits are general ly the

richest on account of the specific gravity of the
metal ; but it is sometimes found upon the surface
of the ear th ,and the C alifornian gold was dis
covered in this way .

Th e metal is found in veins in pyrites ( fire s ton e ) , ,

in granite rocks and in layers or strata of cl ay

,
.

gravel and pebbles sometimes at a considerabl e

,

distance below the soil It is also obtained in

.

considerable quantities mixed with sand and

gravel on the surface In North A merica it exists
.

in loo s e deposits in beds of gravel from nine inches

to three feet in thickness and from three to s ix ,

feet fro m the surface of the ground In C alifornia .

,

it consists chiefly of a lluv ia l gold to which referenc e ,

has already been made In Australia gold quartz

.

( a semi
-
crystallised rock c h emically termed
,
h y
drate of s ilicon ) is more commo n t he preciou s ,

met al in these lumps of rock appearing in th e

form of branchlike fragments H ere it is als o .

found in some abundance in various sized nugget s -

,

and m ore plentifully in the form of gold dust -

.
 S E PA R ATING G OL D F ROM THE ORE . 1 3

G old dust abounds chiefly in the sands and beds

-

of rivers O n the coas t of Africa it is said that

.
,

the negroes dig out the earth rich in gold dust to

,
-
,

a great depth In Ireland gold has been found in

.

masses some lumps being of great size

, T he
n uggets found in Australia often exist in large
masses one specimen having been found weighing
,

46 0 2 5 .The mines of R ussia contain large masses

of gold ; on the southern portion of the U ral
M ountains ( Asiatic 1 8 4 2 sands of immense
,

richness were discovered ; and at th e period of

which we speak an enormous mass of gold was
,

dug up weighi n g about eighty E ngl i sh pounds .

This splendid mass was afterwards placed in the

collections of the C orps des M ines at St Peters ,
.

burg S ome six years previous to this a large

.

p iece of this metal was found in the same neigh

bourh ood weighing upward s of 2 2 lbs troy
, . .

According to some writers upon this subj ect it ,

is not however a usual thing to fi n d m asses of

, ,

such proportio n s in the Ural districts of Asia or

E urope ; the metal more commonly existing in
small grains or frag ments and the yield averaging
,

from thirty to seventy grains of gold per ton of soil .

We have already s a id that in Australia one of ,

the great modern gold pro duci n g countries mas s ive

-
,

l umps are to be found in consi derable quantiti e s ;

14 H IST R O Y AND S OU R C E S OF S UPPL Y .

only the other day a frien d showed us a beautiful

nugget which he himself had dis covered in that
place which is now worn as a sca rf pin and the
, ,

purity of it no j eweller could dispute .

There are several ways of separating th e gold

from the ore at the difi ere n t mines throughout
the world . The most simple method is that of
washing the s ands of rivers that is the alluvial ,

deposits which have b een washed by floods and

storms into deep gullies There are numerous
.

processes of washing in vogue a n d these a re ,

adopted to suit the resources of the gold diggers -

.

In S outh America and other countries having

,

sands rich in gold dust this washing is performed

-
,

in shallow iron or z inc pans ; the earth b eing put

in and well stirred up with water the light earthy ,

matters suspended in the water being afterwards

poured away from the gold This process is re .

p e a t e d until a ll the particles of earth are removed ,

leaving the gold dust visible to the naked eye in

-

minute grains at the bottom Another method .

which has found some favour amongst gold diggers -

,

is the employment of shal low wooden troughs lined ,

with coarse cloth at the bottom ; thes e troughs ,

which are of some len g th must be placed in a

,

slightly inclined position ; th e auriferous s an ds are

-

then thrown into the trough, a gentle s tre am of

 DI FFE RE NT M E TH O D S . I5

water is allowed to r un in and from its incl ined ,

position the fin e sand is washed away leaving

, ,

b ehind the smal l particles of gold in the tissues of

the cloth which are recovered by washing in water
, .

In other cases ordinary sloping boards of common

, ,

deal in its rough state are taken and shall ow , ,

grooves made across them ; the soil is then thrown

upon the planks the coarseness of which together
, ,

with the grooves form collecti n g places for the

,
-

gold which on account of its very high spec ifi c

, ,

gravity sinks into the crevices thus provi ded

, ,

while the lighter matters are was hed away by the

stream of water employed for the purpose .

At the gold diggings of C a lifornia and Australia

-
,

where these rich sands and alluvial deposits exist

to a great extent a r ocker commonly called the
,

”
B urke rocker or cradle has been generally
, ,

employed ; this rocker will wash fro m seven hun

dred to one thousand bushels of gravel or sand a
day ; the cost of the machine complete being about
twenty fiv e dollars ( E nglish money £ 5 4s 2 d )
-
, . .

M ost of the gold of the Uni ted S tates is worked

up into j ewellery and not in the coinage
, a large
trade being done at Newark Philadelphia Provi , ,

dence R hode Islan d and numerous other places

, .

Pro fessor B lox a m in his work on metals thus , ,

describes the cradle used at the C ali fornian gold

I6 H IST RY AND S UR C E S OF SUPPL Y
O O .

diggings : This is a wooden trough about six feet

“

long resting upon rockers and at the head of it

, ,

is a grating upon which the alluvial deposit to be

washed is thrown This end of the cradle is about .

four inches higher th an the other so that a stream ,

of water entering it flows through and escapes at

the lower end left open for this purpose carrying

, ,

the earthy substances with it and leaving the par ,

t ic l e s of gol d with a small quantity of earthy

,

matter in the trough These are swept out into a

, .

pan dried in the sun and freed from the lighter

, ,

matters by blowing upon them It must be

understood that these are not the only methods
of gold washing -
the process being slightly dif
,

feren t at nearly all the gold mines .

At the mines in Russia iron sieves are most

generally used fi tted upon sloping boards upon
,

which cloth or some other substance is placed ;

, ,

these receive the deposit and are placed under a

gentle current of water which being well stirred , , ,

the fi n e sand and gold dust fall through on to the -

cloth beneath and are thus recovered

,
These .

processes cannot be employed when the gold exists

in iron pyrites quartz or other similar rock being
, , ,

only adapted to the washing of alluvial deposit s ,

sands , In any of the previous operations the

digging for go ld is attended with little exp ens e ;
 R U S SIAN ME TH O D . 1 7

but where it is disseminated through auriferous

iron pyrites quartz rock &c a considerable outlay
, , .
,

genera lly attends the operation E xpens ive crush

.

ing machines and stampers have to be emp loyed

for the purpose of breaking up the rough hard
m aterial which contains the go l d S ometimes the .

ore is very hard ; so tha t before submitting it to

the action of the stamping or crushing machine it ,

has to be well burnt and quenched in water in ,

order to render it more brittle and consequently

,

e as ier to crush Th e stampin g and crushing is

.

done in water and is continued until the ore is

,

reduced to a very fine powder when the gold is ,

s eparated by one or other of the process e s already

e xplained ; or it may be extracted by amalgama

,

tion w ith metallic mercury which di ssolves and

,

collects it The surplus mercury may be removed

.

by putting the amalgam into a coarse flannel bag

and well squee z ing it w hen a great portion of the
,

mercury will run out leaving the remainder a solid

,

m ass in the bag Th e re m aining mercury may be

.

got rid of by placin g the substance in an iron pan

or box and heating it o v er a gentle charcoal fi r e ,
,

which renders it volatil e .

 C H APTER II.

P ro p e rt i e s of G old .

H AVING now pointed out the places wh ere gold is

to b e found and the way in w hich it is extracted
,

or separated from the ore we leave this part of th e

,

subject and purpose in what follows to deal with

,

the precious metal as a commercial product In .

this we hope to give some practical informatio n

w hich will no doubt b e useful to our readers mor e ,

particularly to working j ewellers .

Pure gold on account of its very rich colour a n d

,

non liab ility to tarnish in air or water either b y

-
,

oxidation or from the ac tion of sulphuretted hydro

gen is used for a varie ty of commercial a n d
,

orna m ental purposes Being very solid it has a

.

high s pecifi c gravity one other metal only being

,

superior ; this metal (platinum )being the heaviest

know n substance ; it is however not much em
, ,

ployed in commerce The specifi c gravity of gold

.

i s 1 9 2 b ut by h am m erin g it becomes 1 9 5
, It wil l
20 PR O PE RTIE S O F GOL D .

may represent grains pennyweights or ounces , , .

Th e metal s employed by the jewellers in the

manufacture of their articles or wares woul d be
numerically expressed thus

Water ,
sp . gr. ( p
s ecific gravi ty ) 1 or

S p elter do .
7
°
2 or

C opp er do. or

S ilv er do. 10 °

5 or

Gold do . 19
°

5 or

The weight of gold is nineteen and a half times

that of water of the same bu lk silver ten and a ,

half times heavier and copper nearly nine times

, ,

as indicated by the above table .

Perfectly pure gold or fine gold as it is more, ,

generally called cannot be procured in commerce

, ,

in consequence of the long C hemical refining process

which would m ake it too expensive for m a n ufa c
ture t s of j ewellery accordi n g to present com peti ng
,

prices The difi ere n t quali ties are expressed in

.

carats ; the finest gold which should be quite free

,

from any alloy is com m only expressed as 2 4 but

, ,

the fine gold of commerce consists only of about

2 32 to 2 35 carats and this is quite good enough for
-

ordinary practical purposes F ine gold consists of .

irregular minute grains of a dull ye llow colour ,

but it can b e made bright by heatin g and boilin g

in hydrochloric acid ; however this is only a matter ,
 ATOM IC WE IGHT
. 2 I

of tas te and does not make the slightest difference

,

to the working of the metal in fact some m a sters ,

give a preference to the dead colour S o far as our .

own experience goes we unhesitatingly say that

,

for manufacturing purposes the one is quite as

good as the other The mel ting point of fin e gold
.
o

is F ahrenheit and it appears of a greenish

,

shade when fused in th e pot ; when hea ted to the

above degree it reflects like a mirror F luxes will .

change the colour of gold ; borax makes th e colour

rather paler whilst saltpetre deepens it
, The .

chemical nomenclature of fi n e gold and of the ,

other metals used in j ewellery with it are rept e ,

sen ted as follows

Na m e of El em en t .

G old ( aurum )
S ilv er ( )
argen tum

C op p er ( cup rum )
S p elter ( z in c )
H y drogen ( a gas)

These various elemen tary bodies have symb ols of a

very simple character which are generally formed
,

by taking the i n itial of their names ; but in cases

w here t w o or more e lements are the same some ,

other letter must be taken for distinction ; the

symbols therefore of metals represent or expres s
, ,

their chemical names .

22 PRO PE RTIE S OF GOL D .

The equ i va len t of

a metal is only another nam e
for atomic weight : and these equivalents are at
present practically recognised by the principle of
the atomic weight of hydrogen being taken as
the standard unit of I In order to assist the
.

reader we will illustrate this It is we ll known .

that pure water consists of two elements or bodies ,

hydrogen and oxygen and that these ingredients

,

or gases do not exist in equal or variable but in ,

quite fixed proportions ; every atom of water con

,

tains eight times the amount of oxygen to that of

—
hydrogen therefore hydrogen being the lightest
, ,

it is taken as 1 E qu i va len t c/zern ica l wezgkt then

.
, ,

expresses the different proportions by weight in , ,

which substances whether solids or fluids c hemi

, ,

cally unite with each other F or example one .

,

part by weight of hydrogen go es as far in com ,

bining w ith eight of oxygen to form an oxide ,

as 1 0 8 of silver or 1 9 7 of gold ; a n d these

,

equivalents w ill not neutralise the eight of oxygen

'

more efle ctually than the on e of hydrogen does ,

but just the same and produce a simil ar com

,

pound The same remarks app ly to all the other

.

equiva l ents of elements If we take to S how thi s

.
,

more clearly one grain of hy drogen and eight of

,

oxygen exactly nine grains of water are formed

,

but if w e were t o take tw o gra in s of hydrogen a n d

 ‘

y x.

'
GOL D BEATE R S
-

e ight of oxygen and submit them to the s ame

,

t reatment the same amount of water woul d be

,

f ormed as b efore and the s urplus hydroge n found

,

u ncombined S o it is with gold : if we were t o

.

t ake more than the 1 9 7 equivalents of gold to eight

o f oxygen to form oxide of gold the surplus in this ,

c a se as in t h e a b ov e would be found uncombined ;

, ,

t h erefore to form oxid e of gold we say eight

o x ygen 1 9 7 gol d ,
.

F ine gold is of a v ery mall eab le temper It .

s preads under the hammer more than any other

m etal and may b e worked into a lmost any form

,

o r design by the hand of a skilful workman There .

i s no metal that can be extended so much by

h ammering or ro ll ing as pur e gold O n e ounce
, .
,

says S mith in his S chool of Arts “

beaten into ,
”

”
l eaves would cover t en acres of ground
, It will .

”
s o yield to mechanica l force says Luts ch aun ig
, ,

that it may b e reduced to the 2 0 0 0 0 0 th part of ,

”
a n inch i n thickness F or manufacturing purposes
.

these extremes are seldom or n ever reached Pra c .

tically the limit to which fi n e gold is now reduced

as regards th inness i s in the gold beater s art -
’

where it is so wrought that a hundred s quare feet

of it weigh only one ounce and th is would cover ,

only the 48 0 th part of the space mention e d by

S mith The metal e m pl oyed by th e go l d b eater
.
-
24 PROPE RTIE S OF G L DO .

should be pure or very nearly so b ut it generall y

, ,

consists of ab out 2 3 carats The various colours .

which this kind of gold presents are obtained by ,

alloys with silver and copper in different propor

tions. The pale leaves consist of twenty thre e -

parts of fi n e gold and one part of silver ; the deep

coloured leaves approaching to a tint of red con
,
'

tain twenty three p arts of fine gold and one part

-

of best S wedish copper ; the fine orange coloure d -

more common ly met with contain half part of ,

-

silver and half part of copper to twenty three of

,
- -

fi n e gold Too much silver in th e alloy is a n

.

o b stacle to the gold beater in consequenc e of its

-
,

hardening properties therefore its use should be

,

avoided as much as possible .

’
G o ld b eaters gold is prepare d by t ak ing the
-

right proportions of fine gold a n d alloy and m elt ,

ing the mixture in a crucible ; it is then cast into

s mall ob l ong ingots each about th ree quarters of
,
-

an inch in width and one a n d a half inch in

,

length and weighing about t wo ounces

, E ach .

ingot is afterwards rolled very th in between two

reversib le polished steel rollers, the go ld being
often annealed in order to render it s oft as -

it has a t en den cy to become h ard under this

o

process ; by this m eans it c an be reduce d wi th

little exp e nse into a very fin e riband, of n ot m ore
 GOL D - BE ATE R S
’
G LD O . 25

than one eight hundredth of an inc h in thickness

- -
.

It is then cut into lengths about one inch square .

A number of these are taken and secured by a

most useful contrivance With a sixteen pound .
-

ham m er having a smooth convex face the gold is

, ,

the n beaten until its dimensions are considera bly

exte n ded when it is cut as before hammered
, ,

agai n and i f necessary the process repeated until

,

it is of th e proper thinness for transfer to the b ooks

in which it is sold to the public These usually .

consist of twenty fiv e leaves each w hen trimmed -

,

being about 3} in square and costing to the trad e .

,

fro m Is to 1 s 3d the book

. . . .

Th e uses to which this gold is now put even in ,

everyday transactions are more numerous pro ,

bably than the majority of w orkmen through

whose hands it regularly passes in the different
stages of manufacture contemplate ; suffi ce it to
say that almost every article both i n business
, ,

enterprise and domestic life is bea ut ified an d ,

enriched by its application at the han ds of studious

and skilful artisans E ven the paper upon our .

walls our china tea trays book edges and covers

, ,
-
,
-
, ,

signboards sewing machines and in fact almost

, , ,

every article and trinket of our household is de ,

c ora t e d more or l e ss with this met al We have also .

'

p ri n t i n
g i n letters of gold gold lace a n d by n o , ,

C
2 6 P R OPE R TIE S OF G OL D .

m eans the least our b est picture frames are all

,
-

embellishe d wi th it ; and although the various us e s

thus described may appear to the uninitiated a s
rather comprehen s ive and costly the gold would ,

not indeed if recovered from a whole host of such

,

articles and trinkets and melted amount to more

, ,

than two pennyweights or of th e value of 8 s 6d

, . .

We have deemed it desirable to supply this in for

mation which may perhaps be considered beside
, , ,

the chief branch of our subject viz the uses of , .

gold and its connection with the j ewellery trade

and the money or currency in ord e r to S how the
,

widespread usefulness of the precious metal ; and

the very extre me of m a lleability to which it is
reduced in order that it may be applied to so vast
a circle for purposes of ornamentation and that at ,

a comparatively reasonable cost .

F ine gold is quite as remarkable for its ductility

as its malleability Th e ductility of a metal is
.

the possession of that property of yielding to

mechanical force which renders it capab le of bei n g
drawn into wire successively th rough a series of
graduated holes in a steel pla te called by wire ,

drawers a draw plate ; if the metal be perfectly

,
-

ductile wire of almos t any thinnes s m ay be thus

,

obtained Pure gold is at the h e ad of all metals

.

for ductility ; it is s tat e d that w ire drawers have -

2 8 PR OPE R TIE S OF GOL D .

tened b etween a pair of steel rollers to any si z e ,

to suit the obj ect in view .

There is reason to believe that th e ancient Isra

elites had some knowledge of the ductility of this
metal and that the art of making round wire w a s
,

kno w n to them (E xodus xxxix 3) An d they did .

beat the gold into thin plates and cut it i n to w i r es , ,

to work it in th e b lue and in the purple and in

, ,

the scarlet a n d in the fin e linen with cunning

, ,

”
work It is n ot said to what extent these wires
.

were reduced in thinness and no object but one ,

‘

purely experimental would aim at the extension

of a n ounce of fine gold into a w ire the length

we hav e mentioned ; indeed we much question

whether the most experienced wire drawer of the -

present school would accept an order such as the

above even at his own price The drawing of a
,
.

pennyweight of gold by mechanical force into a

wire 1 ft long and a single grain into a wire
.
,

4 8 0 3ft is a di ffi
. culty
,
not to be easily overcome .

We have some practical knowledge of the art of

w ire drawing and we distinctly say tha t unless
-
, ,

the w ire was previously coated very strongly with

silver any attempt on the part of the workman
,

to produce such a length must result in failure If .

the object can be attained which we much ques ,

tion then the silver m ay be removed from the

,
 TE NA C ITY OF G OL D . 2 9

su r face of the wire by dis s olving with nitric acid ;

,

a n d although the acid has no effect upon pure gold ,

s till in co n sequence of the thread of gold bei n g so

,

e xtremely fine and delicate it must be done with

,

v e r y great care to prevent the wire becoming dis

u n it e d .

T h e tenacity of a met a l is its strength and

—
tough ness th at property which prevents when ,

m ec h anical power is exerted the easily tearing

,

asu n der of the metal the separation of the particles

,

whe n excessive force is applied and the giving ,

way w hen supporting any particular weight In .

this respect gold is not at the head of the list ; for

while a piece of gold wire of the thickness of
No 1 4 si z e Birmingham wire gauge will support
.

a weight of 1 5 0 2 lbs avoirdupois a w ire exactly

.
,

the same dimensions in silver will support 1 8 7 lbs .

,

and a similar one of iron 5 49 lbs Thus the posi

.
,

tion that gold occupies with regard to its tenacity

and toughness is not equal to that of its ductility
,

and malleability .
 C H APTER III .

V a rious Q u a lit i e s an d Alloy s of G old .

FINE gold is too soft to stand the wear and tear of

ordinary use hence arose the necessity for the incor
,

ora t i on of some other material to give i t increased

p
hardness The following table gives the relative
.

value of the different carats and the proportion of ,

alloy to be added taking 2 4 as the unit of fi n e gold

,

Q ua lit ie s of G ol d. Alloy to be a dded .

24 c ara ts .
23
22
2 I
20
I9
18
I7
16
IS
1
4
13
12
II
10

9
8
7
6
S
4
3
2
1
 P UR C HA SAB LE PR IC E .
3I

The ab ove value represents the ounce troy ,

and is quoted at the mint price of purchase .

Th e purchasable price of fin e gold from refiners

will be a little higher than that given in the
above tab le on account of the expenses in re
,

fi ning ; in large quantities say over 1 0 ozs , .

,

it will cost from £ 4 5 s 3d to £ 4 5 s 6d per . . . .

ounce ; in smaller quantities it will cost from ,

£4 5 .s 6 d to
.
£4 6s per ounce ; there
. fore i f 1 o z , .

'

of fine gold be re quired it will cost £ 4 6s n ett

, .
,

from all houses .

In judging of a piece of work of a ll oyed gold ,

the value (if with a V iew of sale ) must not be

calculated merely upon the amount of fine gold
the piece of work contains ; for in that case the , ,

calcul ation as to the real value wi ll be wrong and

misleading ; because in the alloy there is a certain
proportion of silver and as th is metal is rather
,

expensive a loss would occur by the transaction

, .

F or example if we take the p roper propor tion of

,

fi n e gold existing in an ounce of 1 8 carat gold a t -

,

the mint value as given in the table £ 3 3s 9 d to , . .

,

obtain that amoun t of gold from the refiner in th e

best market it will cost £ 3 4s 3d (the increas e . .

being due to the expenses in refining) in order to ,

produce that fine stat e of division required for

a ll oying. Now in order to produce 1 8 carat gold
,
-
,
32 Q UA L ITIE S A ND AL L OYS .

5 dw t s or 6 carats of alloy must be added to t h e

.
,

quantity of fi n e gold of the ab ove value ; if w e

say half silver and the other hal f copper at t h e ,

lowest trade pr ice it will cost 9 d ; so to p ra c t i .

cally produce an 1 8 C arat alloy of gold it will-

cost £ 3 5 s per ounce to the manufacturer of

.

jewellery before he actually introduces it int o

his workshop All o ther alloys should be c a lc u
.

lated after the same manner and we should say ,

an ounce of 8 carat gold is wor th 1 1 os

' -
.

Th e use of 2 2 carat gold as our national

-

standard of value for the coinage is well known ,

but a few addi tional particulars will not b e irre

levant to that branch Of the s ubj ect upon which
we are now entering G old coins when first intro
.
,

duc e d into the currency of E ngland by H en ry III .

,

were of fine gold that is to say of 2 4 carats

, .

E dward III was the fi rst E nglish king who used

.

gold coins of an inferior standard in the form ,

of 6s pieces
. nearly equal in size to the present
,

sovereign and consisting of 2 33 carats A coin

, .

called a noble followed worth 6s 8 d E dward IV , . . .

reduced the standard to that of 1 8 carats The .

nex t change was made by H e nry V III rai s ing it .

to 2 2 carats F rom that time until the re i gn of

.

Queen E liz a beth the currency underwent various

changes ; but it was then again fixed at 2 2 carats ,
 TH E C O INAGE .
33

and it has so continued with about one exception

dow n to the present time A ll E ng lish gold coins .

are nominally and intrinsically worth the sums

they represent This is so when they leave the
.

M int and have not been subj ected to the wear and
,

tear of circulation .

B esides the standard fi neness for coins there is ,

a lso a legal weight fixed according to the regula

,

tions of the M int Thus in E ngland a pound

.

troy of the standard metal is worth £ 4 6 1 5 s so ,

that if a single pound troy of standard gold

w ere taken to the M int to be coine d after forty ,

six so vereigns and one half sovereign had been -

manufactured out of it a portion of gold of the ,

v alue of 5 s not used up in the coins would

.
, ,

remain Th e same quantity will coin 44; guin eas

.
,

of the value of 2 1 s each ; hence the value of

.

s tandard gold is £ 3 1 7 s 1 Id per ounce . . .

The coinage of gold is conducted with great

exactness by the offi cers of the M int with respect ,

to weight ; and the extreme accuracy with which

they are compelled to work will be shown by
the following extract from the first schedule of
the C oinage A ct 1 8 7 0 , .

The imperial weight i n grains only is here given

C oi n . Rem edy .

S ov erei gn
H alf-sov erei gn
34 QUAL ITIE S AND AL L O YS .

The is the difference allowed to t h e

rem edy

D eputy M aster of the M int between the stan d ard

-
,

and real weight of the manufac t ured coins ; whi c h

in a sovereign is only one fifth of a single gra i n ;
-

and to this limit he has invariably confined h i m

self as the trial of the Pyx fully proves This
,
.

test which is one of the most ancient custo m s

,

( the fir s t known writ

-
f or a trial of the Pyx dating

from the reign of E dward made on Wed

n es da y July at the G oldsmiths H all ’

,
2 1 1 8 75 , , ,

according to the provisions of the C oinage A c t ,

1 8 70 . Al though this is a trial of great importan c e

to the authorities at the M int and also to the ,

public especially to the manufacturing golds m iths

, ,

who are constantly melt i ng up the coin of the

realm for manufacturing and commercial purposes ,

it is a matter in which the latter take little or n o

interest To t he former the verdict is of great
.

interest because if favourable it is an honourable

, , ,

commendation of the ofli c ers of the M int for the ,

faithful perform ance of their onerous duties durin g

the past year ; and also a perfect guarantee to
the public and the goldsmiths that the la rge ,

amount of additional gold coinage annually manu

fa c tured and circulated is fully up to the legal
s tandard b oth as to fineness and weight
, .

Th e s ta ndard finene ss for gold coin s is 1 1 1 2 ths -

36 QUAL ITIE S AND AL L OYS .

cial men We have heard some persons expre s s

.

doubts as to the genuineness of a com the colo u r

of the Australian sovereign as regards its val ue
,

b ut they have been those through whose han d s

no l arge numb er of coins have passed and w h o ,

are unacquainted with the variety of colours gold

may be made to present to the eye ; if there be
any real difference bet w een the Australian and
E ngl ish sovereign , the former has the advantage -

on account of the extra silver it contains ; sil v er

being more expensive than copper That cha rac .

t eri s ti c deep red colour to be seen in a new

E nglish gold coin is produced when it is s ub

,

m itt e d to the very highly po l ished dies of the

-

coining press when it comes out perfectly bright

-
,

and of a b eautiful lustre .

Previous to the reign of C harles II all the coin .

of the realm was made by hand — by forging or

hamme ring pieces of gold to the proper thick
ness required for the coins then cutting squares
,

a little larger tha n required for the different sizes .

Th e corn ers were afterwards removed from the

squares and rounded to the size when they were
, ,

adjusted to the weight of the money desire d

to b e put into circulation These round blan k
.

piec es were then placed between two harden ed

and tempered steel dies containing the pattern
,
 TW E NTY TWO C ARAT -
.
37

of the intended coin ; the upper die being struck

with a hammer the impression was produced
, .

This method of making the coins was fa r from

perfect in consequence of the difli culty in p lacing
,

the dies exactly opposite each other and also from ,

the uncertainty of the blow producing a perfect

impression on the blank piece of gold intended
for the coin Th e coining press introduced into
.
-
,

E ngland in the beginning of the last century ,

remedied this lo n g experienced defect -

.

O ur present gold coins are as nearly pe rfect as

p ossible as regards artistic design taste and , ,

w orkmanship and as such are well known all

, ,

over the world .

Twenty t wo carat gold besides bei n g made into

- -
,

coins is very largely used in the manufacture of

,

wedding rings which must b e of this quality S o

-
,
.

keen is the competition in this branch of industry

that a wedding ring may now be pur chased from
-

the manufacturer for a very lit tle above its real

value in gold ; and it is by no means an unusual
thing at M r A ston s manufactory in B irm ingham
.
’

when trade is busy to work up in this manner ,

a thousand pounds worth of gold per week This

’
.

quality of gold is very expensive to us e for such a

purpose ; consequently the work ing loss woul d be
very great in a manufactory carrying on business
38 QUAL ITIE S AND AL L OYS .

to the above extent ; indeed it could not possi bly ,

be estimated at less than per ann um O f .

course we mean that this amount goes into th e

,

polishing dirt floor sweep wa shi n g waters 8z c

, , , .

H owever there is one decided advantage whi c h

,

the wedding ring makers have over other j ewellers

-
,

— —
viz that the material the coin is sent with th e
.

order and no doubt the manufacturers in several

,

— —
other branches of jewell ery not to say all would
like the same system or custom of trade esta
bl ishe d with them .

Wedding ring makers have to p ay a duty upon

-

their manufact ure of 1 7s per ounce 1 oth being .

,
-

remitt ed for loss i n finishing ; b ecause it is com

p u l s ory that this quality should when made into ,

wedding rings be H a ll m a r ked and this has to be

-
,
-
,

done when the articles are in a ha lf fin i she d state -

therefore for every s ix ounces you pay for fiv e

, ,

and so on F or this reason it is usual to melt

.

down the coin of the realm and for more purposes ,

tha n one it is an advantage to w edding ring -

manufacturers to do so for they can then depend ,

upon the quality and also e fle ct a saving of from,

4 d to 5 d per oz
. . a gai n to a large firm not to
.
-

b e lost s ight of in thes e days of eager compe ,

tition Twenty two carat gold is also used in the

.
- -

m anufacture of mourning rings but to a more -

,
 TWE NTY C ARAT .
39

limite d extent than the above In some instances .

,

watch cases are made of 2 2 C arat gold ; but E nglish

- -

watch cases more commonly consist of 1 8 carat

- -

gold . Watch cases (E nglish ) bear the mark of

-

G olds m iths H all as a guarantee of their quality

’

and a r e manufactured duty free .

Twenty carat gold does not occupy a very promi

-

nent position in the j eweller s workshop the demand ’

for it being so limited that it is rarely if ever asked

for. A s a consequence it is not largely m a n ufac
,

t ure d into articles of j ewellery S ometim e s how .

,

ever this quality of gold is use d by col oured gold

,

workers wh en different colours or shades are

,

required in decorative des Ign s and when these ,

colours cannot b e produced in in ferior gold For .

this purpose it is b oth elegant and ornamental .

B rown gold m a y be made b y taking twenty

parts of fi n e gold and four parts of copper ; puce
gold by taking twenty parts of fin e gold and four
parts of S ilver ; thes e ingredients must b e well
inco rporated In Ireland 2 0 C arat gold is a l egal
.
-

standard and has been so from the ye ar 1 7 8 4 in

, ,

the reign of G eorge III This standard was esta .

blishe d principally to encourage the manufacture

, ,

of watch cases and j ewellery it being at that time

-
,

illegal to manufacture artic les of th i s de s cription

inferior to 2 2 carat gold -
.
40 Q UAL ITIE S A
N
D A L L OYS .

E igh teen
carat gold is the second E nglish stan d
-

ard and of this quality all our b est jewellery is mad e

, .

It is largely manufactured into all kinds of person a l

ornaments as it is an alloy rich in quality ; th e
,

beauty of its colour moreover not being muc h

altered by we a r In E ngl and this standard is use d
.

in the manufacture of watch cases which if of -

, ,

prop er fineness bear the G overnment hall marks

,
-
.

There is now no duty on the manufacture of watch

cases of any description M ourning rings too are .
-

made somewhat extensively of this quality ; wed

ding rings also to some extent
-
.

M ourning and wedding rings if of 1 8 C arat -

,
-

gold or of the higher standard to which we have

,

already referred must pay duty upon the manu

,

facture of 1 7s per oz 1 6th part as usual b eing

. .
,
-
, ,

r emitted for waste in finishing It is compulsory .

that these articles should be hall marked and -

,

bear the stamp of the properly authorised offi cials -

of the town in which they are made In B irm i n g .

ham the title of the guild is Th e Guardians of

“

”
the S tan dard of Wrought Plate It has exclu .

sive j urisdiction over all the gol d made into the

above articles i n the tow n of Birmi n gham or ,

within 30 miles of it .

E ighteen —carat gold fro m the peculiar nature

,

of its alloy can b e wrought into almost any

,
 E IG H TEE N C AR A T .
41

article of exqui s ite beauty a n d delicate work

manship ; if properly cast it is both malleable,

and tenacious . It is also exceedingly ductile .

A hard n ess is imparted to this quality of gold

which admirably adapts it to the manufacture of
j ewe llery of the highest order There is perhaps .
, ,

a diffi culty in preparing 1 8 carat gold not ex p e ri

-
,

e n c e d in some other alloys this defect soon shows

itself when submitted to the breaking down mill -
,

by litt le cracks all over the surfa ce of the bar of

gold ; and when this appe arance presents itself ,

it is by fa r the most economical plan to r e melt it -

at once than to go on with the breaking down ;

,
-

for whe n the process of slitting is attempted the ,

gold will all fly into little fragments and the pro ,

h ability is that some will be lo s t Th e prevailing

.

opinion in the trade is that this want of unity or

,

amalgamati on of the particles of the gold and

alloy is due to the copper which is employed .

—
O ur experience teaches us havi n g tri e d every ki n d
of copper from th e bean shot down to th e b e s t
,
-

refi ned S wedish wire for the purp ose of produci n g

,

1 8 c ar at gol d rather cheap e r

- — that we have i n v a ri
ably found that there is n ot s o much in t h e
quality of the copper as i n the quan tity us e d .

This w e wish to s tate for the bene fi t of the

'

g oldsmiths trade
’
F ormerly we used a rather
.
4 2 Q UA L ITIE S A ND AL L OYS .

large proportion of copper in ord er to e ffe c t ,

a saving of about 3d per oz but the misfort u n e

. .
,

to which we have just alluded sometimes p r e

sented itself and after trying all sorts of c op
,

per with no certainty of permanent success w e

, ,

thought of the plan of a ll oying with more silve r

and less copper In this we succeeded and n ow
.
,

never meet with a b ar exhib iting the defects

aft er rolling j ust described .

It is the most economical plan wh en these defect s ,

appear to reduce the bar to the regular 9 carat

,
-

quality It is only right to state that we always found

.

1 8 carat gold alloyed with b ean shot copper a more

-
,
-
,

difii c ult and harder alloy to work with than when

the refined wire was used O n e great drawback in
.

s hot copper which is very injurious in a l loying

( ,
,

particularly in this quality)is that it may contain ,

lead or tin and half a grain of either i n an ounce

of this gold will preven t it from working This .

quality of gold is now always manufact ured fully

up to the stand a rd fineness every design pos ,

s ible being hall m a rked ; and where this is not

-

possible the guarantee of the manufacturer is given

,

with the article who if a respectable person can

, , ,

be thoroughly depended upon Previous to the .

year 1 7 9 8 it was illegal to manufacture from this

quality of gold now however some thousands of
, ,
44 Q UAL ITIE S A ND A L L OYS .

in prop er condition it must be well hammered upon

,

the edge and annealed in order to render the grai n

, ,

m ore close and prevent it cracking in the rolling

m ill. This process may be wisely repeated upon the

surface and the ingot again put through the fir e
,
.

Th e gold is then ready for the breaking down mill -

,

and may b e safely wrought into wires or sheets of

different sizes .

Fifteen carat gold is another alloy l argely used i n

-

the manufacture of coloured jewellery This .

quality to our mind is second to none with re

, ,

sp e ct to works of art in jewellery b oth in regard ,

to taste and appearance as well as durability It,

.

can be made to look quite equal to the finest gold ,

and in addition it is easy of ma n ipulation ; alm ost

any article can be easily made from it whilst the ,

hardness which nine parts of al loy imparts is not ,

such as to prove a hindrance or a diffi culty in the

manufacture but unites with it that amount of
,

strength and durability which is so essential in

costly articles of j ewelle ry These advantages .

m ake articles of this gold wear much better than

when made of a softer material ; they also keep their

form and shape a considerable time longer .

According to the provisions of the A ssay A c t of

1 8 5 4 1 5 carat gold can now be assay marked as a
,
- -

guarantee of proper fineness but it is not compulsory,

 THIRTEE N C ARAT .
45

unless requested by the purchaser There is no duty .

on its manufacture neither is there on that of

,

1 8 carat gold into chains studs

-
lockets charms
, , , ,

fancy rings 81 0
, . Purchasers of 1 5 carat goods -

should beware of an inferior quality of gold intro

duc ed into the trade and called 1 5 carat b earing a -
,

stamp something similar to the hall mark ; h owever -

,

this is n ot the h all mark but the private mark of

-
,

the manufacturer Nevertheless the general public

.
,

wh o are conversant with the prices at which these

articles are sold will at once see that this is not
,

done with the intention of representing the

quali ty as equal to 1 5 C arat by a glance at our
-
,

table of values for the various qualities We shall .

now give a n account of the different qualities i n

general use .

Thirteen carat gold is called common when

-

speaking of coloured golds for the re ason that it is

,

about the lowest quality that c a n be conveniently

coloured to look rich and beautiful A slightly .

inferior quality ( 1 z écarat ) can be coloured b ut

-
,

1 3 C arat is about the usual kind e m ployed in all

-

respectable coloured gold houses In B irmingh am

-
.

a very large quantity of gold is weekly em ployed .

in manufactures of this quality .

S ome firm s manufacture nothin g else It: is .

largely made into chains lockets p ins stud s , , , ,

46 Q UALITIE S AND AL L OY S .

s leeve l inks solitaires , pendants brace lets ri n gs

-
, , , ,

brooches and fil igree o rnamentation

,
In fact .
,

almost every article we can mention has it in som e

part of its composition If the reader were to tak e
.

a walk down any of the principal streets of B i r

m i n gh a m viz New S treet B ull S treet or H igh
,
.
, ,

S treet the vast maj o rity of articles of coloured

,

gold jewellery exhibited in the shops that met his

eye would b e of this quality and marked as ,

1 5 carat fi n e gold
-
Th e retail purchasers are of
.
,

course in most instances ign orant of the true

, ,

value of gold and the art of alloying ; and som e ,

on the representations of the shopkeepers who ,

often know no better believe that they a re buying

,

full 1 5 carat gold of the p roportion expressed in

-

the A ct of 1 8 5 4 It is a diffi cult m a tter too eve n

.
, ,

in this enlightened age in which the secrets of the ,

goldsmith s craft are freely a n d openly expressed

’

to convince them of the error of their b elief S ome .

manufacturers profess to have secrets in the art of

producing good colours for their wares a n d there
is no doubt a motive for this namely the produc
, , , ,

in g a demand for the articles of special firms well ,

know n for excellence of fi nish over all others To , .

understand perfectly the art of alloying gold a n d

silver is of very great importance and an advantage ,

to m anufacturing goldsmith s b e sides having a ten ,

 TWE L VE AND TE N C A RAT .
47

d oncy t o p roduce profitable results more than any ,

thing ( i f t h e practical part be un derstood properly )

connect e d w ith the art of the goldsmith .

T welv e c arat gold is the best of the bright golds

-
,

and is s o c alled to distinguish it from the coloured ;

although a n y of the qualities that are desc ribed
in sp ea ki n g of coloured gold may be made bright
by a littl e variation in the mixture of alloy The .

deman d fo r articles in this gold is not at present

of an e xtensive nature ; no doubt because the
fi ni s h of c o lo ured gold looks more costly and beau
tiful No gold inferior to 1 2 carat will colour to
.
-

present th at appearance which ch aracterises the

higher qualities Twelve carat gold finished bright
.
-

ha s a fi n e rich spark li n g appearance and when ,

the work manship is good is very imposing ; it is

a good q uality to work upon b eing tolerably soft,

and ductile as wel l as posses sing g ood malleable

,

p roperties T h
. e quality generally manu factured is
a littl e under the standard fineness and therefore ,

cannot be hall marked G em fancy and other

-
.
, ,

rings w he n made of the full standard quality bear

, ,

the government stamp as a guarantee of its purity .

Ten carat gold sustains all the characteri s tics of

-

the former quality both as regards facility of

,

manufactur e and fi nish ; there are no hall marks -

for this kind of gold and it is very seldom m anu

,
4 8 Q UA L ITIE S AND A LL OYS .

fa c ture d fully up to the stand a rd unless speci a l ly

,

a s ked for A large quantity of goods is mad e o f

.

this quali ty in B irmingham .

Nin e c a rat gold is regularly manufactured i n t o

-

all kinds of bright good s a n d this quality w h en

, ,

made fully up to the standard of fineness is h a ll ,

marked The demand for it is largely in cr e a s

.

in g . It is chiefly employed in the m a n u fa c

ture of keeper and fancy rings A good trad e h a s
.

recently sp r ung up in the manufacture of soli d

gold chains of this class of gold After all the .
,

quality w hich is most extensively employed in

every possible description of manufacture is usual ly ,

below this standard probably it is about 8 5 carats ;

,

a n d i f alloyed accordin g to the following table

w ill st a nd the aqua test perfectly we ll Nine .

carat of the m ixture of alloy we have given in

the table will stand more than ordinary treatment
,

from the hands of the workman and may be ,

touched and removed from the anneali ng pan while -

still red hot without injury to any subsequent

,

manipulation of it ; it may also be quenched at

any degree of heat in pickle or water if any ,

advantage is likely to accrue from it ; but we

strongly obj ect to the continuous quenching of
gold a lloys at every subsequent process of anneal
—
ing partly bec a use every time the metal is
 NINE AND E IGH T C AR AT.
49

h d in sulphuric acid pickle a portio n of

‘

q u e n c e

alloy i n these low qualities is dissolved .

T hi s i m proves the quality of the gol d by which ,

th e m a n ufacturer does not receive any be n efit but ,

is a ctu a l ly a loser M oreover we sh a ll see th a t

.
,

whe n w e come to the processes of soldering this ,

pic k li n g or boi ling out is perfectly indispensable

- .

Ni n e c arat alloys if alloyed with too much

-
,

S pe lter w i ll not present the characteristics w e

,

hav e j u st named in respect to treatment ; if shaken

or to u ch ed while hot they are very britt le and dif
,

fi cu l t t o work ; consequently they take longer i n

work in g and therefore the same quantity of goods
,

cann o t be produced in a given time w ith these

al l oys a s with those we have just descri bed The
, .

great p oint in the manufacture of gold articles

S hould be to get the greatest amount of re al work

out of the smallest amount of material so as to ,

make the least possible waste or scrap for remelt

ing ; for this reason w e s ay that the alloys which
mostly tend to this obj ect are th e b est for j ewellers
to use in their manufac tures .

E ight carat gold is sometimes used in the manu

-

fact ure of j ewellery and is often styled 9 carat

,
-

No 2 in some of the workshops where this quality

.
,

is somewhat extensively employed In order to.

stand the aqua test it must be alloyed with more

D
5 0 Q UAL ITIE S AND AL L OYS .

silver than ordinary 9 carat gold and w h e n -

,

finished appears rather paler to the eye ; th i s

may be a part ial guide as to quality but not alw ay s ,

a sure one ; if properly alloyed it works exceed

in gly well in any process of preparation from th e ,

ingot bar down to the finished articles ; but of ,

course j udgment must be used by the workm an a s

,

to the proper periods for annealing ; if this be

'

neglected the gold will b ecome hard and brit t l e ,

and as the process of preparing proceeds it wil l

, ,

break and fall to pieces .

S even carat gold is genera lly ter m ed common

-

gold and is about the lowest quality manufacture d ;

,

it requi res extra care in working on account of the ,

very large proportion of silver it contains which ,

increases the fusibility of this alloy C are must

,
.

necessarily be taken in annealing and soldering .

Th e increased proportion of silver is requisite to

enable the articles man ufact ured from it to s tand
the gold test of aqua fortis G old chains of this
-
.

quality are now very seldom made It is mostly .

used by L ocket makers in cheap work where the ,

backs and fronts are gold and the edges &C are , ,
.
,

plated The common alloys of gold have a much

.

lower fusible point than those of a superior quality .

Pure silver has a b rilliant white colour and is ,

the w hitest of all the metals ; none surpass it in

lustre ; and in hardness it ranges between pure
5 2 QUAL ITIE S AND AL L OY S .

is anoth er name
Spelter for
z inc an d i s s o ca ll e d ,
-

because it is supposed to be deprived of its impuri

ties It is a bluish white metal highly crystallin e
.
-
,

a n d brittle ; mel ting at about and at a r e d

heat rises into vapour A s it burns it is convert ed
,
.

into a white flock like substance This is the pro

- .

t ox ide of z in c which is carried up in the current of

,

warm air The employment of zinc in gold a ll oys

.

should be sparing and must b e added when t he

,

other metal s are in a state of fusion first h eating it ,

with the tongs over the cr ucible Sp e lter does not .

harden gold if used as we have recommended It

, .

is generally purchased in cakes an d wh en required ,

for use pieces are chipped off with a cold chisel .

We shall now give a table of the pre portions of

the various metals incorporated i n th e gold all oys
us ed by j ewe ll ers
T abl e of A llo y s.

3 p art copp ,
er
I
; p art s i lv er, 23

1 22

2 20

3 18

6 15

8 I3

8} 12

Io 10

we 9
Io } 8
9 7
8 p arts Sp elter .
 SPE C IFIC GRA VITY .
53

Th e above tab le represents the full standard

quality of every alloy ; if it be needful to make an
inferior alloy which is often the case in the manu
,
-

facture of j ewellery the same calculation in respect

,

to the inferior metals will do but a sma ll portion

. ,

of fin e gold must be deducted till it brings the

alloy down to the value required .

We have been at some trouble in order to make

our information complete and have carefully
,

arranged the following table

S p e ci fi c G ra vit y T abl e .

Tota l .

Non e

It is our intention to continue this matter a little

further s o as to render these details as complete
,

as p ossible for the workshop in case the ab ove

,
34 Q UA L ITIE S AND AL L OY S .

differences in w eight should not b e understood by

some When a piece of work is desired of a cer
.

tain size and weigh t of a different quality to th a t

,

usually worked up the following tab le of weight s

,

will be found usefu l

T a bl e of W e i ght s .

Q ua lit ies . B wts G rs

. .

2 4 cara t of giv en dim en sion s will wei gh

23

C opp er
C om p osition
Sp elter

These relative weights are s ufli c i en tly near for

every practical purpose and it is hoped intelligible
, ,

enough to be of assistance to such as deal with

these valuable alloys .

Th e last mentioned table wil l it is h op e d prov e

-
, ,

of special se rv ice not only to the practical gold

,

worker as a safe guide in the production of correct

,

weights in the various qualities ; b ut likewise to

 WE IGH TS .
55

the manufact urer and the merchant by affording ,

them an easy method of estimating the value of an

article required to pattern in a ny of tue Qua li ti es
,

manufactured For example an article weighing

.
,

in 9 carat gold 1 oz would in 1 8 carat gold

,
-
.
-

weigh 1 oz 4 dw t s ; thus showing conclusively

. .

that the extra quantity of raw material imparted

to an article under the above conditions must be ,

taken into consideration when giving a quotation

of cost .The principles which govern the above
table when fully comprehended will be found both
, ,

simple and advantageous .

OF 7 Hf
 C H AP TER IV

M eltin g an d Rollin g
.

HAVING described the specialities of go ld and ,

the qualities used in its manufacture we have now ,

reached a point very important and interestin g to

the j ewell ery trade ; and we may as well state that
it is our desire to go through a kind of apprentice
ship i n respect to the processes employed in the
manufacture We hope that the information thus
.

afforded besides being valuable to the practical

,

w orkm an by giving him facilities which will res ult

,

in the more successful p erformance of his work ,

will prove useful to the manufacturer also by i m

parting to him that with which he has been hither to
unacquainted We shall lay most stress upon
.

those processes of Art workmanship and manage

-

ment in w hich we venture to believe we have been

,

more successful than most of our compeers .

In order to d escrib e minutely the processes or

methods of working with the precious met a l we ,

shall commence with the first proceeding in the

 M ATE R IAL S F O R AL L OYING .
57

c ou rse of the manufacture v i z the p reparation , .

'
o f the alloy and its subsequent treatment in the

c ru cible The state of purity of gold and silver

.
,

w h en purchased from the refi ner for the purpose

o f alloying has already been s ufli c i e n t ly explained

,

i n this volume Th e copper used is various

. In .

t h e j ewellery trade the refi ned grain copper is com -

m on ly preferred costing 2 s per lb , a prejudice . .

,

existing against th e employment of the bean shot -

b ut this is not altogether warranted as b ean shot ,

-

copp e r may be safely used in all the varieties of

brigh t gold alloys A s regards the workable
.

qualities of its a ll oys they are all that could be

,

desired therefore we cannot understand this pre

,

judice .

F rom an economical point of view its use is a

saving its cost being ab out £ 5 1 z s per cwt or 1 s
, . .
, .

per lb In purchasing the materials for alloying

.
,

where a fair average trade is being carried on ,

there is an advantage in purchasing copper in

large quantities ; but in gold and silver the reverse
is the case Irrespective of the disadvantage of
.

the cash lying idle gold being always bought for

,

cash some of its particles are so fin e and minute

, ,

that every time it is touched or moved about som e ,

portion is sure to be lost ; the portion may per ,

haps be very small indeed but wh en we take into

, ,

D 3
5 8 M E L TING AND R O LL ING .

consideration th e extremely v aluable nat ure of

gold in the ab ove state the loss in th e course of a
,

year may be something amaz ing For these a n d .

other reasons which coul d be adduced we recom ,

mend the purch ase of gold at the time it is needed ,

and sufi cien t only for the purposes required .

In preparing the mixture of gold S ilver and , ,

copper for the crucib le care sh ould b e taken in

,

weighing them accurately in order to prevent,

improvement or deterioration in the qualities of

gold constantly in use In mel ting a ll qualities
.

it is a wise plan to place the lightest of the metals

to be melted at the bottom of the crucible
viz the copper fi rst the S ilver next and the gold
.
, ,

last ; by so doing the melter is more likely to get a

p erfect amalgamation of the metals as the gol d , ,

b eing the heaviest is su re to fi n d its way towards

,

the bottom of the pot When sp elter is employed

.

it must not b e put in unti l th e other metals are

melted ; being of so volatile a nature it would ,

b e all evaporated before the mixture of alloy was

properly incorporated conseq uentl y the bar of
,

gold would fall short of its original weight the ,

quality would b e improved and th e manufac turer

,

would be unable to compensate himself without

re melting with an addition of alloy
-
.

P lumbago crucibles are the b est for all practica l

60 M E LTING AND R O LL ING .

hot enough when it will j ust stand touching with

the hand for a second or so In nine cases out of
.

ten i f the gold is properly heated in the melting

,

and cast al l right with the C harcoal flux we have

recommended the working qua lities in its s ubse
,

quent treatment will be found all that could be

desired for any purpose Whatever .

When it is desired to produce very tough go l d ,

use a s a flux a tab le spoonful of charcoal as before

-
,

and one of sal ammoniac adding it to the gold

-
,

on the eve of melting ; the sal ammoniac burns -

away while toughening the gold leaving the C h ar,

coal b ehind to p erform the functions a lready indi

c at e d .The employment of th e mix ture of sal
ammoniac wi ll b ring the ingots of gold up b righ t
and cl ear ; it wi ll al so prevent them from splitting
or cracking at th e rolling mill and i n s ub sequent
-
,

working if proper a ttention h as b een paid to it ,

the gold will then be found tough and pliab le .

This does not however apply to every kind of

, ,

alloy but it may be aflir m ed of th ose we have

,

described a n d can b e safely an d thoroughly de

,

pended up on .

Th e furnace used by most j ewell ers is the ordinary

wind furnace built of brickwork which is a dm ir
, ,

ably suited for such p urp ose s ; a S ize convenient

for every requirement is of the following dim en
 TR E ATM E NT IN TH E C R UC IB L E . 61

s ions : eight inches square inside and sixteen ,

i n ches deep from the grate which supports the fire .

F or producing tough gold the employment of ,

c o mmon salt as a flux in g agent is sometimes

s trongly recommen ded There is not however
.
, ,

m u ch to be said for its use as it produces a very

,

li q u id flux and is not half so clean as the one w e

,

h a v e recommended In the casting unless very

.
,

g reat care is exercised it

, runs into the ingot mould -

w it h the gold producing a brittle like subst ance

,
-
,

an d this forces itself into the bar of gold the ,

surfa ce of which becomes irregular and full of

h ol e s ; on this account alone in preparing clean
,

and smooth bars of gold it is objectionable Th e

,
.

sam e may b e said of borax but that is still largely

,

used in the j ewellery trade for melting purposes .

Neve rtheless we are confident from long practical ,

experience ( the result of many years study and ’

practice during which time we have worked up

,

many thousand ounces of gold ) that there is no ,

b etter flux than the mixture of sa l a rn rn on ia c a n d -

clza r coa l for ev er possible purpose re q uired in the

, y ,

subsequent treatment of the different qualities of

gold ; and that for toughness cleanliness and , ,

producing good workable properties it cannot be

s urpassed .

In melting scrap gold fro m the workshop care

-
,
62 ME L TING AND R O L L ING .

should be taken to see that it is quite c le an a n d ,

free fro m organic matter wax 8 1 0

, To effect th i s
,
.

it is a good plan to heat the scrap in an iron ladle

until all wax or grease is removed ; this Should be
done before the workman weighs his scrap into the
warehouse and should be a sp ec ial rule of every
,

establishment It has a great tendency ( w ith othe r

.

things of which we shall speak hereafter)to reduce

the working loss which is almost unavoidable .

This kind of scrap is best r e melted by itse lf and

-
,

the s ame flux may be employed as has been recom

mended for new gold ; if the bar of gold should split
in rolling it is due to the presence of some foreign
,

metal s uch as lead or tin or it m ay be iron or

, ,

steel Then remelt the bar with two parts carbo

.

nate of potash and one part of nitrate of potash

s altpetre ); the saltpetre will draw the Iron or steel
(
into the flux leaving the alloy of gold free If
, .

lead or tin should get into the gold very serious ,

—
results follow a very small portion being s uffi cient
to split a large bar and render it totally unwork
able and exceedingly brittle ; when broken the
grains appear C lose and pale B ichloride of
.

mercury ( corrosive sublimate ) is the best flux to

use when these defects make their appearance ; in
the proportion of two parts charcoal to one of
corrosive sublimate when all will go right again
, .
 TH E TRE ATM E NT O F S C R AP . 63

S andiver is also a very useful fl ux when iron or

steel gets in the gold S uch go ld, when re m eltG
. d -
,

al ways l oses in weight some of the alloy being lost ,

on account of the many small pieces of gold of

which the scrap consists This of course i m .
, ,

pro v es the qual ity ; therefore it is necessary, in ,

order to keep the gold of one standard to add ,

som e small portion of all oy either S ilver or ,

copper ; b ut as th e scrap may contain a little

so ld e r copper will b e the best to use The follow
, .

ing c alculations may be relied upon for the different

qual i ties

T a bl e of C a lcul a tion s .

Wet coloured scrap

-
, 3 grs . of copp er p er oun ce .

Iz -carat scrap 6
10 n 9
9 n
I2 sI

H all m ark ed m ak e n o addition wha tev er

-

All qualities of scrap shoul d be well sorted and

undergo the action of a magnet b efore t e melting -
,
'

and the greatest care exercised in keeping every

qu ality separate .

S ometimes in re melting scrap go l d it is n ec es

- -

sary to make some addition either in fin e gold or ,

alloy for the purpose of improving or reducing the

,

qual ity This happens when different qualities of

.

goods are re quired on the spur of th e moment, and

64 M E L TING AND R O L L ING .

it may not be convenient to procure fine gol d at th e

time s ufi cien t for the p urpo s e ; this is very often
the case with b eginners w h o have emb arked in
business with a limited capital which may already
,

be partially invested ; to such persons the advice

we now give may prove serviceable There may .

b e possi b ly existing at the time in the workshops ,

a large quantity of scrap of the regul ar quality ;

and if the proper rules for alloying in reference to
,

reducing and improving the qualities were under ,

stood thoroughly use might be made of it in the

,

above direction ; not only to the pecuniary interest

of the man of business b ut a l so to the advantage
,

of all parties concerned .We shall be as simple

and as concise as possible in our modes of calcula
tion and will employ the usual arithmetical S igns
, .

In preparing the scrap for reducing great care ,

must be t aken in selecting it free fro m solder or

other impurities otherwise the calculation as
, ,

regards extreme accuracy will be thrown out ; and

,

sometimes this is of importance but more com

,

m on ly speaking when the quality is not for hall

,

mark i n g t he difference likely to be made is of

,

very littl e importance . The numeral 2 0 in the

following tab les wi l l always be consonant b ecause ,

it represents the num b er of p en n ywe ights in an

ounce of g old Th e multipliers and divisors will
.
 RE D U C ING TH E Q UAL ITY . 65

be differen t a n d will vary with the quality of gold

,

required A s an example suppose we want to fin d

.
,

h ow much p u re gold will be required to be added to

1 oz of 9 0 ar a t scrap in order to raise it to 1 5 C arat
.
-
,
-

g old we ,
should proceed thus
20 x 15 300
20 x 9 1 80

300 1 80 1 20

1 20 9 I3 dwts . 8 grs .

Therefore to every ounce of 9 0 arat scrap we -

shall have to add 1 3 dw t s 8 grs of fine gold to make . .

1 5 carat gold
-
Th e divisor 9 does not represent
.

t h e quality of scrap about to be improve d but is ,

t h e di fference b etween the quality man ufactured

a n d the numeral 2 4 which represents the number of ,

car ats in an ounce ; consequently when it is desired ,

to improve the scrap the d ivisor Will always rep re ,

se n t the difleren c e b etween the quality as i m prov ed

’

by the addition of fine gol d and 2 4 When it is .

desired to reduce the scrap the reverse will be the ,

case ; the divisor will alw ays indicate the quality

to be made In order to prove the accuracy of
.

the above mode of calculation, we will give the

followi n g proof
oz . dwts grs . .

I 0 0 of 9 -
carat scrap will be worth
0 13 8 of fin e gold 8 5s M will
. . cost

1 13 8 4 10 0
66 M EL TING AND R OL LING .

oz . dwts grs . . s. d.
1 0 o of 1 5 - carat gold is worth with alloy 2 I 1, 0

o 10 0 I 7 0
o 3 8 0 9 0

I I3 8 4 10 0

L et us take another case as an illu stration of wh at

we mean S uppose it is desired to re duce s om e
.

scrap in quality no alloy being s uitable t o be foun d

,

in the all oy b ook we sha ll h ave to m ak e a sort of

-
,

guess work or haphaz ard calculation If w e adopt

-
, .

th e system we a re recommen din g it will bec om e ,

very simple To reduce 1 8 C arat scra p in order t o

.
-

make 1 5 carat gold we shall procee d as follows

-
,

20 x 18 360
20 x 15 300
360 300 60
60 15 4 dw ts .

To every ounce of 1 8 carat scrap mus t be adde d -

4 dw t s o f alloy
. T h is c ase c l earl y il lustrates.t h e

difference in t he divisor b etween reducing and i m

proving the quali ty If it is of importance to know .

how much mixture of alloy should b e added to a n

ounce of fin e gold in order to p roduce qualities of

inferior s tandard th e numeral 2 4 b ecom es c onso ,

nant thus to p roduce 1 8 C arat

,
-

20 x 24 480
20 x 18 360

480 360 1 20

1 20 18 6 dwts . I6 grs .
68 ME L TING AND R OL LING .

Th e first of these three examples is cal cul ated

in grains the second in pennyweights and frac
,

tions and the third in decimals but in each c al cu

,

lation the effect is precisely the same b eing ,

equivalent to 1 3 dw t s 8 grs as show n in our

. .
,

fi rst example and thereby proving most conc l u

,

s iv ely that the remaining 3 after division is not

grains but a fraction of a pennyweight ; in order

,

to reduce the remainder to grains m ul tiply by

24 ,
and again divide by the divisor 9 when the ,

proper solution of the problem will b e effected

In all these examples whether calculated in,

grains fractionally or decimally the principle is

, ,

unalterable .

When the mixture of gold and alloy is properly

incorporated (to effect which a good whit e heat
is essentially necessary) it must be carefully cast
,

into bars of gold the sizes of which vary accord

,

ing to the branch of the j ewellery trade in which

they are used L ocket makers usua lly cast their
.
-
 PRE PARING STR IPS OF GOL D . 69

ba r s broad and th in so as to get as large a

,

s u r fa ce as possi bl e ; and experience has taught

t h e necessity of this in order to avoid a large
,

a m o unt of waste in outsides and edges C hain .

m akers general ly cast those which they use long

a n d to l erab ly thick which when ro ll ed

, produce ,

l o n g strips of wire and these are admirably adapted

,

i n e very way to the art of C hain making They -

.

a re,
p erhap s as much prized by the workman
,

w h o operates upon them as if he had the satis

,

facti o n of knowing that they were a part of his

accu m ul ated wealth .

T h e pouring of the gold into the ingot moulds -

is a n art which re quires some little skill and

practice The fl ux fl oating up on the surface of
.

the gol d in the crucible may b e p revented from

,

passing into the ingot mould with the gold by using

-

a thin piece of flat wood he l d in the left hand :

pop l ar wood is the best b ecause it b urns v ery
,

slowly .

Aft er the p rocess of melting the bars of gold

,

shoul d b e accurately weighed in order to ascertain

,

how much has been lost i n perform ing the work .

If this operation should prove satisfactory th ey ,

m ust next be well fil ed upon the edges and corners

to remove all loose and scraggling pieces which ,

would otherwise, in the sub se quent proc ess of

70 ME L TING AND R OL L ING .

rolling be l ost After the completion of this latte r

,
.

process the b ars are again placed in the scales

, ,

and their weights entered in the mill book for the -

,

purpose of being sent to one of the rolling mills to -

be rolled into sheets or wire as may be nece s sa ry

,
.

This is effected by submitting them to the

“

action of large steel rollers moved by steam

power As the b ar pa s ses through the rollers a r e
.
,

pressed C loser together by powerful scre w s ; it

is again passed through many times with an ,

additional pressure of the screw every time until ,

the gold has b ecome hard and requires anneal

in g . This process is performed by placing the
metal upon a movable sheet of iron in a
muffl e or e v en heated by flue s ; after this
, ,

operation the bar is submitted to the same pro

cess of rolling changing the rollers until the
,

desired thinness is obtained S uch are the pro .

cesses for the reduction of the bar into flats or

sheets .

In producing strips of gold p revious to their ,

man ufacture into wire the bar is first rolled to

,

about No 1 0 or 1 1 of the B irmingha m wire gauge

.
-
,

annealed and then submitted to the action of a

,

pair of circular cutting rollers having a number of

,
-
,

re gular sized grooves in each roller ; the project

-

ing po rtions overlap each other so as to form ,

 C O ST OF GOL D R OL L ING -
.
7 1

k n i ve s or cutters Th e si ze of the strips thu s

.

p r o d uce d co rres p onds e x actly with that of the

g rooves in t h e rollers T hese
. strips may be

severed from the bar with a pair of v 10e shears -

,

bu t it is not so clean and regular as the above

m ethod . The foll owin g tabl e sh ow s the cost of
gold rolling z
-

s. d . s. d . s. d .

2 H

3 0

3 0

3 1

3 1

3 2

3 3
3 4
3 5
3 6
3 6
3 7
3 8
3 8
3 9
3 I0

3 I1

4 0

4 1

4 2

4 3
4 4
4 5
4 6
4 7
4 8
4 9
4 I0
.

4 ! 1

5 0

5 1

Above 1 00 023. 6s 3d per 1 00

. . 0 2 3.
 C H APTER V .

C oin i n g .

TH E fi nest or richest alloy of gold is employed by

the gold beater in the preparation of leaf gold a n d
- -
,

also by the a rt ific er in artistic e m broidery massive ,

ornamental work and in fact in every work of

, , ,

art which c a n b e improved in b eauty b y the addi

tion of this highly pri zed metal The chief uses of
-
.

leaf gold have b een already explained ; therefore

-

the next quality of fineness to which we shal l ,

.

direct particular attention is th e national standard

,

of value in this country — the circulating medium of

exchange or our coinage the manufacture of
, ,

which consists principally of sovereigns and h alf

sovereigns a n d as the processes employed in this
branch of metallurgy are instructive and interest
ing we will briefly describ e the work carried on at
,

the R oyal M int .

F irst of all the gol d is sent fro m the Bank of

,

E ngland to the M int in ingots of about 1 8 0 oz °

each E very ingot is tried by the Bank assayer

.
,

and also by the M int assayer i n order to asc e rtain

,
 PR O C E S S IN OPE RATION AT THE MINT .
73

h ow much each b ar differs fro m the standard

2 2 carats )of abso lute pu rity or fi neness When
( -
.

the proper fineness has been ascertained and the ,

mixture of alloy prepared (which is n ow always

c opper) the total quantity of gold and alloy
, in ,

p roper proportions is taken

, and divided into lot s

of oz for the purpose of being melted into

.
,

bars . Th e crucibles used by the master melter are

a bout nine inches deep by seven inches across t h e
,

m outh ; and are made of graphite or plumbago .

Th ese are we ll heated previous to the i n troduc

ti o n of the ingots of gold and alloy in order to ,

p revent cracking or flying which S hould it happen

, , ,

w o uld b e serious when so large a quanti ty of

,

m etal had b een added To ascertain whether a

.

p o t is cracked or not it is wel,l to introduce a cold

b ar of iron and let it touch the botto m when if any ,

crack exists it will at once be visible If the heat .

i n g of the crucible has p roduced no ill effects the ,

b a rs of gold and alloy which have already been

,

p repared are
,
put in and thoroughly
,
melted being ,

fi n ally well stirred with an iron stirrer ; the whole

m ass is then poured into ingot moulds sixte e n -
,

being pl aced side by side in a frame ; the p e t will

hol d sufli ci e n t metal to fill four i n gots holding
3 0 0 o z s. each ; conse q uently fo ur pots o
,f gold will
fi ll t h e wh ol e of the ingot moul ds -
.

E
74 C O INING .

Wh en the ingots have b ecome cold eith er by ,

quenching or in the ordinary way they are stamped ,

w ith certain letters or figures and two pieces for ,

assay are cut from each These t w o pieces ar e

.

sent to different assayers the result of the test

,

b eing afterwards given to the M aster of the M int ,

and if found correct the master m elter h a s prop erly

,
'

discharged his duty .

Th e sizes of the b ars are ab out 2 4 in long by 1 37 5 .

°

broad and ab out 1 in thick When the M aster of

, . .

the M int is satisfied as to the correctness of the

“

test they pass into the hands of the weighers

, .

Th e scales employed are so strong and at the ,

same time so delicate that a single grain wi ll gi ve

,

the turn even when l oaded with

, ozs .

The bars of gold when thus accurately weigh ed

, ,

ar e rolled at the ro lling mill in the mann e r-

previously described then cut into lengths of 1 8 in

,
.

each a gain roll ed until they are 1 8 2 9 inches i n

,

width and , in thickness b eing then equal to

,

rather less than 2 in in width and 1 1 9th of a n

.
,
-

inch i n thickness . This process must be carrie d

out with great care it b eing very necessary t h a t
,

all the b ars should b e of the exact si ze Th e l on g .

fl at strip s of gold thus made are cut up i n t o

circular blanks of the siz e and dimension s o f
s ov e rei n s a n d h alf s overei ns, by th e c utti n ou t
g g g
- -
7 6 C O INING .

and separate about twenty three bl anks in a -

minute .

The heavy ones a re afterwards passed throu gh

another wonderful machine which fi les a way the ,

edges until the proper size and weight are pro

duced . Th e next process is the testing in order to ,

ascertain w hether there are any cracked ones among

the bulk ( a result of air bubbles caused through
-
,

imperfect melting) A boy performs this operation

. .

H e grasps two handfuls of blanks and rings each ,

on e on a block separately ; b y the nature of the

‘

ring or sound he can at once tell whether it is

defective If so it is placed aside with the light
.
,

blanks for re melting Those which are good are

-
.

then submitted to the action of an edge compress -

ing machine at the rate of about 7 0 0 per minute ;

,

where they are slightly reduced in dia m eter and ,

thickened at the edge By this t im e they have

.

become hardened and require annealing ; afte r

this is done they are boiled out in diluted s ul
,

p hur i c acid pickle ( O i l of vitriol ) in the proportion ,

of one of acid to fifteen or twenty of water and thi s ,

produces a fi n e rich gold colour by removing th e ,

black oxide of copper from the surface ; after

rinsing well in cl ean water they are dried in b ox
,

wood sawdust The principal part of th e busines s

.

— —
then takes place the coining by wh ich is pro
 WE IGHT O F TH E S OVE RE IGN .
77

duced th e design upon the obverse and reverse

sides ; and also by which that b eauti ful bright
colour to b e se en upon a n e w sovereign is effected
‘

The sulphuric acid pickl e leaves a dead or matt

appearance and the parts which appear so b right
,

when the coin is newly circulated are made so by

the p ressure of two highly polished steel dies one
-
,

for each side of the coin ; the blank bei n g placed

between the dies one b low is s ufli c ie n t to stamp
,
'

the whole of it including the two surfaces and the

,

edge .

Al l the gold coins now issued from the E nglish

mint b ear a milled or serrated edge which is pro ,

duc ed by ridges on the i n side of the collar holding

the blank when it is being str uck between the
,

dies This milling is so true that it would b e a

.

very difli cult task for the counterfeiter to imitate

it by filing It is further adopted to afford an
.

immediate detection of any attempt to deteriorate

th e coin by c lipping or filing ; and the greatest
a ttention is conse quently p aid by the M int a u th o

r i t i es to this part of the work i n order to b affle ,

t h e ingenuity of t he would be tam perer with the-

coinage D uring the stamping the coins fall fro m

.

t h e coining pre s s into a tray underneath wh ere

-
,

th ey are again examined one b y one to p ick out ,

d e fau lters . Th e good ones are then removed

7 8 C OINING .

to another room where a small number of s ove

,

reigns or half soverei gns are indiscriminately se

-

l e cted weighed and assay ed as a final test of the

, , ,

thorough accuracy of the whole manufacture Th e .

sovereign when completed and ready for circula

,

tion is almost exactly 8 6 8 of an inch in diameter

,
°

sovereigns standard gold ( 2 2 carats )weigh

exactly 40 lbs troy weight ; the legal weight of
. .

each can thus be very easily determined R educe .

the 40 lbs to dw ts and divide the product

. .
,

by i f we then reduce the remainder to

g r s.and again divide we shall have the weight ,

of 5 dw t s 3g ; grs which is equivalent to

. .
,

grs the exact weight of a sovereign It is c a lc u

.
, .

lated that there are in circulation in the U nited

Kingdom sovereigns and half sovereigns to the -

value of sterling .

As coins are subjected to considerable wear ,

through frequently passing from hand to han d the ,

amount of loss occasioned is worthy of some little

consideration O f course this amount will be i n
.

proportion to the length of time the coins have

been in we ar To provide again s t this the E n gli s h
.
,

G overnment allows a sovereign to be a legal t e nde r

till it is reduced not below grs ( 5 dw t s . .

23 the difference betwe e n this and the full

stand a rd weight being the remedy allowed by
 C H APTER VI .

M a nu fa ctur e d A rticl e s .
— L oc k e t M a k ing
-
.

TH E next branch of the subject in treati n g of th e ,

uses of gold we have to notice is that relating

, ,

to the j eweller which includes the various works

,

of art connected with the trade of a manufactur ing

goldsmith .

O n e of the first things that would b e likely to

strike the stranger in visiting a jeweller s work ’

s h op would be the methodical manner in which it

,

is fi tted up H e would also probably Observe the

.

neat and compact arrangements provided for the

workmen consisting of convenient tables or benches
,

for the easier performance of the work The .

j eweller s board commonly provides sittings for

’

four workme n the outline of which is nearly half

,

circular ; holes are sawn or scooped out from the

s emicircular side to form places for the requisite

numbe r of men and these hollowe d places with

, ,

their appendages form what is technically term ed

,

the j eweller s s kin This “

skin consists of a
’
 W OAR D 81
’
TH E JE ELLE R S B .

p iece o f l eather fastened secure l y underneat h the

two arms of the bo ard and round the semicircl e , ,

so as to form a receptacle into which the filings

or articl es accidentally dropped by the workme n
m ay fall ; and also to serve as a con v enient place

for tools .

M any master j ewellers ha v e n ow sub stituted iro n

-

p ans or trays foi these leather skins which in

°

, ,

many cases are better as the lemel can easily be

, ,

separate d from the scrap Th is is done by means .

of a small mo vable b ox provided in the bottom of

the pan with a perforated top through which t he

, ,

l emel can at a n y time b e swept by the workman ;

the lemel to a Co nsi derable extent where these
, ,

trays are in use b eing prevented from getting too

,
h

much upon t he tools ; as a few secon ds now and

then will s ufli ce to sweep it through the perforated
,

p art of the tray into the box underneath No con .

t riv a n c e of this kind is attached to the ordina ry

leather skin and the lemel continually a c cum u

,

lating upon the handles and in the crevices of , ,

the tools (which are sometimes rendered moist

through constant handling ) is a source of i n c on
v e n i e n ce to th e w o rk man and a loss to the em
p loyer .

In the ce n tre of this hollowed place there is

s ecured , i n the Woodwork of the board a s mall ,

E 3
82 MANUFAC TURE D A R TIC L E S .

wedge shaped proj ectin g piece of hard wood cal l e d

-
,

the peg ; and upon this the artisan perfo r m s

“

all his work ; and beneath this peg is the skin or

tray of which we have spoken E ach work m an .

s its at one of these peculiar shaped places and in -

,

close proximity to him is a bent gas pipe file d -

,

slanting at the mouth and working upon a sw iv el

, .

This is constantly burning the flame being in di s ,

pensable in t he j eweller s art for soldering p ur ’

p oses These peculiar shaped benches are gene

.
-

rally arranged down one side of the workshop ,

and the heavier tools lathes rollers draw b enches

, , ,
-
,

8t e down the other s ide and middle ; but where

.
,

a separate shop can be p rovi ded for these latter ,

it is generally done .

We shall now endeavour to explain from p ra c ,

tical knowledge the processes employed for pro

,

duc in g modern j ewellery of various kinds com ,

prising the personal ornaments of the rich and ,

such as is stored in the warehouses of the mer

chant s and manufacturers who trade in it .

Th e qualities of the gold used in the manufacture

of j ewellery having bee n previously described we ,

shall at once proceed to allude to the manufacture

of lockets a branch of industry finding employment
,

for a great number of h ands and considering the ,

rapidity with which orders are now executed

84 MANUFAC TURE D AR TIC L E S .

hands of th e regular locket maker have to be -

,

stamped into shape : this is done by sub mitt i n g

them to the action of a pair of dies which form ,

the requisite design The dies are strongly

.

secured in the stamping press a n d the striki ng -

,

up ,
as it is called is generally entrusted to a
,

j eweller s stamper w ho p erforms the work at s o

’

much per gross .

These blan ks bei n g slightly raised are n ow ,

ready for the workma n who generally p erform s ,

his work in a very dexterous manner .

We have as yet only spoken of the fronts and

oa ck s of l ockets but there are also the r ims ,

rings flats and other parts which we must n ow

, , ,

describe These latter parts as we have already

.
,

”
stated consist of gold plating and they are
,
“
,

purchased in the form of wire from the plating

warehouses The rims are made by cutting the
.

w ire into lengths (the preparation of this will be

referred to hereafter)suitab le for the different sizes

of the lockets required They are made by boys .
,

in large quantities so that they may b e ready to

,

hand at any moment .

When the wire has b een cut into lengths the ,

e nds of the pieces are turned together and soldered,

and after w ards s haped as desired upon a man drel ;

th ey are then ready to receive the prepared gold
 S L DE R ING THE
O JO INTS . 85

p arts E ach workman has a heap of fronts b acks

.
, ,

rims 8cc upon the board before him

, .
,
H e then .

begins to put the locket together ; and it is almost

ma rv ell ous to see how skilfully the operator
handles his tools and th e rapidity with which the
,

work is executed .

O n e of the most de licate op erations to be p er

form ed in locket making is the p reparing and
-
,
'

fixing of the hinges or joints To do this pro

,
.
!

perly and neatly is the aim of a good workman ;

but the appliances being numerous the skill of th e ,

artisan is promoted To adjust the hinges two

.

ri m s are selected care b eing exercised to see that

,

they fit closely together without which it would

,

be impossible to make a nice fitti n g j oint S mall

-
.

lengths of tube ha v ing been previously prepared ,

of di fferent sizes suitable for hinges the workman ,

now takes a small roun d file ( rat s tail )about the ’

-

size of the tube which is to form the j oint and ,

makes a little groov e with it in the centre of the

edge of the two rims ; this files away the sub
stance of the two ri m s to where the gold fronts
and backs go on and the groove or hollowed
s urface is afterwards filled up by the hinge itself .

It is then filed until the tube fi ts it nicely when ,

t h e proper length is cut off with a fin e saw ; a

piece of stee l wire is next put through it, and i t

86 M ANUFAC TU RE D AR TIC LE S .

is again sawn into three pieces These pieces are .

then laid in the groove and soldered two pieces

, ,

to one side of the rim and one to the other ; ,

this is th e work almost of an instant so expert ,

do the workmen become at this branch of the

trade . The soldering of the hinges to prev ent ,

fi lling or tacking re quires great practica l know

, ,

ledge and judgment in its execution to the i n ex

,

n c e d jeweller s rouge or some whiting ( a little

’

p e r i e , ,

of either) when put inside the tube and where the

, ,

saw has gone through, will prevent the solder flow

ing in those parts ; but the most practical solderers
perform their work without these precautions .

H aving now performed the work of making rims

and joints the next process is the fastening on
,

of the rings which is a very si m ple operation and

, ,

can easily be effected even by a boy A piece of .

steel WIre ( called in the trade a spit is taken of

“
,

the size require d and the rings wound upon it ; thi s

,

may either be done in the lathe or at the p eg ,

i f the latter operation is resor ted to the spit ,

must be held in a pair of hand vices ; the coil -

,

or lap as it is more commonly termed is then

, ,

sawn through on one side only longitudinally , .

A large nu m ber of ri n gs are thus very s oon pre

pared ; they are th e n closed with two p a irs of
pliers and s lightly filed at the joints They a re
, .
88 MANUFAC TURE D ARTIC LE S .

part to b e united and also a few p alli ons of s older

, ,

when a gentle blast from the soldering jet com -

pletes the operatio n Th e better cl ass of work

.
,

however is hard sol dered that b eing wholly com

,
-
,

posed of gold ; but the processes of the metallurgy

are simil ar to those we have described Th e .

lockets aft er being touched up a li ttle by the

,

workmen , are ready for the polisher whose work ,

we sha ll c onsider un der another branch of thi s

s ubj ect
.

C ommon l ockets have generally pl ain or e n

graved surfaces ; but in the better cl ass the orna ,

ments in the centre are raised and diamonds a n d ,

other precious s tones are sometimes set in them ;

and in some cas es also extend round th e borders
of the l ockets In order to vary the designs as
.

much as p ossib l e ornamentation is n ow produced

,

by the stamp as we ll as by hand

, and it is
chiefly due to this advantage that the locket manu
fa c t urers are enabl ed to display such a variety of
patterns The p arts made by hand are called
.

”
s ettings and are a ll wrought with the exception
“
, ,

of the teething this of late being more commonly

,

p erformed by th e press ins tead of by the hand

,

as formerly These settings are p l aced upon the

.

lockets according to the designs required a ,

nu m ber at a time, a n d then hard so ldered a p ro -

,
 JE WE L L ING . 89

cess w hich firmly secures them i n their places .

In the manufacture of b g
r i it t gold lockets where ,

hard soldering is adopted silver solder is now

-
,

always used The process is performed in this

.

way — The p art s to be united are made quite

clean free from grease or oxide ; and a solution of
,

borax being prepared by rubbing a piece upo n a

slate to which a few drop s of water have been
,

added the ornaments or settings are dipped into

,

this solution and at once transferred to their

,

proper place upon the article in process of manu

facture ; and while others are being prep ared i n
the same manner thes e wil l have b ecome dry
, .

This operatio n tends to prevent moving during

the process of charging and al so acts as a pre
,

v e n tit iv e to rising in soldering ; we may add that

a lit tle san diver rub bed in the b orax solution will

p rove an unfailing preca utio n against the latter .

A quantity of very small p ellets or pallions of , ,

s older are the n cut which being picked up on e

, ,

b y one on the point of a camel hair pencil mois -

tened in the b orax so lution are put in their pro p er

,

p lace s, and th e flame directed by the blo w pipe

from the gas j et soon unites th e j oints as firm a s a
-
,

rock .

T he ornaments or more p rop erly Speaki ng ,

, ,

s ettings which are to receive precious s tones or

,
9 9 M ANUFAC TURE D ARTIC LE S .

other jewels are p laced upo n th e l ockets, wi th

,

their teeth uppermost the gems most suitab l e to

,

form the design s being put in proper order b etwee n

them The tops of the teeth are so b ent or turned
.

over that they fully encirc le the s tone and thus

, ,

hold it secur ely in its place This system is called .

”
colleting and by it beautiful effects are often
, ,

produced The b est method of setting or the one

.
,

most admired, is called fancy setting It con .

”

sists in drilln h ol es for the gems and then with ,

the scorp er h o llowing away a portio n of the meta l

around the h oles to fit the stones and al so in the ,

direction the gems are to extend at the same time

the b ringin g up of four little beads or caps is
effected which act as cl aws and form a n efli c ien t
, ,

s ecurity for each gem This kind of setting as

.
,

applied to lockets is very beautiful We have

, . .

”
partially describ ed the duties of th e setter and ,

if he can perform the latter p rocess satis factori ly

for a first C lass j ewel ler he is considered a work
-
,

man of no mean order ; it is not at al l unusual

to meet with good collet setters wh o are also -
,

good makers b ut a maker is very seldom m et

,

with who can fancy set There is another .

method called R oman settin g but it is not ap ,

plicable to this b ranch of the trade .

The processes adopted by modern j ewellers

9 2 M ANUFAC TUR E D AR TIC LE S .

come the, fo ll owing is given of the sta n dard

m etal s
D a ni e ll T a bl e
’
s .

Fin e gold wi ll m elt a t deg Fahr . .

P ure copp er
Fin e silv er
P ure sp elter 7 73

next tabl e prepared from D aniel] wi ll corre

The , ,

sp on d with the a ll oys we have previous ly give n ,

and thus supply a want lon g felt by the goldsmiths ;

not only for the treatment in the crucib l e but more ,

particularly in the sub se quen t manipulation ; whilst

i n the processes of annealing this tab l e will also
pro ve of some p ractical advantage by showing th at ,

it is essentially necessary to vary the heat in some

of the qualities to p revent scorchi n g whil e th ey are

upo n the fire

O u r T a bl e .

2 3-carat gold will m el t at deg Fahr . .

22

20

18

IS

I3

12

10

9
8
7
C om p osition

This tabl e cl early demonstrates the fact that

 V
SIL E R SO L D E R S .
93

It is unwise to place metals upon th e anne al ing

p an without careful attention being p aid to them ,

w hen their points of fusion are widely at variance

with each other If a piece of 1 8 carat wire and

.
-

one of 7 carat of exactly the same description

-
, ,

were placed upon th e pan in the m uflle without ,

due regard to the above facts and left until ,

the 1 8 carat h ad acquired a good red h eat upon

-
,

the withdrawal of the pan it would be found that

the 7 carat had b een overheated and the nature
-
,

perished so as to render it further unworkable

, .

Th e list of silver solders as expressed b elow wi ll

in practice he found to answer admirably for every
purpos e with the alloys we h ave recommended .

When using 7 carat or common gold a very easy

-
,

one is re quired ; th is h as been considered and ,

every reliance can b e placed on the solders h ere

given and their suitability approved by t heir
, ,

point of fusion to th e qualities un der m anipul a

tion
S ilv e r S old e rs .

D esc ri p t ion . C op p er . S p e lte r .

H ard solder 33 p arts

M edium solder
E asy solder
C om m on hard
C om m on easy
94 MANUFAC TURE D AR TICL E S .

F u s in g P oint .

NC 1 H ard solder
. . . deg F ahr
. .

No 2 M edium solder
. .

No 3 E asy solder
. .

No 4 C om m on
. .

No 5 C om m on easy
. .

Th e fusi b il i ty of
these solders will be a l ittle
higher than those given because of the volatility ,

of the zinc i n melt ing which increases t he point of

,

fusion when being used for which allowance shoul d

,

be made An y of them may either b e used in pal

.

lion or fi led into dust as may b e preferred The

, .

former i s more extensively employed by j ewellers ;

and the latter by gold chain makers for which pur -
,

pose it is more suitable as it enables those who u s e

,

it to get through more work in a given time Th e .

p a llion may be also used in the manufacture of

chains—i n fact it is commonly preferred b y curb
,

makers ; and in the ma nufacture of B razilian or

snake chains its employment is compulsory The .

obj ect of zinc i n silver solders is to increase their

fusibility ; it also by its evaporation in the pro
,

cess increases the strength of the j oint by tough

,

en i n g the solder ; but the use of too much is a n

obstacle in the way of the workman and ulti ,

mately proves fa r from satisfactory to the pur

cha s ers of th at class of j ewellery : firstly by the ,
 C H APTER V II .

S olid W ire - D raw in g .

O NE of th e most important applications of gol d

i s in connection with the art of ch ain maki n g ; an d -

there being in th at b ran ch of manufacture an

unusually large amount of go l d empl oyed i t w ill ,

be necessary to enlarge upon it especially as i t ,

c omprises the whol e art of wire drawing the p rin

-
,

c ip l e s of wh ich when fully compreh ended, are a

,

source of assistance to the workman so engaged .

When this wire drawing as applied to th e manu

-
,

facture of gold chains is properly executed there

, ,

is every reason for the expectation of th e b est work

t h roughout at least so fa r as some pat terns are
,

c on cern ed. In Birmingham wire drawing is exten

-

s i v ely p ractised, a n d t h at town is justly cele b rat ed

for it .

Perhaps it wi ll not be out of place to gi ve h e re

a short history of it and a few facts b earin up o
g n

t he p rocess .
 THE D RAW PL ATE-
.
97

Th e mallea b ility of gold m ust h ave b een known

long before its ductility for we never read of ,

the ancient gold workers turn ing to a n y account

-

this latter property It has been suggested by

.

Beckman a G erman chemist that gold and other

, ,

wir e were first formed by beating out the metal ,

a n d then cutting it into t hin strips which process ,

is e ntirely b orne out by S cripture in the account ,

of th e preparation of the sacerdotal dress of A aron ,

for w hich see E xodus xxxix Wire work seems .

-

to have been rarely practised by the ancients and ,

their mode of making it was upon the anvil It .

see m s to be se ldom mentioned in their writings ;

there is no allusion whatever to the dra w p la te -
,

the principal tool of the modern wire drawer even -

,

in later works upon the subj ect Th e persons who .

fabricated wire by means of the hammer were

termed w ire s m i th s The introduction of the draw
.

plate for wire drawing purposes was made about

-
,

the year A D 1 35 0 It is said to be the invention

. . .

of one R ichard A rchal a F renchman but it was

, ,

long before the anci e nt method of th e h ammer and

a nvil was entirely superseded .

In E ngland wire appears to have b een mad e

b y h an d or wrought until the year 1 5 65 at tha t
‘

, ,

ti m e a S axon ( C hristopher S chultz ) came to this

c ou ntry , and introduced the dra w plate and i ts -
9 8 S OL ID WIR E DRAWING - .

appl ications for making iron wire which had pre ,

v i ou s l
y b e en introduced from the continent .

Th e a ll oy s of gold for chain making purposes -

should be exc e edingly malleable and ductile and ,

the tougher the gold is the better will it be able to

,

st a nd the kind of treatment to which it will be sub

j e c t.e d A c c ordi n g to the modern process wh e n ,

it is re ady for the wire drawer it is in the form -

,

of squ a re strips of the sizes Nos

, 10 1 1 or 1 2 .
, ,

of the B irmingham wire gauge u n less othe rw ise ,

ordered The prepara tion of these strips has been

.

ex plained when describing the process of rollin g

The wire—
.

drawer in the ordinary performance of

,

his work submits them ( aft er removing any rough

,

surface left in the process of slitting)to the action

of a pair of wire rollers moving by hand power
-

these have nearly half round grooves in them an d

-
,

are diversified in si z e ; during the revolution of th e

rollers the grooves in the upper barre l meet thos e
,

of the lower ,so that when a strip of gold h a s

passed through them a piece of wire is at on c e
,

produced almost round This process is repeat e d .

until it has passed through all the groove s th e ,

latter b e ing regulated by screws ; the gold h a s

then become hard and requires annealing : wh e n
,

this has been done the wire is pointed and th e n ,

comes th e operation of the draw plate whi c h -

,
l 00 SO L ID WIRE DR AWING
-
.

draw down the wire until the largest or centre siz e

'

was reached wind ofl the links draw it again to

°

, ,

the next size and again wind off and so on until ,

a ll the sizes had been prepared T o wind the wire .

properly it would require annealin g between every

size and to do this after every hole woul d be a
,

continual source of hindrance to the workman .

A ccording to the method we suggest ( and we

b elieve we were t he fi rst to introduce it into the
Birmingham trade) this inconvenienc e would be ,

dispensed with because we should draw all the

,

wire first and so dispose of that branch of th e

b usiness This would be done in the following
.

manner Presum ing there would be fiv e sizes i n

.

the chain that would be two inches to each S ize

, .

When the wire had reached in dimensions th e

largest size cut off a length of nine inches ; after
,

wards c ut off all the other wires in the sam e

manner as the drawing proceeds ; nin e inches of
,

wire makes two inches of chain consequently i n , ,

t he above example all the wires wil l be require d

,

of equal l e ngth ; but when seven sizes are p u t

in a chain S Ix Inches will suffi ce for the fir st size

, ,

and seve n inches in the subse quent ones O n a .

l arge scale a decided advantage is gained b y thi s

method both in time and patience M ost othe r
, .

chains m ay b e p repared upon this p rinciple ; a n d

 PR E PARING WIRE POR CHAIN
S “
.

bes ides b eing found more convenient to the work

m a n a greater number of articles will be obtained
,

out of the same material .

T hese wires are wound upon oval steel spits of

v arious si z es to form links and aft erwards on being
, , ,

put into prop er shape by the workman become ,

that well known article the graduated cur

-
“
,

Th e h oles in the draw plates are regulated when

-

w orn by hardened steel punches of a conical form ;

,

th ey must not tap er too suddenly but gradually ,

down to the point ; i f they are pointed too sharply

they will leave no b earing on the draw plates the -
,

holes will pull out and the wire will be very

,

irregular i n s iz e in some cases varying more than

,

a si z e in one pie ce of wire ; therefore the more

gradual the taper of the punches the better and the ,

more certain will b e the wire produced from them .

Wire is drawn by the wire drawer into various -

shapes the princ ipal of which are hollow for

,

j ewellery and gold ch ain work these will be -

duly considered Primarily the solid wires cl a i m

.

our attention all of which can easily be pre

,

pared fa r more so th an the hollow ones for th e

, ,

latter at times present features of great diffi culty ;

and the b est workman is ofte n subj ected to a
good deal of trouble and annoyance in their man u
fa cture .
 S quare wire is prepared in a simi l ar way to round
—
i n the first process by the wire drawer the bre a k -

in g down ; and a fter w ards by submitting it to the

-
,

action of the draw plate ; h e re the first di fference

-

in its form or s hape commences to take effect The .

plate through which the wire has to pass contains

square holes instead of round as in the previous ,

case ; these holes may be mad e of any s ize re gul a t ,

ing them by a s teel punch which of cours e mus t, , ,

al s o be s quare. Th e exact size of the wire is

obtained by knocking the p unch into the plate from
the back s ide of it so as to Open or en large one of
,

t he holes of th e draw plate and afterwards by draw

-
,

ing the wire through it When the holes are too

.

large the draw plates are battered upon the fron t

,
-

w ith a convex faced hammer and the punches

-
,

applied from the proper s ide to regulate them i n ,

the way j ust described ; a bearing is thus p roduced

upon the surfac e of the plates which protects th e
holes a n d this rend e rs t he wire regular in size
, .

The plates in us e for these purposes being always

soft by constant wear and a continual alteratio n
,

of the holes the draw plat es will in time becom e

,
-

hard and require annealing after which process ,

they s hould be allowed to cool gradually by cover ,

ing the m with ashe s .

S olid oblong and half round wire s as w ell a s

-
,
1 04 H OL L OW W IRE - D RAWING .

the draw plate this method prevents

-
marks plier -
,

and also pre s erves the shape of the w ire inta c t ,

by dispensing with the use of draw tongs and -

,

this is of s ome importance in fancy wire drawing -

.

A nother good plan is to run the wire as it leav es ,

the draw plate upon a drum t tirn ed with a per

-
, ,

e n di cul a r han dle , which is secured to it hori

p
z on t a l ly
. The wire is drawn through the draw
pla te and wound upon the drum by a rotary
action ; whilst for facilitating its removal the ,

drum is S lightly conical in form After this .

proceeding if the wire remains unfi nished it is at

, ,

once transferred to a skeleton frame corresp ond ,

ing with the outer dimensions of the drum and ,

revolving upon a perpendicular pin ; the process is

repeated as many times as circumstances permit ,

or until the proper size is produced .

Th e wire requires annealing repeatedly in all the

processes of drawin g but experi ence and judgment
,

will dictate how often it should be done ; some

golds will stand much rougher treatment than
others therefore there are no fixed periods for
, ,

this proceeding .

In preparing hollow hal f round wire the p roce s s

-
,

commences according to the principles already

laid down for round wire S mall half round wire
.
-
,

in hollow may b e first drawn two sizes smaller

 H OL L O W HAL F R OUND WIRE S
- . 1 05

in the round than re quired when fin ished in half

r o und ; that is to say if the half round were re
,
-

q u ired to fi nish 1 8 size in t h e jeweller s metal gauge

’
-
,

i t should be drawn to 1 6 round wire in the same

g auge , and subse quently flattened to si z e 3 by

p assing it repeatedly through a small pair of
j ewellers flattening rol lers it is then well annealed
’

and greased ready for the appl ication of the draw

plate Th e gold ( being n e w in the form of a flat
.

narrow strip or riban d) is pointed by cutting it

with a pair of hand shears a little from each side
-
,

of the strip at the end so as to form a point for

,

ad m is s ion i n to the draw plate ; the wire is then

-

pu l led through a round hole large enough to ,

admit the point of a small steel punch which ,

acts as a doomer to the wire in its passage through

the hole of the plate O n e half round plate is next
.
-

taken and the wire drawn successively through

,

it until the desired si z e is made ; though usually

t w o holes are s ufli c ien t to obtain good half round -

wire of the hollow kin d .

F ancy wires of other descriptions are pre p ared

i n the first instance exactly as we have de
scrib ed ; but there is a change of the process in
finishing . O blon g wire would only require a very
slight draught in the half round draw plate just - -
,

suffi cient to m ake a set up on the edges of the wire

F 3
l 06 H OL L OW WIRE -
D R AWING .

it is then consigned to the oblong draw plate In -

.

its p assage through the latter it is supported ,

by a s mall tapered punch of the same di m en

s ions as the aperture in the plate ; this produces

a wire exactly the same shape as the ape rture ,

only hollow instead of soli d O blong wires will .

require to be of the same size in the round in order ,

to produce a tolerably sharp impression when they

are fi nished .

H o llow square wire is made by taking t w o

oblong wires and drawing them through a plate
containing square holes bet w een which is inserted
,

a round piece of steel wire which keeps them ,

in their proper places and renders their impres

,

sions sharp and equ a l S quare wire must be

.

two sizes larger in the round than is re quired in

the square as it finishes two sizes smaller in the
,

latter ; this is everywhere the case in the prepara

tion of plain square wire These observations also
.

apply to flute d wire made in hollow ; and other

fancy wires may be obtained by carrying out t h e
general rules here laid down .

O rnamental wire i s produced by the flattening

rollers bearing various pattern s of artistic work all ,

of which have b e en originated in the modern

school of goldsmiths The subsequent processes of
.

m a nipulation are precisely similar to tho s e already

 C H APTER V III .

M a nu fa cturin g P roc e s s e s —G old p l a tin g

.
-
.

G OL D -
like gold itself consists of various
P L ATING, ,

qualities and is valued at from two to fifteen

,

s hi llings per ounce It is commo n ly prepared in

.

the following manner : a bar of gold of the quality

desired and one of metal (composition or gilding
metal will do ) are taken and made pe rfectly fl at
under the stamp or press ; when this is done the ,

t w o bars are cleanse d by scraping or fi ling the

,

surfaces w hich will subseque n tly come in contact

this process is of import ance and must be con
,

t inn ed until every particle of bla c k i s en tirely re

moved Of the two filing is to be preferre d because
.
, ,

the fil e marks have a tend e n cy to a s sist the complete

-

amalgamation of the metals S ome thick borax is

.

n e x t pre p ared an d well rubbed over the surfaces

, .

The two bars are well secured together by strong

iron w ire and are then ready to be united into one
, .

There be ing several methods of effect ing this ,

it w ill be nece s s ary to describe th em F irs t.

,
 NINE -
CARAT PLATING . 1 09

the process kno w n as swea ti ng should b e ex

plained The two metals when perfectly secured
.
, ,

”
are placed in a muffle and made red hot ; the
“
,
-

heat is increased until they are almost at the poi n t

of f usion At this period the operation require s
.

very careful watching and when the metals h a v e ,

b ecome unite d the whole is withdrawn and the

, ,

amalgamation is complete .

Th e second and b est method the one also as fa r , ,

a s we know most adopted is that of joining the two

, ,

m etals together b y soldering Th e whole p rocess .

p revious to the solderi n g is exactly as before The .

m et al b ar b ei n g l arger in every respect than the

on e of gold the extended surfaces therefore of i t
, , ,

p rovide a support for the pallions o f solder which ,

are placed along one side and half way along each -

end The whole is then subj ected to a powerful

.

heat i n the m ufli e and the solder flows bet ween

,

the bars thoroughly cementing them together

, .

When this is seen to run down the side and e n ds

not charged the operation is com p lete and the
, ,

gold can be rolled hammered or otherw i s e m a ni

”

, ,
M

p ul a t e d
.

F orthe purpose of making 9 carat pl ating such -

,

as i s us e d by l ocket makers a bar of 9 carat g old

-
,
-

would be selected The relative thickness of the

.

t wo metals woul d b e perhaps in the p roportion of

, ,
l I0 O
G LD -
PL ATING .

I to 2 0 and would cost about 2 s per 0 2 To pro

, . .

duce wire flat tube 8cc the metal is all rolled flat
, , ,
.
, ,

when it may b e stamped spun cut into strip s , , ,

s ua ge d or d e e med
, and thus made into wire o r
, ,

otherwise attenuated to any extent In any of thes e .

processes the gold will follow the reduction of t h e

bas er metal still retaining to a considerable extent
,

the relative proportion of thickn ess b etween them .

In the case of wire drawing we may remark that

-
,

the holes of the draw plates must be closely -

watched in order to detect and remove scratches

, ,

which would b e a seri ous obstacle in the

manufacture of good gold plating -
.

R ound wire plating is made by cutting fl at stri ps

-

from the rolled metal then by s ua gi n g or dooming

, ,

and afterwards drawing them until the outer edges

meet A thin riband of p allion solder may then be
.

placed inside the joint and cemented when the ,

surplus solder must be removed ; a continuation

of the drawing process will render the wire fit for

every purpose that may be needful .

S ome gold plating however is left with the

-
, ,

joints of the wire u n soldered In using wire of .

this kind much care has to b e exercised in order ,

to prevent the j oint being seen on the surface of

the work which would spoil the sale of it With
, .

this class of goods the process of polishing is

 l l 2 PO L ISHING .

and applied in very small quantities to the revolving

brush and also to the work If the work is re .

quired to be very finely polished after t h e first ,

coarse marks have been removed another mix ,

ture must be us ed consisting of fin e ly powdere d

,
-

rotte n stone and oil : this preparation removes the

polishing marks produced duri n g the fi rst opera
-

tion A special b rush must be used with the last

.

mixture If a higher degree of polish is required

.
,

sti ll finer materials must be employed but such ,

is very seldom the case in the j ewelle ry trade .

Touch in g the work upon the buff to which a little ,

rouge and bro w n candle grease have been adde d

-
,

after the former p rocesses have been employed ,

produces a high degree of polish In fact the .

,

whole process consists i n entirely removing scratch

after scratch until nothing in the shape of marks
,

is visible to the naked eye .

S ome kinds of j ewellers work have to be ex

’

c ep t i on a l ly treated on account of the extreme

,

delicacy of make The Water of Ay r stone is very

.
- -

commo n ly employed by j ewellers in poli s hing .

”
The inside of rings is poli s hed upon a “
chuck ,

tapered down alm ost to a point ; and the applica

tion of a small portion of cotton wool to hold the -

mixture makes an effective polishi n g tool Threa ds -

.

are also somew hat largely used in this process ;

 E NAM E LL ING . I1 3

for the inside of the links of chains they are highly

advantageous and indeed cannot be surpassed
, , , .

The work should be well boiled in diluted sul

p h u r i c aci d in
,
the proportion of one pa rt of acid

to twen ty parts of water previous to polishing ; so

,

as to render it qu ite clean a n d b eing bright at , ,

t h e commencement of the latter process it will ,

continue so throughout ; a slight rub now and

then with a piece of cotton waste will remove the
grease enveloping it and thus in form the workman
,

as to the nece ss ity of continuing the operation .

When the p olishing is completed the work is

wa s hed out in a hot solution of soda soap and , ,

water and dried in warm b oxwood sawdus t Th e

, .

co m mon washing soda is used on account of i t s

cheapness its cost being about 2 d per lb and
, . .

1 o z of it to a pint of water will be found in almost

.

every case suffi ciently effi cacious .

E nam e llin g ’

is much practised in this country

E n a m e lll n g ,

and as the application of this art to jewellery

h eightens its beauty a few details connected with
,

i t may be necessary to complete the account of the

various processes employed in the production of
the j eweller s work The artistic work of the
’
.

goldsmith is also considerably enhanc e d by the

1 14 E NAM E LL ING.

use of enamel ; and much skill and taste a re abs o

lute ly requisite on the pa rt of the work man not ,

only in the mechanical processes but likewise in ,

the preparation and arran gement of his colours in ,

order to produce the highest possible hue or tint .

In fact it is almost requi s ite that he s hould be an

,

arti s t as well as a w ork man t o p roperly carry his

,

craft to perfection .

It has been much more extensively employed

s ince the year A D .1 8 0 0 owing to the discove ry of
.
,

g a s . T his and, as a consequence the use of coke , ,

have give n rise to improved appliances rendering ,

the operation less costly and easier to perform The

, .

extent of the patronage which the art has received

has als o tended to this result .

We shall refrain from going into the history of

ancient enamelling and painting as it was formerly
practised i n Italy where a rt study was almost a
,

fundamental principle of education and con fi ne ,

ourselves to s imply givi n g an outline of the

mysteries of the craft and its adaptation to the
,

present school of enamellers Our remarks there .

,

fore being purely descriptive are more particularly

, ,

intended for that class of gold workers which we -

sh all call the uninitiated or n on pr a ctica l in this

,
-

art .

It i s almost impossible for a good gold worker to -

I I6 E NAME L L ING .

some time then pour it out into a jar of water

, ,

collect the residue a n d afterwards reduce it to a

powder in an agate w are mortar and preserv e for
-
,

future us e .

F r i t z NO 2 . .

M etallic tin
M etalli c lead

Fuse this composition in an iron lad le at a dul l

red heat ; carefully remove the oxide which will
form upon the su rface taking care also to o b tain,

it quite free from the pieces of metal which have

escape d oxidati on and reduce as before to a fine
,

po w der Then take of this

.

C alcin e
S ilica
S al tp etre
C om m on s alt

Well m ix and partly fuse in a clay crucibl e ;

the few e r number of times this is fired the fi rmer
it will be
F rit z No 3 . .

B rok en cry s tal gobl ets

C alc in ed borax
Glass of an tim on y

S altpetre

M e lt this mixture after the manner recommend e d

for NO 1 B reak up and again melt as this flux
. .
,

i m proves by repeated meltings The above enamel .

 FRITZ OR FL Ux E MPL OYE D . 1 1 7

fl ux es are admirably adapted to form the bases of

ena m els for gold work They may be made more
-
.

fusible by increasing the proportion of borax ; and

by the latter s il bs t a n ce the fusibility of all enamels
may be increased at pleasure but too free a
use of i t is an ob stacle to the work of the artist .

F rit z N0 .
4 .

Flin t glass p ow dered

P earl-ash
C om m on salt

C alcin ed borax

L et these ingredients be well me lted togethe r ,

and afterwards finely b roken into powder and pre ,

served ready for the additional colouri n g mixture

of e namel .

F rit z NO .
5 .

S ilicious s an d

C alcin e d borax
G lass .
of an tim on y

S altp e tre
C halk

M ix an d as b efore explained grind into very

fuse ,

fine powder and r e melt ; this operation m ay be

-

judiciously repeated several ti m es We have o n ly .

at present described enamels and given directions ,

for the b ases of them ; variety of de sign i n colour

is pro duced by the addition of some metallic oxid e ,
I I8 E NAMELL ING .

which effects the change according to the kin d

employed . These oxides should be used a s
spari n gly as possible b ecause some of them will
,

not stan d the chemical process of colourin g or

even b oiling without a bloom co m ing over them .

A good black enamel may b e made by takin g the

followin g ingredients

B la c k E n a m el .

Fri tz or flux No .
5
P eroxide of m an gan es e

Fin e S axon y cobalt

B lu e E n a m el .

NO
’

F n tz or flux 4 .

F in e S axon y c obal t
S altp etre

Re d or C rim s on E n a m e l .

Fri tz or flux N0 .
3
P urple of cassius

Or red oxide of C op p er

W hit e E n a m el .

Oxide NO . 2

Fin e cry s tal

P eroxide of m an gan ese

G ree n E n a m e l .

Fritz or flux No . 1

O xide of copp e r

R ed oxide of iron
I2 0 E NAME L L ING .

if preferred they m ay b e preserved u n til require d

, ,

in the lump as they are formed after the crucible

,

operation ; if the la st mentioned plan is adop t e d

-
,

then they must be b roken with a rather s har p

fac e d hammer and pulverised by means of th e
,

afores aid pestle and mortar When this has been

’

done they are w ell washed in clean water and this ,

washing is continued un til all extraneous matter

has entirely disappeared They are then ready for .

use .

The work wh ich has to receive enamel has to b e

specially prepared : this is done in the following
manner — Th e pattern desired is first drawn on
the work by the graver ; the groundwork or part
to receive the enamel is cut down very evenly ,

and this helps to heighten the effect ; in the case of

transparent enamels the groundwork should be
extremely s mooth and bright Aft er the work has .

been well cleaned by washing in a hot solution of

soda soap and wa ter and dried the enamel is
, , , ,

—
applied i n ve ry delicate cases with the point of a
pen in others a knife or spatula may be s ubs ti
,

t ute d with advantage ; the work is then fired a n d ,

the enamel is laid on again as m a n y tim es as

required .

When th e enamel is suffi ciently fused the surplus

p a r t is ru bbe d off t h e arti c
,l e i s r ins ed a n d aga i n ,
 F IN S ING
I H E NA M E L -
WORK . I2 I

fired in order to close the pores G reat j udgment

.

is required w ith regard to this operation as too ,

long an exposure to the heat of the furnace would

completely ruin the entire work D ifferent shades
.

of colour require di fferent degrees o f heat and a ,

kn o wledge of this can be acquired only by con

t in u a l practice ; such knowledge howev e r is of the
, ,

highest importance because in some of the lower

,

qualities of gold the fus ing point of enamel is so

,

very near that of the gold that there is great

dan g er of fusing the one along with the other .

As we have said before when the workma n finds

,

himself b eset with these diffi culties a small a d,

dition of borax to the enamel wi ll remove these

defe cts in the operation .

O pa que colours require a slower and longer con -

tinn ed heat than transparent ones because the ,

base generally contains lead tin or antimony In

, , .

transparent colours a sharp quick heat is most

suitable which must be proportioned to the extent
,

of brilliancy required .

O paqueness may be given to black enamel by

heating the work to a dull red after it has passed
through the usual process of cleaning : the oxide
which forms upon the surface being black imparts ,

a kind of darkness to the colour .

In t he cas e of transp arent ena m el s, the groun d

G
I2 2 ENAME L L ING .

work must be cl ean smooth a n d quite bright ; th e

, ,

grooved surface b eing commonly run over with a

polished half round scorper to make the efle c t
,
-
,

more intense and beautiful the latter quality ,

depending to a considerable extent on this bein g

properly performed .

B y varying the alloys of gold a great alteratio n

may b e made in the brilliancy of enamel ; for
example in transparent yellow and green th e
, ,

alloy of gold should be rather pale ; in the case of

red the reverse should be the case
,
.

Th e vertical l apidary s wheel is now much used

’

by the a rt ific e r for the purpose of removing the

surplus enamel ; and by the applicatio n of wet
emery it is rendered clear and smooth : this is
much quicker and b etter than the old method It is .

finished upon the buff by an application of putty

powder (ox ide of tin ) as it is both smoother and
,

cuts faster than most other polishing mixture s In .

E ngland the ena m eller s is a separate and disti n ct

’

craft and is altogether an a rt in itself ; ne v er

,

hav ing been found to answer w éll where tried by

ordi n a ry manufacturing goldsmiths the designs and ,

colours having in their hands too much of same

ness w hen compared with those produced under
,

other circumstances Th e en a meller to take high

.
,

ra n k i n the art m ust have some knowledge of

,
 C H APTE R IX .

E n gra vin g a n d C h a s in g .
—E n gra vin g .

TH E art of engraving on s tone and metals by

incised lines is so ancient that we cannot trace th e
historic period when it was not practised ; sufli c e it
to say that among the collections of antique art in
,

the B ritish M useum there are numerous examples

,

of engraving the work of the ancient E gyptians

,

and other nations executed on fin e marbl e and

,

also on precious stones B esides we know that

.
,

engraved sta m ps or seals were used as offi cial

signatures in the very earliest times for which we ,

have only to refer the reader to the first b ooks of

the H oly S criptures A gain during the wander
.
,

ings of the Israelites in the desert we read that ,

Bezaleel of th e trib e of Judah and Aholiab of the

, , ,

tribe of D an were set apart specially for the pur

,

pose of devising and executing curious works in

gold silver and brass and in cutting of stones to
, , ,

set them and in carving of wood for the service

, ,
”

of the ta b ernacle of M oses ; and it is a l so written

 E NGR AV ING . 12 5

that G od filled them with w i s dom of heart to

“
,

work all manner of work of the engraver and with ,

knowledge of all manner of workmanshi p of the

”
cunning workman ( E xodus xxxi 1 .

Th e process of engraving is of ancient origi n and ,

is one in which the fin e arts and the workman s ’

skill are e q ually b rought into operation Th e .

m aki n g of images some of which existed in the time

,

of A braham was a work of great antiquity though

, ,

they con s isted merely of rude outlines on flat sur

faces .This m a y claim to b e the nearest approach
to engraving of which we have any knowledge .

In the middle ages m ello engrav ing held an i m

’

important place among metal workers ; it consisted -

in making fi n e incisures on works of gold silver , ,

c opper &c , and filling them with a black enamel

.
, ,

and w as calle d working in m eZZo—a process which

'

'

had a very important e fle ct This invention is .

ascri b ed to a native of F lorence who was de ,

s er v e dly cel ebrated for his genius and skill in the

a r t at the period of which we speak— the fi fteenth

,

century To the same artist whose name was

.
,

M aso F in iguerra is given the credit of having

,

employed copper plates for en graving from which

impressions were subsequently taken and he also
tried printing from engraved metal plates in this
way .
I2 6 E NGRAVING .

Immediately the discovery b ecame known in

Italy other goldsmiths and artists followed F in i
,

guerra in his n e w handicraft and the art of en ,

g raving w as soon extensively practised T hroug h .

out the sixteenth century it was considerably

improved and the ski ll of such artists as B otticel li
, ,

M arc Antonio R aimondi and B envenuto C ellin i

, ,

the celebrated Italian goldsmith ( who was called

the prince of gol d workers) did much to raise the
-
,

fame of the Italian engrav ers to a high standing ,

and to bring the art to a greater pitch of public

appreciation than it had ever attained before A t .

first i t was usual in Italy G ermany and elsewhere

, , ,

for the same person to prepare the design and

afterwards engrave it ; but afterwards when the ,

art became more mechanical the two branches of,

it were divided : and strange to say that method

, ,

has b een somewhat extensively practised down to

the present day .

It would be interesting enough to inquire i n to the

histo ry of the art and dwell upon the progress that
,

has been made down to our own time ; but our

present observ ations being limited we shall avoid ,

a lengthened description and come at once to the

period of its introduction into E ngland for c om
m e rc i a l purposes ; th is will carry us a b out on e

hundred years back ; and we wi sh it to be born e

 E NGR AV ING .

Th e trade is much indebted to D raper for i m

proved methods of s harpening the gravers an d
va rious other introductions of his have considera b ly
aided the workman by simplifying the appliances ,

thus rend eri n g the art more simple and its effects
more beautiful .

F or more than one hundred years engraving has

b een more or less practised for trading purposes in
E n gland Notwithstanding this however it is by
.
, ,

no means common to m e et with a firs t class Work -

man for to reach this point he must be an artist

, ,

as well as a mechanic This is not perhaps impera

.

t iv ely necessary to the ordinary practice of the

art ; but as the em b ellishments produced on works

,

of j ewellery by the graver are added for p urposes

b oth artistic and ornamental there is ample s cope

,

for the display of a considerable amount of know

le dge as well as skill in the execution of his task .

It will at once therefore b e perceived that the

engraver to become a high class workman should
,
-
,

not only have a natural ability for design and ,

a tolerably correct idea of the different periods

and styles of ornam entation but must also be pos
,

sessed of great taste and judgment as well as a ,

delicacy of touch and acquired patience to ensure ,

reputation and success .

'

Th e process or m odus qpem n a z of th e engraver

,
’
,
 P R OC E S S O F TH E E NGRA V E R . 1 29

—
is as follows The workman the most part , for ,

uses only the ordinary ba n k or lozenge shaped -

graver invented by D raper together with several ,

s mall gouges and needles for scooping out hollows

or making very fi n e tracery a sharp edged scraper ,

-

similar to a small three square file sharpened at -

the point for removing the burr raised by the

,

graver and a Turkey stone upon which he

,
-

sharpens his tools H e also uses a kind of cement

.
,

in which he secures the work previous to its

manipulation consistin g of a mixture of B urgundy
,

pitch plaster of Paris resin and b eeswax in the

,
- -
, ,

following proportions

B urgun dy pi tch
R esin
P las ter-of-Paris
B eesw ax

P lace these articles in an e arthen pipkin or other ,

suitab le vessel and melt carefully stirring the

, ,

mixture well until thoroughly incorporated ; then

pour into a vessel of cold water already provided
when the mass is cool enough to touch with the
hands it should be presse d rolled and kneaded
, , ,

together in order to discharge the water con

,

t a i n ed therein Should it t urn out b rittle return

.
,

it to the pipkin and add more b eeswax ; put it

,

through the same process a s before and work it ,

G 3
1 30 E NGRA V ING .

well together for the more it is worked the b etter

,

it will be for use Wh en the proper degree of elas

.

t ic i ty has b een obtained it is then ready for use, ,

and any surplus m ixture may b e placed aside for a

future time In common engraving a portion of
.

this cement is fixed upon v arious sized blocks of -

wood to which it strongly adheres by heat Th e

, .

article to b e manipulated upon is affix ed to one of

these and embodied in the cement ; and when
,

properly set the b lock is fastened in the vice and

, ,

the engraver performs the task allotted to him .

B est work is engrav ed in a somewhat di fferent

manner The article is secured to a littl e stand
.
,

which m oves upon a b all placed in a leathern

socket and fastened to a handle or other suitable
,

piece of wood ; the b all having a double ro tatory

action the workman is enabled to bring it into
,

any required position .

Th e engraver has only the eye to guide him in

th e various devices of his art and as the result ,

depen ds upon the skill of the operator that eye ,

should be a pretty correct one Grood light is very .

necessary in engraving ; gaslight being extremely

tedious and t rying glob es fi lled with water are
, , ,

used which being placed bet w een the workman

, ,

and the gas j et steady the l ight and throw it more

-
, ,

clearly upon the work .

1 32 C HA SING .

pressions wil l b e striki n gly sharp and clea r .

C hasing is resorted to a great deal for solid wo r k ,

and when effectually done it gives it a very artisti c

appearance ; when applied to gold chains of th is
de scription they look rich and b eauti ful
,
M uch .

of the work o f chasing on common or che a p

articles of j ewellery such as scrolls leaves &c is
, , ,
.
,

in imitation of engraving The chaser in order to

.
,

give life and effect to the design he has in hand ,

should have a real artistic taste and feeling as it ,

is generally to his judgment that the matter is left .

In pe rformi n g his task he takes a kind of wooden

,

bowl and fills it with cement ; this is then fitted

,
‘

into a suitable leathern socket and placed upon a

,

strongly fix e d table by which means his b eautiful

-
,

m anipulations are performed with interesting effect .

There is another kind of chasing the work pro ,

duc ed being almost a facsimil e of stamping by the

press but utterly devoid of the roundness which
,

it produces : the hammer and the punch imparting

a crispness and sharpness of design if skilful ly ,

treated not to be equalled by any other method

,
.

C ha s ing appears to have b een known to the old

m asters for Benvenuto C ellini is said to have prae
,

t i s e d the art with wonderful skill and precision A .

design m a y be rendered more d istinct after the

p a ttern has been g reatly brought ou t in relief by ,
 B E NVE NUTO C E L L INI . 1 33

imply matting the ground Th i s p lan was adopted

’

s .

by C ellini and performed by him as follows

,
— A
h ighly hardened piece of steel was taken and
-

b roken through with on e sharp blow of the ham

m e r when if the break was eve n and the texture
, , ,

o r grain regular in the composition of the steel an ,

e fi e cti v e ma tting punch was at once produced

-
.

This matti n g tool appears to have been greatly

-

used by the mediaeval gold workers in their pro -

cesses of art manufacture -

.

Article s of j ewelle ry which have passed through

the various branches of workmanship connected
with the making department satisfacto rily ,

are next transferred to the hands of the electro

”
gilder who deposits upon their su rface a very
,

thin film of pure gold by means of electricity , .

E lectro gilding being a distinct branch of business

-
,

and usually carried on in premises apart fro m

those of the manufacturing goldsmith we shal l for ,

the present refrai n from goin g into the subject at ,

least so far as concerns the general details of the

process ; being an entirely separate art it requires ,

difi ere n t treatment H owever we may just ex

.
,

plain the process in a few words A solution of .

cyanide of gold is prepared in cyanide of p ot a s

sium and heated either in an enamelled saucepan
, ,

or stoneware j ar placed inside a pan containin g

,
I34 C H A SING .

water The go l d solution shoul d not b e allowed to

.

°
b oil acting b est at about 1 60 F ahr To produce
, .

this heat the outer solution when it is employed

, ,

must b e b oi ling The galvanic battery is next

.

brought into re quisition and when ready for us e

, ,

”
an anode consisting of a plate of pure gold is
, ,

fastened to the end of the wire i ssuing from the

carbon or other negative element of the b attery ,

and dipping into the preparation ; the articles to

b e gilt are hung on the wire issuing from the zinc
of the b attery and upon immersion in the solution
, ,

a fi lm of pure gold will b e almost i n s ta n ta

n e ou s ly de p osited upon them The articles should
.

be scrupulous ly clean otherwise the operation

,

will not t ake effect and the s olution becomes

,

spoiled .
1 36 S oL D E R s AND S OL D E R ING .

they are afterwards to be applied many having ,

secret methods proportioning them .

C oloured go ld solders may be made b y tak ing

one part of fi n e silver to four five or six parts of , ,

alloyed gold according to the quality and the

,

degree of hardness required These should n ot be .

made too poor in quality for if they are they w ill

, ,

n ot colour properly Th e more common fo rm s

.

of solder have been amply discussed in a n oth er

part of this volume together with their mode of

,

application to the goldsmith s work G reat cl e a n li

’
.

ness is required both in regard to the solder and

the surfaces of the work which a re to b e united
together ; otherwise however excell ent the solder
,

may b e no junction can take place F or the

,
.

use of those who prefer making their solders

from unadulterated material s we have com ,

piled the following table having fi n e gold as ,

their b asis

C oloure d S old e rs .

D esc rip tion . Fin e Silv er . C op p e r .

B est solder
M edi um s older
C om m on solder

These sol ders m ay be rolled fl at a n d c ut w ith

 SO F T S O L D E R . 1 37

the shears or press i n to p a llions

“
or if preferre d ,

filed into d ust their suit a bility bei n g a dapted to

,

either process . Throughout the whole of th i s

treatise we h a ve purposely omitte d mentioning any
thing concerning the u s es and applications of soft “

solder a term which has no reference to either the

,

softer or harder solders of the same material of

w hich we have been spe aking ; but to a totally

different solder altogether commonly called in the

,

jewellery trade soft tommy Perhaps it would

.
”

have been more correct and we sho uld have been

,

b etter understood if we had defined the former

,

s olders of a more fusible nature as easy in order

“
, ,

t o distingu i sh them Th e time h as however

.
, ,

now arrived when we should say some thing c on

cerning this soft tommy .

S o ft S old e r .

It is called s of t partly because it is used to unite

much harder substances than itself and partly ,

because it can b e applied to finished wo rk without

changi n g its colour the melting point being so very
,

low compared with the others of which we have

previously spoken . It is la rgely employed by
country jewellers and watchmakers ; but in the
manufactory it is almost scorned and is on e of ,

the greatest drawbacks and troubles prac tic a l

1 38 SOFT S OL D E R .

workmen have to encounter in dealing with j ob

r epa i r s ; it so adheres to the gold when once
applied that it is with the greatest diffi culty it can
,

be eradicated ; and then sometimes it is even at

the expense of the gold itself into which it pe n e ,

trates so deeply that the slightest application of

,

heat causes the gold to become perishable C oloured .

articles ca nn ot be re coloured with this solder on

-

them n either can articles of j ewellery be fz a f d

,

solder e without its previous entire removal A n d .

to do th is is a very diffi cult task indeed inasmuch ,

as there are no methods known as yet in the ,

trade whereby it can be removed e ffec tually from

,
'

the difi ere n t qualities Of gold TO supply this .

desideratum we have long set ourselves the

,

task and we have now succeeded in i n t roduc

,

ing a plan into the trade which will act as an ,

'

e fle c t u a l destruction of the e vil ; by this method ,

which we shall explain hereafter soft solder ,

can easily be removed from any quality of gold ,

silver &c , .

The composition of soft solder and the ex citing ,

liquid employed in its application have a prior ,

claim on our attention as we believe such in for

,

mation to be interesting and useful The following .

is the best for all purposes connected with the

j ewellery trade care being taken to procure the
,
1 4o S O FT SO L D E R ING FL UID .

taking a piece O f p aper and dippi n g it into the

heated mass wh en if it does not ignite the mixture
, , ,

is in a proper state for castin g D ross and other .

,

organic matter upon the surface may be kept b a ck ,

from mixing with the solder by the timely a pplica ,

tion Of a piece Of wood held with the left hand ,

to the mouth of the l a dle E ven in this operation .

good solder can only be produced by careful atte n

tion to these principles In so ft solderin g an .
-
,

entirely different stimulant to that employed in

hard soldering has to be used ; this we shall de s ig
-

nate as

S o ft - s old e rin g F luid .

Thisfluid is well known to all j ewellers but it ,

bears various names in the different workshops ,

&c ; its true chemical

”
such as monkey “
fake , , .

name however is chloride O f zinc and it is com

, , ,

posed of a mixture of hydroch loric acid ( s pirits Of

salts) and metallic zinc in the following propor ,

tions
S p irits of s alts

M etallic z in c

Th is solution is employed to diss olve or preve n t

oxid a tion Of the surfa ce O f the j oints about to be
united and it als o acts as a stimulus to the flow of
,
 S O FT S O L D E R ING F L U ID
-
. 1 4 1

th e sold er ; of course the j oi n ts should be quite

free from dirt or grease otherw ise it cannot per
,

fo rm its proper functions O n e of the best ways of

.

p reparing it,
is to procure an earthen pipkin and put ,

i n to it two and a half ounces of spirits of salts and

o n e ounce of metallic zinc in small pieces Th e .

action Of th e acid upon the zinc at first will be ener

getic ; the latter will become dissolved with an ,

evo lution Of hydrogen gas When the zinc has .

dissolved or the e ffe rvescence has partially ceased

, ,

t h e t e m p e ra ture m a y conveniently be increased by

placing the pipkin with its contents upon a sheet Of

iro n over a gas j et ; the extra half ounce of spirits
- -

of s a lts will allow for loss by evaporation when this

plan has to be resorted to S ometimes it will be .

found necessary especially when the acid is not

,
'

good to increase its temperature in order to efi e ct

,

its thorough saturation for the more n eutral the

,

mixture the better it acts Th e solution may be .

allowed to settle when suffi ciently acted upon and ,

the sup e rnatant liquor poured from the sediment

into a bottle ready for use This mixture or pre .

a r a t i on will keep any length of time in a corke d

p
bottle When this is employed in so ft solderi n g
.
-

iron or steel the addition to it of a sma ll portion

,

of powdered s a l ammoniac is a great improve

-

ment ; a quarter of an o un ce to the proportion of

1 42 D IS SOL VING S OFT S OLD E R .

solution given above will form a very g o od,

mix ture ; a tougher and more durable j oint is

produced by it ; in cutting up small l inks by m eans
of steel cutters we have found its us e a wonderfu l
,

acquisition .

D i s s ol v in g S o ft S olde r .

G enera lly speaking O ld work which has to b e

, ,

repaired re gi lt or coloured contains soft solder the

,
-
, , ,

result of being mended by inexperienced persons

all this must be removed or destroyed before the
articles can b e properly repaired It is a general .

belief among workmen that annealing and boiling

out will des troy it b ut it really has a contrary effect
, ,

the hea t thus given tending only the more closely

to amalgamate the solder with the gold We have .

Often tried to remov e the solder after the annealing

process by scraping and filing and have always ,

found that it had penetrated so deeply into the go ld ,

that it would be utterly impossible to eradicate it

by any such means On e Of th e common methods of
.

treating this class of solder in th e workshop is to ,

remove whatever you can by means of the scraper

( whic h consists of a three square fil e sharpened at
-

the point )and then to place the article in tolerably

,

strong muriatic acid for some time Nitric acid is .

a much quicker way but it cannot b e safely ,

1 44 D IS S O L V ING S OFT SO L DE R .

be a r upon this subj ect is one which occupie d us

,

a lo n g time bo th in its considerati on and a cc o m

,

p l i s h m e,
n t and may there fore be sa fely applie d to
all classes O f work i rrespective O f quality It can
, .

be adopted i n the case of silver goods if desired ,

and that without any injurious effect whatever ,

whilst the time it takes to do the work is redu ced

to the minimum .

The destruction Of the solder under this plan is

effected as follows T ake .

Proto- s ulpha te of iron

Nitrate of p otassa
Water
1 3 oz s .

R educe the p roto sulphate Of iron (green copperas)

and nitrate Of potassa ( saltpetre )to a fin e powder ,

then add these ingredients to the water and boil ,

the preparatio n in a cast iron saucepan for some

-

t ime ; afterwards allow the liquid to C ool and i n ,

do ing so it will shoot into fin e crystals ; if any of

the liquid should remain uncrystallised pour it fr o m ,

the crystals and ag a in heat it when on cooling a

, ,

second ti m e it will all have become crystallised

, .

The crystallised salt S hould then be taken and

di s solved in muriatic acid ( s pirits of salts ) in the ,

p roportion O f one ounce O f salt to eight ounces Of

 NE W AND E FFE C TIVE PR OCE S S . 1 45

acid. Now take of the latt er preparation on e

ounce and add it to four ou nces Of boi ling water
,

i n a pipkin keeping up the heat by th e means a l

,

re ady stated In a short space of time the most

.

ob stinate cases of soft solder will be cleanly and

entirely removed and without th e work C hanging
,

colour if thes e instr uctions are properly carried

,

out in prep arin g the mixture 6 m , .

 C H AP TE R XI .

V a riou s P roc e s s e s of C olourin g an d F ini s hin g .

D ry - C olourin g .

B E FORE entering upon an examination of this

process by which the surfac e O f alloyed gold is
,

changed into a rich and beautiful yellow colour ;

presenting in goldsmith s work a striki ngly
,
’

characteristic and most pleasing appearance we ,

desire to express the hope that we are not layin g

ourselves open to the C harge of betraying trad e
secrets our aim simply being to render a serv ice
,

which wi ll prove useful to j ewellers generally as ,

we ll as to manufacturers and workmen by endea ,

v our i n g ( fro m a practical point of view)to explai n

ih detail the real nature of a process little under

stood and one which enriches and puts a fi nish
,

up on their work .

C olouri n g to the goldsmith is strictly a trad e

, ,

term and means the g iving of colour to an articl e

, ,

a fter every other process Of workmanship has been

c om pleted and it is restricted by him to this par

,
1 48 D RY C OL OUR ING
-
.

It has been said that the goldsmith who by ,

submitting his work to a C hemical preparation ,

fir st produced a colour never before Obtained by

any process was a Frenchman S ince the intro
, .

duction of the art as a F rench invention it has ,

seen m any changes b oth E nglish and G erman

,
-
,

not only in the mode of its application and the

shades of colour produced but also in the qualities ,

Of the gold O perated upon .

'

Th ere are tw o m eth ods Of colouring gold called ,

respectively the dry colour i ng and the wet colour

i n g ; the materials employed are n early the same in
all cases : they are

I rt of salt
p a

I art of alum
p
2 p arts of s alt etre
p

D ry colouring cannot be performed upon gold

-

in ferior to 1 8 C arats We shall give several pro

-
.

cesses for wet colouring with their respective ,

qualities Of gold as arranged and practised by

,

ourselves But we now proceed to the deta ils of

.

the process Of dry colouring and shall give our

-
,

information in a methodica l m anner in order ,

to be the more plain and intelligible and shall ,

describe the various operation s genera lly em

ployed upon each of which depends fai lure or
,
 OR IGINAL PR OC E S S . 1 49

success A mong those that take

.
p recedence will
be found the

O ri gin a l P roc e s s of D ry - C olou rin g .

Thisprocess for colouring superior articles Of

gold has been extensively practised by goldsmiths ;
it is not so complicated as many and therefore ,

may be performed with l ess skill This is decidedly.

the original one ; it requires the following

materials
Ni trate of p otassa
C om m on salt

Al um

Themixture shoul d be reduced to powder and

placed in a colour pot or common earthen pipkin
-
, ,

and all owed to dissolve slowly ; this should be

done over a fir e that can easily be reg ulated a gas ,

furnace being the best for the purpose The pot .

need only be large enough to give the work full

play without allowing it to touch the bottom or
sides which would mark the articles dipped It
, .

should be s ufli c i e n tly fi lled with colour so that ,

when it rises it would come to the top Wh ile .

dissolving the mixture Should be well stirred with

,

an iron stirrer ; it will then rise and the work ,

must at once b e suspended in it by means of fine

1 5 0 D R Y- COL O URING .

silver or p l atinum wire and kept in continual

,

moti on until the liquid is ab out to sink in the pot ,

when the work must b e taken out and at once

immersed in clean muriatic acid pickl e which will ,

remove the adhering colour The colour in the pot

.

will rise again after the withdrawal of the work ,

and of this opportunity advantage must b e taken

for a fresh dip For p lain work generally two
.
,

Of these dips will be suffi cient but for hollow ;

work three will be necessary NO description

.

can give the exact time or explain the incidents

connected with colouring ; sometimes it will be
produced as quickly again as others and this ,

k nowledge can be ac quired only b y actual

practice .

In this proce s s there is not so much danger of

spoiling the work as in the subsequent ones we
shall refer to for so intense a heat not being t e
,

quired it can safely b e left in the mixture for longer

,

periods M oreover if preferred t he quenching

.
, ,

directly after the stated periods of withdrawing the

work from the colour may be dispensed with alto
,

gether The arti cles may be removed occasionally

.

to a scertain if the mixture has operated suffi ciently ,

a n d when this is made evident they should be ,

allowed to cool gradually and afterwards immersed

,

in perfectly clean sulphuric acid pickle which will ,

1 5 2 D RY- C OLO UR ING .

which place in the fi re upon a forge or in a g a s ,

furnace and make red hot

, This may soon be -
.

done if placed upon the forge by blowing w i th ,

the forge bellows ; then put the above mixture

-

into the pot and thoroughly well fuse stirring it

, ,

wi th a thin iron rod The heat given cannot b e t oo

.

strong but it must be very carefully watched a n d

, ,

advantage taken of the prop er opportunity for t h e

immersion of the work Wh en the m ixture is pro .

perly fused it will begin to assume a brown yell ow -

fl ame ; when this yellow fl ame presents itse lf th e ,

p reparation is quite ready for the reception of t h e

work which must b e suspended in b unches upon
,

fin e platinum wire and dipped into the mixture for

a few seconds o nly when it must be instantly,

withdrawn and plunged into boi ling nitric acid

pickle ; if the exact colour required is not th en
produced another dip and sometimes a third may
, ,

be necessary ( especially in hollow work) to give ,

the articles a fine rich appearance The quench .

ing in nitric acid removes any colour that may

adhere to the work ; but unless it is dried each
time between the subsequent dips the colour will ,

fly about This is caused by the articles being

.

immersed wet and the scald or burn from the

,

m ixture is particularly prominent The dr ying .

out bet ween each dip is not only tedious but if ,

 P R E PAR ING TH E WOR K . 1 53

minute portions Of sawdust are l eft in the interstices

O f the work the result Of a second immersion would
,

be little black patches upon the surface of the

a rticles considerably impairing their colour In
, .

performing this latter process it is advisable to

,

wear an O ld glove to save the hand during m an ip u

lation In colouring in this way it is always i m
.

p e r a t i v e that the operation should be quick ,

Whereas in wet co l ouring time is required

-
The .

gold lOst by this method is very trifling and it is ,

therefore altogether unnecessary to preserv e sepa

r a t ely the spent colouring mixture and
-
dipping
acids ; they may b e thrown into the waste water tub -
,

o r if other w ise desired into the floor sweep

, , We -
.

s hall have occasion hereafter to speak of another

m ethod of dry colouring w hich we have success

-

fully employed s o will n ow procee d to exp l ain the

,

m odes O f

P rep ari n g t h e Work .

Before s ub mitting the work to the action Of the

c olourin g preparation just described it shoul d be ,

very care fully examined in order to detect and

,

eradicate marks or scratches ; and this part Of th e

process should not be overlooked as it is O f great
,

importance in dry c olouring ; in fact the work

-
,

c annot b e too h ighly p olished This p roc es s h a s

.

H 3
1 54 D RY C OLOURING
-
.

been already amply expl ained Afterw ards the .

work wi ll require to be well wash ed out in a h ot

so lution of soda soap and water and dried in
, , ,

c l ean boxwood sawdust A ccordi n g to one of th e

.

methods of preparation it is then taken and covere d

,

with a layer of b orax which is best used for thi s

,

purp ose by taking it in th e form of powder s uf

fi ci en t to com plete th e op eration a n d making it ,

i nto a th ick past e with water Th e work m ay

.

then eith er be di pp ed into this mix ture or b rushed

over with it and h eated upon a c lean fire unti l i t
,

turn s nearly black when i t may be place d aside to

,

cool ; then boiled i n clean diluted sulphuric acid

pickl e ; rinsed well in c lean water an d finally dri ed ,

a s b e fore
.

A v ery excellent p lan a n d one w e h ave found t o

,

answer better i n preparing the w ork for dry col our -

ing than the a b ove is to well buff it upon a s oft

,

piec e of fe l t such a s is us e d by lapp ers in putting

,

that exquisite finish upon or zglzl gold ch ains Th is .

must b e don e a fter th e wash ing out s ubse quent t o

the polish ing . Wh en a high degree of brightn es s
is produced by th is means i t will require t o be,

a gai n washed out ; for p erfect cl e an l ine ss is of th e

utmost imp ortan ce i n carry ing out this p rocess a s ,

well a s th e minor ones E verything prepar ed in

.

t hi s manner takes a n ex ce edingly high a n d b right

1 5 6 D RY- C OL OURING .

bing who le surface with tools suitabl e for t he

t he
'

di fle ren t classes of goods which comprise various

,

shaped steel and agate burnishers ; when any of

these bes t suited to the work are dipped in a solu
,

tion Of weak ale or soap and water repea tedly a n d

, , ,

applied skilfully to all the surfaces Of the work a ,

fi n e rich and b rilliant co l our wil l b e the res ul t .

New P roc e s s of Dry -

C ol ouri n g .

S uperiorarticles Of gold as regards quality m ay ,

be made to assume a beautiful deep co l our pos ,

sessin g al l the appearance of fi n e gold itself by ,

immersing them for a few seconds in the following

mixture which must however, be carefully p re
, ,

p ared TO cflect this take

.
,

th em al l to a fi n e p owder and well mix

R e duce
together ; the preparation may then be treated
exactly as those before recommended with the ,

exception that dilute sulphuric acid should be em

ployed for dipping instead Of nitric or muriatic
, .

F or dry colouring the solder used for the articles

-
 NE W PROC E SS .

m us t b e goo d ; and the mixture of alloy of which

they consist shoul d have a preponderance of copper ,

the proportion Of two parts copper to one part

silver being a very convenient and useful amalgam
to employ .

S om e go ld co l ourers p erfer simply to anneal and

-
,

b oi l the work in aquafortis p ickl e only in prepar ,

ing it for colouring No doubt this is a good plan

.
,

but it produces a dead appearance ; the main object

to be attained is thorough cleanliness and this to ,

a considerab l e extent depends upon th e intricacy

or simplicity of the work in hand Th e simplicity

.

of the modes of preparation which we have de

s cribed are preferab le especia lly the one of bufli n g

,

the work previous to its immersion in the co l our

pot ; a s th orough cleanliness is first Obtained an d ,

a subse quent brightness imparted which is not

,

lost in the c olour produced upon the work We have .

invariably found a richness of colour to result unat ,

t a in able by any oth er means ; and w e know further

th at it is always practised by an eminent L ondon

fi rm of go ldsmiths . The brighter and c l eaner the
work b efore submitting to this process of dry
,

colouring the richer and more beautiful will be the

,

colour eflect e d by the chemical manipulation Of this

i mportant art of the goldsmith .
1 5 8 WE C OL OURING
T- .

W et -C olo urin g .

In dealing with the comparative ly speak in g

, ,

m inor process — which however is much more

, ,

extensively empl oyed—commonly known in th e

trade as wet col our ing it will b e b est to i n form
-
,
”

the reader concerning the first, or theoretica l p rin

c ip l e s and th en their useful application to this
,

b eautiful art so as to render the information more

,

perfect as regards practical utility .

F ormerly it was an established princip l e that t o ,

every ounce of work to b e coloured there shoul d be

one pound of col our, compose d of th e following
ingredients
4 oz s . of salt

4 oz s . of alum

8 oz s . of sal tp etre.

evident that there was much m is con cep

H ere it is
tion prevailing the mai n supposition b eing that the
,

amount of colour re quired sh ould b e strictly in pro

portion to the amount Of work i n wezg i /
z l and cor ,

responding w ith the proportions we have given .

Now this idea is erroneous It is not in proportion .

to the weight of work that the colour shoul d be

taken but to th e amount Of surface p resented to the
,

action Of the colouring mixture F or example, .

hal f a dozen solid gold C hains might weigh as much

- -
I6 0 WE T C OL OUR ING .

almost every one havi ng a specia l mode of mixi n g ,

and thus a particular shade of colour is given t o

the manufactures of each according to taste or
,

instructions ; and the distinctive feature introdu c e d

is then considered a special ity of manufacture of
the firm practising it .

O n the first introduction of this art it w a s

imagined that the presence of fin e gold suspen d ed
in the colouring mixture would facilitate its action ;
accordin gly plates Of that material were suspend ed
,

with the work in the colour and the workmen were

, ,

sometimes charged by their employers to give th e

articles an extra dip or two into it in order to in
,

crease the richness by a thicker deposit of pure gold .

By others 1 8 C arat gold wire w a s always used to

-

sustain the work whilst colouring by the wet pro

c ess .H appily for the trade all th ese confl icting
,

ideas are dead and gone .

The ingredie nts employed in wet co l ouring are all

-

powerful agents in the dissolution of the baser alloy

upon the surface of gold articles submitted to their
action and whil e dissolving this they have also a
,

weak er action upon the go ld itself ; therefore this

colouring should not be carr ied too far The correct .

ness Of these remarks is fully borne out by the p ro

portion i n weight lost in colouring being greater in
,

proportion as the quality b ecomes lower We beli eve .

 D E P O SITION IN WE T-
C OL OUR ING . 1 61

t h at by ve ry skilful management it is quite possib le

t o utilise a portion of the dissolving gold again for

w e ha ve ourselves coloured the commoner quali

ties with a l oss of only three grains to the ounc e .

This we hav e done repeatedly and our opin i on

,

i s t o some extent corroborated by the quickness

of colouring p roduced by the app lication of O ld

c olour and the small p ercentage of loss sus

,

t a i n e d from the work . An d fu rther if this O ld

,

colour is taken after having been several times

e mployed the amount of gold recoverabl e will
,

be found to b e very small indeed To show

.

that the gold dissolving from th e surfac e of the

w ork operated upon has an inclination to deposit a

p ercentage o f i t s é
lf u p on the same work again w e ,

m ay mention that we have deposi ted a thick coat

ing of fi n e gold upon the pl atinum Wire with which

we suspended the work whilst colouring This is .

the resul t no doubt Of som e chemical phenomenon

, ,

O f which we ca n not properly explain the cause ; but

when we Witnes s the beautiful colour clear and ,

quite smooth with in itself produced upon very

,

common qual ities we cannot b ut surmise that

,

something of this sort must be really going on

duri n g the action of the colour upon the work ;
otherwise these low qualities must appe ar very
frost b itten and present quite an i rregular surface
-
, .
1 62 WE T -
C OL OUR ING .

H aving now laid down the general principl es of th e

process we sh all at once proceed to details taking
, ,

the methods a s they have been introduced into the

t rade since the commence m ent of the art in thi s

country .

F r e n c h P roc e s s of W et -
C olou rin g .

Among the many methods for giving colour to

gold at the earliest period for commercial purposes
, ,

was the following which was decidedly the original

,

wet process introduced into E ngland from France

,
.

Th e work should be annealed on a clear fi r e ,

boi led out in aquafortis pickle and s uspended i n ,

bunches upon fi n e silver or platin um w i re ; a quan

'
tity of boiling water shoul d be provided before
commencing the operation Wh en this is done .
,

take
Nitrate of p otassa
C om m on salt

Al um

R educethe above ingredients to a fin e powder in

a mortar and well mix them together ; then place
,

the mixture in a good sized pipkin or crucible to

-
,

w hich add suffi cient hot water until it has the

con s istency Of a thick paste ; it should be heated

c op p er is greater than that of silver this sh ou ld ,

e specially be the case when the above mixtu r e is

,

employed .

When the operation is completed the surfa c e Of ,

the work will be perfectly uniform though du l l but , ,

it may be m ade brilliant by burnishing or s cra tch

ing Previous to every dip the work shou l d be
.

well rinsed in fresh boiling water and at the ,

conclusion it should be swi lled in t h e s ame

manner and dried in boxwood sawdust S cratch
,
.

ing coloured work is a delicate operation and ,

requires care It is done by the application of a

.

fine brass wire brush and a solution Of weak ale .

L arge plain surfaces shoul d be very carefully

scratched but never crossways ; if this is allowed
,

to be done little marks w ill be visible an d the

, ,

beauty of workmanship and fi nish considerably

i m paire d This method should not b e employed
.

for a lower standard than 1 6 C arats Te n ounces

-
.

O f solid work with plain surfaces and fi v e ounc es ,

O f hollow can be e ffectually coloured in the above

,

mixture Th e average loss in this process Will

.

exceed one pennyweight p er ounce .

L on don P roc e s s of W et -
C olou ri n g .

al loys O f not le s s than 1 5 carats in quality

G old
may be made to assume the appearance Of very
 L OND ON PR OC E S S . 1 65

fin e go ld of a beautifu l straw colour by b oiling in ,

th e fo l lowing preparation for a short time T ake .

Nitrate of p otas sa

C om m on salt

Alum
Sp iri ts of salts

30 oz s .

R educe th e above salts as in the preceding ca s e

to a fine powder ; then take a large blackl e a d
c o l o ur pot about eight inches high and seven inch e s
-
,

across the top No 1 6 size Of D oul ton s make ; put

,
.
’

a bout two spoon ful s of water at the bott om ; then

a d d the sa ltpetre alum and salt ; p l ace on the fire
, ,

a n d very slowly dissolve and boi l up stirring w e l l ,

w ith a wooden spoon Take the work which has

.
,

been well prepared by annealing and boiling out

in a quafortis pickle and suspended upon fin e
,

p l atinum wire ; put it into the mixture for fiv e

minutes and at the expiration Of that time wi th
,

draw and rinse wel l in C lean boiling water th e n ,

add the spirits of salts to the mixture in the pot ;

when it again boils up put the work in for four ,

minutes longer and again rinse in fresh boiling

,

water Now add one sp oon fiIl Of water to the

.

mixt ure and when it boils up again put in the

,

work for three minutes and again rinse Next , .

l 66 WE T-
C OL OURING .

add two spoonfuls of water to the mixtur e in t h e

pot ; when it boils put the work in for t w o
m inutes and again rinse
, L astly thin t h e c o l our
.
,

with about three spoonfuls of water and whe n i t ,

b oils up again put in the work for one m i n ute

,

longer well rinse in plenty Of C lean boiling wa te r ;

,

t he work is then done and of a b eautiful co l o ur

, .

F inish as usual .

This p rocess is recommended when it is re qu ired

that the colour shoul d wear we ll ; it will also p ro
duce a beautiful colour if properly attended to and ,

these instructions are carefully carried out It .

was re g ularly practised in L ondon by most gold

smiths for a number of years with great success .

It shoul d not however b e used for a l ower standard

, ,

of go l d than 1 5 carats The proportions given w ill

.

colour ten ounces of sol id gold C hains and about ,

five ounces of j ew eller s work which latter is

’

generally of a bulky nature having large surfaces .

Th e solder used upon the work must be very go od

to be nicely coloured by this process S ome gold .

smiths have strongly recommen ded the employ

ment of common salts for p lu n gi ng the work i n to ,

after the l ast dip in colouring as a means of n eu

,

t ra li s in g the effects of any acid likely to be retain ed

upon the articles O thers have advised the use of

.

soda and potash solutions as substitutes for ale in ,

I 68 WE T -
C O L O UR ING .

a pplication of the process to qualities inferior t o

those already named ; and it was found that by th
addition of small quantities of spirits Of salts to th e
ingredients already i n use it was possible to adapt
it ; and in attempting this experi m ent B irmingha m
was not b ackward for it was one of the first tow n s
,

which successfully accomplished it O f the follow .

in g ingredients take

Nitra te of p otassa
C om m on salt

Alum
S p iri ts of salts

Pound them all fine and mix well together ; then

take a blacklead co l our pot ab out eight inche s
-

high and seven inches across the mouth and put ,

the m ixture ( acid excepted) into it which must ,

dissolve very gradually It should on no account

.

be hurried or forced for if it burns the co lour will

,

be spoiled and consequently unfit for the work

, .

A s the heat increases the whole wil l begin to dis

solve ; then stir well with a wooden spoon and , ,

when the colour boils up add the spirits of salts

,

( muriatic acid ),
when the mixture wil l sink ; stir it
again when it wil l soon boil up Immediately
,
.

take the work which has been properly prepared

for the purpose and fastened in b unches with fi n e
,
 BIR M INGH AM PR OC E S S . 69

s i lver or pl atinum wire and immerse it in the

,

c o lour for four minutes keeping it well on the

,

m ove all the time so that all parts may b e acted

,

u p on a l ike ; this must be done in such a manner as

t o prev ent scratche s and m arks by its touching ,

th e bo ttom or sides of the pot At the end of the.

above time take out the work and rinse it well in

,

quite C lean boil ing water of which a C Op ious supply

,

sh o uld be provided Next p lace it in the colour for

.

a m inute and a half ; remove it again and rinse ,

we ll in fresh hot water Now add two ounces of

.

hot water to the preparati on in the pot when it ,

wil l sink but soon rise again Wh en this takes .

place put in the work for on e minute ; it must then

b e withdrawn and rinsed in fresh hot water It
, .

will by this time begin to show the right colour ,

if all things have gone on properly L astly dip .

,

th e work in th e mixture again for half a minute

longer fi nally rinsing for th e last time in two

,

vessels of fl esh hot water and then it should

’

possess a ve ry beautiful colour .

This colouring mixture should be used in pro

portion to the amount of surface the articles pre
sent to its action Th e proportions given will be
.

amply s ufi cien t to colour effectually ten ounces

of gold C hains with plain surfaces or five ounces of ,

jewell er s work ; and if skilfully m anaged during

’

I
I7 0 WE T -
C OL OU R ING .

the operation it will never prove a failure T his

, .

method w il l colour gold alloys very richly and

evenly if not below 1 4 carats ; it may therefore be
,

used advantageously to such as are not inferior t o

this quality The average loss in taking all kinds
.

of work wil l be about one pennyweight for every

ounce submitted to its action .

Nevertheless in wet colouring it sometimes hap

-

pens even under the most skilful management

, ,

that the co lour burns which gives the work a d ead

,

brown appearance ; if also the colour pot has not -

been properly cleansed after a previous O peration

this effect wil l also be produced ; so that in this
process everyt hing should be kept q uite clean and
free from grease or iron of any kind as these are ,

most inj urious to the production of the fine rich ,

results which are sought for .

P r e p a rin g t h e W ork .

There are several methods as we have already ,

remarked of preparing the work for wet colourin g ;

,
-

each operator adopting the on e which suits h i m

best and appears to claim an advantage over the
,

others We do not intend to assert that there i s

.

a n y particu lar advantage likely to accrue from t h e

a doption of any particular process in the prepara

tion Of the work The main principles are thoroug h
.
,
1 7 z WE T C OL OURING .

this appea rs dry or n early so when put into the ,

pot add one ounc e of acid and one ounc e of

,

water ; if tolerabl y liquid make no addition ,

whatever for in some instances and especially

, , ,

where the all oys contain a great proportion of

copper the weaker the preparation the better
,

and brighter is the colour produced upon the

work .

F ini s hin g t h e W ork .

After the process of

wet co louring it is a bs o -

lut ely necessary that the work should g o through

another operation that Of scratching ; which
,

consists of submitting it to the revolv ing action

of a circular brush of fine brass wire mounted ,

upon a lathe after the manner of the round hair

,

brushes used in polishing and upon which a solu ,

tion of weak ale is allowed to run from a small

barre l with a tap to it This removes any dull .

colour that may be upon the work and gives it ,

a perfectly bright a n d uniform surface F rosting is .

effect ed by keeping the points of the wires of the

brush quite straight and runni n g the lathe very
,

fast just letting the ends touch the surface of the

,

work ; to do this accurately requires great practice .

After this p rocess has been pe rformed the work ,

m u s t be well rinsed in either hot or cold water

,
 GE R M AN PR O C E S S . 1 73

and finally dried in warm boxwood sawdust which ,

must not be allowed to burn or char in any way :

i f so the colour of the work will be much damaged ,

and part of the beauty destroyed A soft brush will

.

remove all traces of sawdust from the interstices

of the articles which have pas s ed through this

operation .

G e rm a n P roc e s s of W et -
C ol ourin g .

The G e rman process of colouring gold articles

can be applied to that metal of a still inferior
standard ; and if carefully operated upon even ,

1 2 carat gold may be made to assume a beauti

-

ful rich yellow possessing all the appearance

,

of fi n e gold by immersion in the following

,

chemical preparation until the desired colour has

been O btained It consists in some cases of a
.

reduction of the salts usually employed the ,

abolition Of the alum altogether whilst a double ,

proport ion of spirits of salts ( muriatic acid ) is

added to supply the place A very good mixture
.
,

to which we have j ust referred is prepared as ,

follows on e which is esp ecially recommended for

,

large work Take.

Ni trate of p otassa
C om m on salt

M uriati c acid
1 74 WE T
-
C OL O UR ING . .

R educe the above salts to a fine powder in a

mortar keeping them perfectly clean all the ti m e ;
,

well mix them together ; then take a blackle a d

colour pot about seven inches high and six inch e s
-

across the top place it on the fi re and well dry

,

when this i s done put into i t the colouring salts -

,

stirring them well with a wooden spoon ; wh e n

thoroughly dried fi n e and hot add the muriatic ,

acid ( spirits of salts ); the colour will then so o n

boil up Now take the work which has b een pre
.

v i ou s ly prepared quite cle an and free from grease ,

and al s o suspended upon fin e s ilver or platinum

wire and place it in the preparation for three
,

minutes keeping it slightly on the move during

,

this period when it must be withdraw n and

,

instantly plunged into a vessel of clean boiling

water, and then into a second vessel of the same .

Next add two ounces Of hot water to the colour ,

and when it boils up again place the work in the

,

mixture for one minute longer ; rinse in fresh boil

ing water as before stated It will then be done .
,

and O f a fine colour i f all things have been care

fully attended to ; dry in clean boxwood sawdust
as usual The work must be well and carefully
.

scratched in weak ale which liquid is perhaps ,

the best for all practical purposes or burnished ,

with a proper burnishing chain if desired ; w e -

I76 WE T -
C OL OUR ING
.

silver than has been recommended for the oth ers

O f which we have treated ; b ecause by this process

a clean deep and smooth colour cannot be p ro

, ,

duce d under a n y other circumstances The w ork .

would otherwise be fro sted or sweated ; a n d a

very inferior colour would be the result if th es e ,

or similar instructions were not carried out .

It is well to avoid as much as possible the intro

duction of wet articles into the colour withou t
previously shaking the surplus water from them .

Neither should the colour be thinned until th e

articles submitted to its action begin to show in
an unmistakab le manner the appearance of gold ;
'

for if this should be done they are sure to come

,

from the colour pot in a very rough state

-
This .

appearance of the work in the G erman proc e s s

has successively baflled the skill and ingenuity of
‘

several gold colourers of the O ld school in this

-

country ; and we have Often smil ed at the argu

ments in favour of the addition of water when the
co lour of the work could not be properly effected
in the given time but came out black which was
, ,

probably due to the weakn ess of the acid employed ,

as it is liable to lose its strength if the mouth of

the bottle be not s uffi ciently secured Th e addition.

of water at such a time as this would Certainly be

fatal to the exc ellence of the finish ; the proper

 F R OSTING THE WOR K . 1 77

remedy would be an increase of muriatic acid to

the co l ouring mixture an extra dip into which
,

would soon produce the desired colour This should .

a lways b e done before the weakening or water i ng

process commences .

A rticl es of the commoner qualities to be efle c

'

t ually tr eated by this process must not under ,

any c onsiderations whatever ( as we have pre

v i ous ly remarked ) contain too much C opper ; for

this is the cause of many fai lures Under other .

circumstances where a large proportion of copper

,

is e mployed this weakening process seems to

,

facilitate the Object to be achieved ; and where

a much smaller proportion of muriatic acid is
mixed with the other ingredients its addition is
both practicable and advantageous By the a ddi .

tion of water to the German mixture before

the co lour has been brought up upon a s econd ,

immersion of the work a violent attack is made

upon it which instead of producing colour acts
, , ,

as a solvent on the metals ; and so powerful is this ,

that a few minutes immersion would result if the

’

articles were thin in their utter destruction

, .

In concluding our Observations on gold colourin g -

we have simply to remark that the whole process is

nothing l ess than an abstraction of the baser al l oy
from the surface which leaves the gold b ehind with
,

I 3
1 7 8 WE T -
C OL OURING .

'

a full rich colour ; its efle ct b eing to add rich n es s

,

to th e colour given to the surface of gol d articles

of inferior standards and being nearly p e rfe c t in
,

its resemb lanc e to fine gold itself .

L a p p i ng .

This is a distinct process of finishing jewellery

work It is not much resorted to in coloured work
.
,

and when it is emp loyed it is sometimes perform e d ,

before the articl es are coloured and sometim e s ,

after according to choice It is distinguished from

,
.

scratching by the evenness of surfac e and the

, ,

lustre it leaves upon the parts to which it has been

,

applied ; and this can be ascertained by an ex a m i

nation Of the work aft er this operation It is prin .

c ip a lly confi ned to bright gold chains and ear

rings a class of j ewellery to which its adaptation
,

is most suitable as it enhances the beauty of their

,

appearance very much The l apper produces the .

plain and diamond shaped surfaces by the rotary

-

action of the lapidary s wheel which consists of a ’

specially prepared composition disc secured in a

-
,

lathe vertically upon a hori z ontal spindle This .

ha s a shoulder in the middle against which the ,

disc of metal is firmly held by a nut and screw

fro m the other side This lap or dis c weighs about
.

fiv e pounds and is made of a mixture of tw o

,
I8 0 WE T -
C OL O URING .

gilding whilst under the manipulative skill of the

gol d cutter This gum or cement is solub le in hot
-
.

water ; consequently in washing out it parts from

, ,

the gold and l eaves a colour upon the work Th e

, .

lapping process is a curious one and it is t rul y ,

marvellous to see the ski lful and practised workm a n

turning the links of gold chains between his thumb
and fi nger with great dexterity and accuracy ; and
while to all appearance it seems as if they are being
presented in a haphazard fashion to the lap the ,

most perfect shaped diamonds are being produced

-
.

This is called faceting .

S quare lapping is now extensively practised ; it

-

adds a sharpness and lustre to the work not

equalled by any other means Th e gold taken .

from articles during the process of lapping remai n s

—the greater portion of it at least— upon the lap , .

Th e emery cuts an d retains the gold upon it ; this ,

howev er is prevented from interfering with the

,

process by wiping the side of the lap with a tow

,

of cotton waste damped with O i l

, This cotton w aste .

must be strictly preserved and subjected to a special

,

m ode of treatment for the recovery of the metal .

 PI E R

C oll e ctin g an d Re fi nin g W as te G ol d .

IN wet col ouring the waste water in which the

-
,

work has b een rinsed as well as the exhausted

,

co louring salts, shou l d be carefully preserv ed b y

-
,

pouring them into a large stoneware j a r kept for

the purpose as th ey all contain gol d ; and with
,

out such precautions where a large m anufacturing

,

trade is b eing done the l oss in th e course of a

,

year wou ld be very great All th e gold can be

.

recovered from th ese waste waters by a very simple

an d at the same time effective process entai ling ,

l ittle or no expense, such as the following method .

Take

Proto-sulphate of iron
B oilin g water about

Mix togeth er and wh en the sa lt is all dissolved

,

add it to the solution in th e jar and stir it well ;

,

the gold will th en begin to precip itate ; this must

1 82 TR E ATME NT OF JE WE L L E R S ’
C OL OUR WATE R .

be repeated each time after colouring and as t h e ,

j a r b ecomes ful l a little more proto su lp hate of iron -

( copperas ) must b e added and the contents

,
'
well
stirred If this produces no efle ct upon the solu
.

ti on the gold h as all been precipitated It shoul d

,
.

then be allowed to settle when the supernatan t

,

water may b e decanted or poured away ; but care

sho uld be taken not to disturb the precipitat e ,

which consists of a dark spongy mass at the botto m .

The sediment must then be well washed several

times wi th hot water to free it from the acid ;
thoroughly dried in an iron pan or l adle and afte r ,

wards mel ted with a quantity of dry carb on ate of

potash and common salt with a proportionate p a rt
,

of common b ott l e glass in a crucib l e

,
The i n gre .

di en t s may b e prepared as follows Take .

Prepared sedim en t
C arbon ate of p otash
C om m on salt
C om m on bottle glass

I6 oz s.

R educe al l the ingredients to a fine powder ,

and well mix th em toggfher ; great heat will be

required in the fusion of t 3 m ixture in order to ,

effect the complete reduction of the gold ; to assist

which a small portion of saltpetre may be O cca
,

s i on a lly added to the contents in the pot ; but

1 84 TR E A TME NT O F JE WE L L E R S
’
L E MEL .

qual ity of the alloy are detached Waste there .

fore is one of the chief features to b e seriously

considered and avoided in every j ewellery esta
blishm en t .

To b egin we shall say a word or t w o about

,

the economy Of j eweller s lem el which consists ’

of the very small particles of gold dust r e

moved from the various articles under proces s of
manufacture by means of the file t urning t o ol , ,
‘

graver &c It is almost impossible to keep this

,
.

lemel or gold dust free from organic matter and

-

impurity ; and the consequence of this is fully

apparent in the loss occasioned in its collection ,

although it is always done separately and with

care .

Workmen have the gold weighed out to them ,

each one being responsible for his own portion ;

and the Operatives employed in its manufacture
have to account for and w eigh up to withi n a
,

grain Of the qu a ntity given out to them ; always

,

deducting therefrom the usual allowance for waste

or loss in w orking which commonly amounts t o
,

six grains to the ounce in the making department

, .

This allowance constitutes or forms another kind

O f wast e of which we intend to speak hereafter
,
.

F or the scrap dust and re fuse O f every kind is

, , ,

carefully swept up from the floor Of the work

 R E SPONSIBILITIE S O F WOR KM E N . 1 85

shop twice a day sifted and well searched for

,

the purpose of detecti n g any small portions of

gold which may b e v i sible to the naked eye .

When this is done the refuse which remains is

,

scrupulously taken care Of and sold to the refiner

w ho will give the most for it .

L emel is subjected to various kinds Of treatment

in the different workshops of this count ry every ,

one claiming to employ the best method for its

recovery There is however a great deal yet to
.
, ,

be learnt before the economical processes ( as we

call them )belonging to the j ewellers trade have ’

attained perfection at least so far as some houses ,

are concerned In some establishments the work

.

men are allowed to w eigh in their lemel in a -

most dirty state that is containing a consider

, ,

able a mount Of organic matter ; the usual allow

ance for loss in working b eing granted it operates ,

injuriously against the economy of the business

a rrangements S uch conditions are certainly in
.

favour of the workmen but they encourage a ten

,

den cy to exercise less care than is right for the

property and welfare of their employers .

There are however better m ethods than these

, , ,

which may be put into Operatio n without i n

convenience and should commence in the fir st
,

instance with the workmen B y the adoptio n .

1 86 TRE A TM E NT O F JEWE L L E R S ’
L E ME L .

of the following plan the operation co m monly

,

attendant upon the employer or his manager ( such

as sifting and examining the lemel for the de te c
tion Of iron and steel filings organic matter &c ) , , .

should be performed by the workmen before

weighing it into the warehouse where their r e ,

sponsibility ceases Thi s may be very si m ply

.

performed by providing an iron ladle and the ,

lemel should then be treated as follows — S ift it

well through a fine sieve to separate th e small
portions of gold from the dust letting the lemel ,

fall on to a clean sheet of paper provided for the

purpose ; this should then be carefully put into
the iron ladle and heated until all the organic
,

matter is entirely destroyed When the burnt .

lemel has s ufli ci en tly cooled put the magn et ,

through it in order to collect and remove what

ever iron or steel filings may be contained therein .

This should be a part of the responsible duties

of each workma n and ought to be strictly e n
,

forced .The scrap should be always separated

from the lemel It s treatment has been already
.

spoken Of .

There are two methods in use for the c ol l ec

tion Of the lemel ; the fi rst is performed in the
following manner Take .
 TR E ATME NT OF W
’
1 88 JE E L L E R S L E M E L .

evil consequences will result The button of gold .

,

which will consist of an alloy Of gold silver and , ,

C opper may again be melted with a little potas h

, ,

borax or charcoal as flux and poured into a n

, ,

ingot mould ; it may then again be worke d u p if

-
,

Of proper quality after assay (there is no advantage

in this ) or granulated and refined as m a y be

,

desired .

Th e reducing or collecting salts shoul d be

,

used in proportion to the lemel sought t o be

recovered and in about the quantities w e have
,

given We have used sal en ix on instead O f the

.
-

saltpetre as the refining agent and prefer it for ,

many reasons ; fi rst it is considerably cheaper

,

—
and answers quite as well perhaps better ; and ,

i n the second place it keeps the flux and l e mel

,

towards the bottom of the c rucible w hich the ,

saltpetre does not .

A nother good pla n and one which has fo und ,

great favour with s ome manufacturers is to put ,

the lemel in an ordi n ary melting pot with a very -

,

little flux such as c arbonate of potash or soda ;

,

and when it is well melted the crucible must be

withdrawn a n d the contents poured into a cast
ing mould The lemel bar may at once be sent
-
.

to the re finers for sale or may be exchanged for ,

new gold B y adopting thi s plan goldsmiths are

.
 BAD WORKAB L E GOL D . 1 89

n ot subj ected to so much loss through having

h a d an indifferent working gold as no lemel will ,

be i n these b ars L emel is the principal cause of

.

ba d gold the unworkable qualities of which are to

,

be adjudged more from the presenc e of this than ,

an
y other reason .

Re c ov e rin g Je w e ll e rs ’
W ast e .

Th e sediment which accumul ates in the scratch

b ru s h and polish in g b oxes lappers cotton waste
-
,
’

an d all other wast e of a similar description should ,

b e c arefu lly collecte d and thoroughly burnt in a

cl osed iron pan or other suitab le vessel This
, .

process w ill considerably reduce the bulk of it ,

and also destroy any organic matter th at may b e

present The b urni n g must be cautiously eflecte d
’

.
,

to prevent the light particles Of gol d from going

with the draugh t up the chimney ; and for this same
reason it is advisabl e to employ for such purposes
,

a strong iron pan with a lid to it Wh en th e .

a —
burning has been carried f r enough which with ,

a steady fire wil l occupy a who le night for each

,

panful of waste refuse &c and the operation is

, ,
.
-

finally completed the remaining ash must be put

,

through a fi n e sieve ; the refuse which rema ins in

the sieve should b e p ounded a n d again sifted when , ,
1 90 R E C OVE RING JE WE L L E R S WASTE
’
.

the waste is wha t is call ed good, and is the n ready

for the r efin er s test
’
.

If it i s des ired to collect th e gol d from t h e above

( and sometimes such is the case ) the fo ll o w i ng ,

plan sh ould b e resorted to Take .

P olishin gs , &c .

C arbon a te of p otash .

C om m on salt
S aLenixon

I5 oz s .

The above sal ts should b e reduced to pow der ,

and well mixed with the polishings in the propor ,

tion stated The substance to b e operated u pon

.

in this case being of a much drier and lighter

nature than l emel a greater proportion of s a lts is
,

necessary i n order to bring down the gold into a

,

button After being carefully prepared place the

.
,

mixture in a crucible called in the trade a skittle

,
“

pot ( from its resemblance to a skittle) and treat ,

as has been recommended for col lecti n g lemel only ,

— '

with this difleren ce as the mixture sinks towards

the bottom of the pot in this process more of the ,

m ixture Of polishings m ust be added from time

to time until the crucible has received as much

,

as it will conveniently hold Wh en perfectly fused .

a very fe w crystals of saltpetre must b e added occa

1 92 RE C OV E RING JEWE L L E R S WASTE
’
.

made ( the quantity required for that purpose b e ing

two ounces )i n the same manner as for floor s we ep ; -

the ful l value is then sure to be realised .

S ome persons in the trade have stron g ly r e

commended mixi n g this class of waste w ith t he
ordinary floor sweep a system to which w e
-

strongly obj ect because this description of w a ste

,

is gen erally very rich in gold ; and it woul d be

a difli cult task to incorporate it properly with so
large a quantity as the ordin ary sweep usually
consists of so as to realise its utmost value H ence
, .

we say that a part of its value would be lost to

the manufact uring j ewe ll er and goldsmith ; and
we venture to say that we are not expressing idl e
or theoretical opinions for we have had consider
,

able experience and paid more than ordinary

,

attention to this poi n t with a view to economise

,

and reduce the waste to which j ewellers are

subjected We must therefore contend in the
.
, , ,

interests of the trade that there should be three

,

separate and distinct processes of treatment for

the recovery of gold from this waste refuse &c , , .

The fi rst should have reference to lappers cotton

’

waste and the sediment which accumulates in the

,

polishings and scratching boxes w ith a ll other

-
,

was te of a similar description .

Th e second should relate to the was h han d -

 SE PA R ATE ME TH O D S OF TRE ATME NT . 1 93

w a ters O ld pickling solutions spent colouring

, ,

m i x ture and rinsing waters (for we prefer these

,

g o i n g into the general waste water tub )-

together ,

w ith the washing and swilling waters e m ployed ,

i n the establi s hment for every purpose an d Of ,

e v e r y possible description .

T h e third should comprise the general sweep

th a t is the sweepings from the fl oors Of the different
,

w o rkshops in the manufactory the O ld worn out ,

-

crucibles the ashes and C inders from the various

,

fires employed and the dirt and refil se of every

,

conc e ivable kind which is at all worth preserv ing .

Th e dross from the fluxes employed in melting

shou l d be separately preserved This may agai n .

be p ut through the fire when a s ufii c i e n t quantity

has been collected and a compact little lump O f
,

gold will invariably be the result If preferred .

,

instead of troubling with the latter process it may ,

be sold to the refi ner separately The waste pro .

ducts of man ufacturing jewellers are usually

collected and treated in this manner quarterly or
half yearly
-
.

Re fi nin g L e m e l .

This branch of the art which is more chemical

,

than otherwise is not practised by gold workers

,
-

on a large scale for manufacturing or commer

,

ci e l purp oses ; neither would there b e any a dv an

1 94 R E FINING L E ME L .

tage by its adoption from a pecuniary po in t of

vie w for it would entail a conside rab le outlay of
,

capital for the apparatus which is indispensable

to the operation ; w ithout yielding any appreciable
re turn and would probably be only so much cap it al
,

unnecessari ly sunk in the business B esid es the .

,

refiner and assayer Whose special b usines s i t is

, ,

and who has every appliance at his co m m an d ,

can do it so much better and cheaper that m an u ,

fa c turers have for this reason al so never i n tro

, ,

duc e d it as a practical part of their trade .

To those unacquainted with the process of s ep a

rati ng gold from the other metal s w i th whic h it
might b e a lloyed the following information w ill
,

b e useful
Th e lemel must fi rst b e collected i n th e usu al
w ay according to the principles already laid
,

dow n ; To separate the alloy from the gold the ,

composition w ill have to be submitted to the

action of nitric acid ; but a s the all oy of gold
consist s probably of such proportions that the
nitric acid cannot effectually do its work (too great
a proportion Of gold resists the influence of nitric
acid) therefore it will be necessary to re melt the
,
-

b ar of l emel gold and to add to it if of 9 carat

, ,
-

quality one half of its weight of silver a little

,
-
,

p otash or charcoal bei n g used as a flux When .

I9 6 R E FINING L E ME L .

removal of the b aser alloys to p our the solution ,

of nitric acid containing the si lver copper & c

, , ,
.
,

into another vessel for subsequent treatm ent

, .

Fresh nitric acid S hould now be added to the

gold and heat applied in order to remove any ,

percentage of b ase alloy which would be the ,

means of making the gold brittle When the acid .

is found to have no ac tion of any kind upon the

gold it must b e again poured OE and the go ld
, ,

well washed with hot water to remove any tra ce ,

of alloy that may be discovered in its int e r

s t i ce s At this st a ge the gold is pure or at a ll
.
,

events s ufli cien tly pure for every practical p u r

pose re qu iring now only to be melt e d with bor a x
,

or potash .

U nless every particle of alloy is removed fro m

the gold it is very likely to be b rittle when it
,

comes to b e worked up again ; for that reason

‘

if for no other it is better to entr ust it to the

,

practical refiner for as we have already said it

, , ,

never pays the working jeweller to do it himse lf .

E ven refiners b est gold from the leme l bar ne ver

’

works up like the refined native gold .

G old co llected from the other waste material

of j ewell ers may b e treated in this m a nn e r i f p r e

ferr e d .
 JE WE L L E R S WA STE WATE R S
’
.
97

T o Re cov e r G old from t h e W a st e W a t e rs of

t he J ew e ll e r .

Th ere are various methods in operation among

j ewellers for the recovery of the gold from t heir
waste waters &c a few Of which we think it
,
.
,

necessa ry to describe .

Th e O ld plan of dealing with these w aste waters

was very unsatisfactory in a pecuniary sense It .

consisted m erely of a moderately sized tub for the -

collection of liquid substances of eve ry kind em

p loyed in the manufactory ; this tub was fitted with
a woode n tap about one third from the bottom ; -

precisely under this was placed a circular frame

w ork Of wood O f sieve like form with a rather
,
-
,

closely fabricated piece of felt or flannel attached

-

loosely to the ri m so constructed as to fo rm a

,

c avity in the centre for the collection of the l iquid ,

a s it issued slowly from the tap immediately above

it
. This after fi ltering through the above appa
,

ratus was allowed to run away no more notice

, ,

whatever being taken of it .

Now this liquid carried along with It a con

s i de ra ble portion of gold as we shall show pre ,

s en t l
y .But be fore doing so we desire first to ,

allude to improvements subsequently effected or ,

rather presumed i m provements ; Of which the fol

,
1 9 8 JE WE L L E R S WASTE WATE R S
’
.

lowing is one of several which found much favour

s ome years ago when j ewellers began to pay s ec ia l
, p
attention to the economy of their esta blishmen ts ,

with the view of reducing the working loss to t h e

lowest extent possible compatible with safe wo rk
,

ing This loss was considered excessi v e i n p ro

.
,

portion to the quantity of manufactured article s

produced out Of a given quantity of material and
a comparison of we ights showed such to have been
ac tually the case To economise therefore the fol
.
, ,

lowing method of treatment was strongly rec om

mended a t the time and was supposed to deal
,

effectually with the liquid substances used i n the

different stages of manufacture both chemical and ,

mechanical .

S everal large tubs were to be provided differing

in sizes and placed i n a row each succeeding one
, ,

to be smaller than the preceding In each of these .

t ubs taps were to be fi tted which could be turned

,

at any time F irst of all the water wo ul d have to

.

be conveyed by lead piping from the several work

,

shops connected with the manufactory into the ,

largest tub ; when this had become full the tap ,

could be turned on and all the surplus water

carried over into the next and so on until the las t
, ,

in the row was reached ; and in this a piping in ,

place of the tap must be firmly secured to convey ,

2 00 JE WE L LE R S WA STE WATE R S
’
.

B ut the best method of a ll for collecting the gold

from these waters is to provide three large t u bs of
,

di fferent sizes placing them in a row ; int o the

,

largest or fi rst t ub is put the exhausted pickling

solutions the water in which the workpeople have
,

washed their hands that in which the work has

,

been wa shed out the exhausted colouring salts and

,
-

rinsings and the swilling waters of eve ry de s c rip

,

tion Into this tub is fitted a tap level with the

.

top of the secon d a n d one in the second level with

,

the top of the third t o allow the liquid to ru n

,

from one to the other i n rotation A quantity o f .

proto sulphate of iron ( green copperas)is di ssolve d

-

in boiling water and added occasionally to each of

the three tubs more especially the largest which i s
, ,

the fi n a l receptacle for all the used up liquids -

.

Th e proto sulphate Of iron precipitates the di s

-

solved gold held in solution to a metallic state ,

and so puri fies and clears it that by the time it ,

leaves the last tub every particle of gold will hav e

become precipitated and the water appear per
,

fe c tly clear ; so clear i n fact tha t it canno t be

disting uished from clean spring water .

Th e sediment at the bottom of the tubs after the ,

clear water has been withdrawn from them (which

is best done with a syphon ) may be well mixed ,

:
w ith deal sawdust in or deI to dry up the remaining
 P R E C IPITA TING GOL D . 20 I

liquid and after w ards well burnt and sifted as

,

fin e as possib le Instead of taps ( which are liable

.

to become corroded or destroyed )being employed

for the conveyance of the water into the various
tu bs stout glass syphons may be successfully used
, ,

and are more econom ical the different chemical ,

agents in the liquid having no action on them ,

w hile they have upon the others It is a very .

g ood plan when these syphons are used to allow

the water to run as it leaves the last tub upon a
, ,

filter placed on a cane bottomed s ieve ; the very

-

c le ar est water then only can run away B y such a .

m ethod the sediment in the tubs is in no danger of

being disturbed It may instead of being mixed

.
,

with the sawdust be placed on several of these

,

filters and the moisture being gra dua lly with

,

drawn the substance remains well dried and can

, ,

aft erwards be reduced to powder .

If the proto s ulphate of iron be added judiciously

-

and a t the proper times such precautions as s ubs e

,

quent fi ltering &c will not be necessary ; for every

, .
,

particle of gold will be precipitated i n a manner so

truly effective that no further attention will be
,

required We have had several trials made by

.

refi ners and assayers of the waste waters after the

, ,

above C hemical has been added and their i n v e s ,

t i g a t i on s have always resulted in n ot a particle of

K 3
 W S WE E P
’
202 JE L E L E R S .

gold visible to the naked eye being fou n d in the

samples .

Th e gold may be collected into a button by t he

means which have been already described using ,

san diver as one Of the principal refi ning agents ;

it does not however pay and it would be far better
, , ,

to abandon any attempt at it It may be put into .

the ordi nary floor sweep if preferred or kept sepa

-
,

rate and a trial made by the refiners ; the latter

plan is much the better one where a large manu ,

fa ct uri n g trade is being done .

O xalic acid will al s o precipitate gold from its

solution but it is considerably dearer than the
,

salt of i ron we have recommended ; but if it be

desired to precipitate it without the addition of
another metal then this acid may be used with
,

advantage .

J ew e ll e rs ’
S w eep .

J ewel l ers sweep constitutes the whole f h

’
o t e

sweepings from the floors of the workshops in th e

manufactory which should in a well regulated pl a c e
,
-

be swept twice a day a n d the refuse preserv e d

,

and carefully sorted every morning with the vi e w

of gathering up the small particles of gold v isibl e

to the naked eye which have been dropped duri n g

,

the work of the day After this ha s been done a n d

.
,
 C H APTE R XIII .

T a bl e s of S p e c i fi c G ra v iti e s , Allo y s, &c .

TH E specific gravities of the various metal s and

their alloys as given in this work have all been
, ,

calculated arithmetically Perhaps the more cor .

rect method would be to do so by means of the,

hydrostatic balance This consists of an ordinary

.

balance of which the pans are suspended by

,

s trings of unequal length Th e Shorter pan has .

a hook attached to its under side to which the ,

s ubstance should be suspended by a hair or fi la

ment of silk In ascertaining the specific gravity
.

of any material by these means it is necessary to ,

fi n d out first its weight when weighed in air and, ,

secondly to learn how much that weight is reduced

by weighing in water The second weight thus
.

O btained is deducted from the first and then the ,

specific gravity required is at once obtained by

d i v id i n g the first weight or weight in air by this
, ,

diffe re n ce . To conduct this operation with nicety

r e u ire s great care and a very delicate balance
q ,
 S PE C IF IC G R AV IT Y OF A S OV E RE IGN . 205

must be employed in the test in order to arrive ,

at strictly accurate results Th e water in such .

cases is commonly preferred at a temperature of

60 F ahr Th e following example will render our
°
.

mean ing tolerably cl ear and convey a better idea

,

o f the process Presuming that the substance

.

question is a sovereign it would be represented as

,

follows

A sov erei gn weighs 12 grain s in air.

A sov erei gn w ei ghs I grains in w ater .

1 16 67
-

66 0

Th e specific gravity therefore of a sovereign ,

which consists of 2 2 carat gold is -

and ,

closely approximates to our calculated tabl es .

The s p ecific gravity of bodies may be conveniently

ascertain ed by either of th ese me a n s .
206 C OL OURE D G O L D AL L OYS

D i ffe re n t Q ua re du ce d t o v ari ous

lit i e s of G old
S t a nda rd s s o a s t o s ui t t h e s e v e ra l C O L O U R
,

ING P RO C E S S E S m e ntion e d und e rn eat h .

C omposition of a S overeign .

F in e gold, p er oz .

R efin ed cop per

22 -
carat re duced to 1 8 -
carat cost
, 6d p e r
. oz .

oz . dwts .
gm .
4 s ov erei gn s I o 12

F ine silv er o z 0

S wedi sh copper o 2 12

I 5 0

S uitable for the dry -colourin g process .

1 8 -
carat reduced to 1 6
-
carat cost
, 5 8 s . per oz .

oz . dw ts .
grs .

1 8 -carat s crap I o 0

Fin e silv er O 0 5
S w edi sh copper o z 7

S uitable for the Fren ch colourin g p rocess .

208 C O L O UR E D GO L D AL L OYS .

1 carat reduced to
8 -
Iz i-
carat , co s t 45 s . 6d .

per oz .

I8 -cara t s crap

F in e silver
S wedish copp er

I 9

C an be coloured by the G erm an process on ly .

2 2 - c a f at reduce d to 1 6 -
c arat cost
, 5 8 1 . per o z .

oz . dwts .
g rs .

4 sov ereign s I O 12

F in e silv er 0 2 6
S wedish copp er o 5 6

S uitable for the French colourin g p rocess .

1 6 - carat reduced to 15 -
carat cost , 541 . 6d . per 02 .

oz . dw ts .
g rs .

Ib- cara t scrap I o 0

F in e silv er 0 O 12

Sw edis h copp er O o 2I

S ui table for the L on don colourin g p rocess

 C OL O URE D GO L D AL L OYS . 2 09

1 6-
carat reduced to 1 4
-
carat cost
, s 1 s . per oz .

02 . dwt s .
grs .

1 6 -carat scrap I o 0

Fin e silv er 0 o 2 1

S wedish copp er 0 2 3
I

I 3 o

S uitable for the B irm in gham colourin g p rocess .

16 -
carat reduced to 13 -
carat cost
, 47 s . 6d . per oz .

oz . dwts .
grs .

I6-carat scrap I 0 0

Fin e silv er 0 I 3
Swedish cop p er 0 3 12

I 4 15

Suitable for the Germ an colourin g p roce ss .

I6 - —
carat reduced to Iz g carat , cost 45 s . 6d.

per oz .

1 6-carat scrap

F in e silv er
S wedish copp er

1 5 18

C an be coloured by the Germ an p rocess on ly .

2 IO C OL OURE D G OL D AL L OYS .

22 - car at reduced to 1 5
-
carat co s t
, 54s . 6d . per oz .

4 sov erei gns

F in e silv er
S wedi sh cop p er

S ui b
ta l e for the L on don colourin gprocess .

1 5
- carat reduce d t o I4 -
cara t , o t
c s 5 1 s .
per o z .

I5-carat scrap

Fin e silv er
S wedish copp er

S uitable for the B irm in gham colourin g p roc ess .

carat reduce d to I3 -
carat cost 47 1 6d p er oz .

5
.
1
.
-
,

Is-carat scrap

F in e silv er
S w edish cop p er

I 3

S uitable for the G erm an colourin g proc ess .

2 12 C OL O UR E D G OL D AL L OYS .

1 carat reduced to
4 -
Iz l-
carat , cost 45 1 . 6d.

per oz .

I4- c arat scrap

Fin e silv er
S wedish cop p er

C an be coloured by the G erm an p rocess on ly .

22- carat reduced to 13-

carat cost, 47 .
3 6d . per 02 .

oz . dw ts g rs
. .

4 sov erei gn s 1 o 12

F in e silv er o 4 12

S wedish copp er o 9 12

1 14 12

S ui table for the Germ an colouri n g p roc ess .

3
1 carat reduced
-
to Iz écarat
-
, cost 45 11 . 6d .

per oz .

1 3-carat scrap

F in e silv er
Sw edish cop p er

C an be coloured by the Germ an proc ess on ly .

 C OL O URE D G OL D AL L OYS . 2 13

Wet coloured sold r

-
e from 1 3
-
c a rat gold .

1 4 0

C olours w ell bv th e Germ an p roc ess .

TABL E S H OWING T H E C H IE F PL AC E S FO R T H E M ANUFACTURE

OF J E WE LL E RY IN T H E D IFFE R E NT PART S O F T H E WO RL D .

C o un t ries . Prin c ip al C ities or Town s .

L on don an d B irm in gham .

P aris , L y on s, B ordeaux, an d R ouen .

F ran kfort, Pforz hei m , an d C arlsruhe .

P rague , V ien n a , an d H un gary .

Ne wark , Phil adelphia, an d Providen ce .

M elbourn e an d S y dn ey .
2 14 TAB L E S O F AL L OYS .

RE D UC ING STAND ARD GOLD To VARIOUS Q UAL ITIE S .

T ABL E FO R M IXING .

Q ua lities . Sta n da rd G old .

cara ts .

RE D UC ING FINE G OLD T o V ARIO US

Q UALIT IE S .

TAB L E FO R M IXING .

Q ua l it ies. Fin e G old .

c ara ts . 24 p arts .
2 16 TABL E S O F AL L OY F OR PAR TING, E TC .

TABLE SH OWING TH E AM O UNT O F SIL VE R To B E ADD E D To

T H E UND E RM E NT IONE D Q UAL ITIE S IN T H E RE FINING OF
G O LD AL LOYS .

Q ua li t ies .
Am 0 un t 0 f 8 0 ”
a lloy .
S il ve r to be a dde d.

c arats .

TABL E SH OWING THE RE LAT IV E V AL UE OF D IFFE RE NT

Q UAL IT IE S .

Q ua l i ti es .

2 3- carat gold is w orth oun ce .

22

2 !
2 18 TAB L E S O F TH E D UTY ON G O L D , E TC .

TABL E O F TH E D UT Y ON G O LD AT 1 7 s PE R . oz .
, As
C H ARG ED AT T H E ASS AY O FFIC E .

s. d . oz s . s. d
.

T ABLE S H OWING TH E PROPORT IO N O F AL L OY To B E AD DED

T O WE T-C OL O URE D SC RAP, C ONTAINING 1 0 D WT S 1 2 GRS . .

O F FINE G OLD P E R oz , IN O RD E R T o M AKE TH E R E G UL AR

.

9
-
C ARAT Q U A L IT Y, C O NTAINING 7 D WTS O F F INE G OLD .

P E R oz .

20 '
x 12 6
20 x 8 4 z : 1 68 0

1 68 0 84
- -
2 52 0 0

8 40 8 4 10 dwts . of alloy .

20 x 12 1
43-
2 52
8-
20 X 85 0 “
1 68

2 52 1 68 84
84 Io dw ts . of alloy .

II 1 0 awts . 12 grs . 2 52 g ,
rs 7 dwts
20 x 2 52

20 x 1 68

5 1 0 40 31 360 1 1 6 80

1 68 10 dwts of alloy. .
 C H A PTE R X IV .

U s e ful H int s .
—L e m el .

KE E P all filings , dust, and turnings as free fr om

eme ry cloth
-
, and all other organic matte r , as

possible .

H and -
W a s h in g .

In the manufacture of goldsmiths work it sh o ul d ’

be a compulsory rule of the estab lishment wh ere it

is conducted that no one l eaves the place without
,

washing his hands at dinner time and at nigh t

,
-
.

G old -
C utt e r s .

It is a good plan to give to each lapper a b out

two ounces of cotton wast e daily and to see that it
'

is returned with the finished work every n ight at

the conclusion of the day s work A large box ’
.

should b e specially provided we ll lined with sheet ,

lead or z inc for its reception

, .

W ork p e op l e ’
s A p ron s .

Th e aprons and towels used by the workp eop l e

in a ll branches of the trade should be was hed at
,

the manufactory ; accommodation for which should

b e provided ; and the water so used carefully saved
for subsequent treatment by p ouring into the
,

general waste water tub B y adopting this method

-
.

a considerable quantity of gold oth erwise taken Off

the premises is recoverabl e in the course of a year
, ,

t he means b eing s im pl e a n d effec t ual .

S h o p F loors .

If the shop fl oors are wel l covered with sh eet

iron th e j oints soldered together and the edges
, ,

turned up round the ends and sides of the various

worksh ops it wi ll prevent any of th e gold from
,

finding its way into the woodwork of the flooring ,

and thus effect a great savi ng S heet zin c may be

.

em ployed inste a d of the iron if preferred but it is ,

more l iable to wear through To prevent this it

.

shoul d b e covered with p erforated iron gratings ;

the l atter also help to p revent a n y thing from b eing
-

carried out of the shops which is l ikely to adhere

t o the b ottoms of the b oots of the workpeop l e b y ,

r ubb ing it off and collecting it in the holes of t h e

gratings thus renderi ng its recovery certain C are

, .

must b e taken when sheet z inc is employed with

th e pickle so as not to spill it on the zinc floor or
, ,
222 U SE F UL H INTS .

it would soon be de stroyed A great saving is

.

effected by the application of a proc e ss like this ,

where gold is manufactured into commercial

wares .

T e s tin g G old .

A solution for testing whether an article is m ade

of gold or b ase metal may b e made as follow s

Well mix them together and keep ready for u se

in a stoppered gl as s b ottle In testing the p ur ity
.

of go ld b y means of this mixture it is s ufi c i e n t,

to merely touch the object with the stopper (which

should have a long dropper d ipping into the m ix
t ure )and C losely watch the action of the acid upon

the article in question If it produces no effect

.
,

which is the case w i th gold it does not always

,

prove that the article is genuine ; it may b e thickl y

gilt or plated with gold ; therefore to be sure
, , ,

where any doubt exists it is advisable to r ub a

,

fi le over some part of the surface and then apply ,

the acid to liza l pa r t ; if b ase metal the fraud will

at once be detected An y quality of gold above
.

9 carat we may safely say will stand this test

-
, , .
 A PPE ND IX .

Result s of E xp e ri m en t s an d R ese a r c h e s .

D et a i ls of M od e r n P r oc e s s e s .

In melting gold it has been recommended to

em ploy small lumps of C harcoal as flux There is .

n o po s sible advantage in such a method or manner

of treatment for the use of flux at all is to prevent

,

the molten metal from becoming oxidised on the

surfa ce which it does when heated in the presence
,

of a current of air Now the Object of employing

.

flux is not so much to assist in promoting the fusion

Of the component parts O f the several alloys as it is

to prevent the oxidation taking place hence we ,

repeat to prevent tonic/z efi ectu a lly the su rface of

,

the gold and alloy in the pot when it reaches the ,

m olten state at least must be absolutely secured

,

against currents of air and especially those which

,

are to be found in all j ewellers melting furnaces ; ’

and if such precautions are not regarded oxidatio n , ,

loss of metal and bad workable gold is the general

,

result Now wha t is oxidation ? It is the O pera

.
,

tion of converting any metallic substance into an

oxide and oxide in chemistry means a compoun d
,

of oxygen and a base and not being in an acid ,

state m a y be called metallic rust The oxygen .

b eing an electro negative element c onstituting the

-
,

v ita l part of the atmosphere attacks the copper ,

L 3
226 O XID ATION IN ME L TING .

first which is the weaker element of alloy and

, ,

brings it under its influence and so forms what is

,

called the ba se in conformity w ith chemical science .

To put it plainer we should say the action of the

,

air upon molten metal without a protective coating

destroys its homogeneousness Altogether w e do .

not wish to be understood to convey the meaning

that a slight oxidation of the surface of molten
gol d renders every part of the bar unworkable as ,

that to a great extent depends on the pouring of

the mass into the ingot mould If the oxide wh ich .
,

a ppears like a scum on the surface is prevented ,

from going into the ingot mould with the liquid

mass then the gold may be perfectly work able ;
,

but assuming this to be very generally th e case ,

a great loss of material has taken place a n d a ,

re m nant left behind which might as well have been

in the bar of gold and which would have been had
,

oxidation b een prevented at an earlier stage of the

.
—
process Wh en this oxide or nature destroyed -

—
gold runs into the ingot mould it either ap pears ,

upon the end of the bar of metal in a corrugated

mass or on the other hand it fo rms what to all
, , ,

appearance seems like little C ircular discs of n u

melted met a l the unmelted portion formin g semi
,

detached scales which subsequently roll into the

gold a n d destroy i ts smoothness and C learn ess .

Now a ll this m ay be prevented by using the purest

vegetable charcoal as flux and well stirring t h e
,

melted alloy before pouring The flux is b est added

.

on the verge of commencing fusion as oxidation ,

takes place very rapidly at this stage of the opera

tion of mel t i n g j ewel lers alloys unless a suitable
’

,
228 D E F E C T S IN ING O T M O UL D S .

grit getting between the parts w hich S hould m eet

securely togeth er so evenly In fact as to render
, , ,

the mould perfectl y air tight O ccasionally n ew

-
.

ingot moulds w a rp when heated The remedy in .

such cases would be a re grinding Of the su rfaces

-

w hich meet each other or other w ise a thick coating

,

of whiteni n g made into a paste with water and

applied to the parts which admit the air A gain .

,

when the i n got is not suffi ciently well heated ,

defects in the casting will also appear ; it is t he

same when the heat given has been too great The .

right heat may be asce rtained by throwing a few

drops of water on the m ould when if it r ath er , ,

quickly boils off it may be used with every a d v a n

,

tage a n d safety F inally the heat must be m uch

.
,

greater than can be borne by the han d .

New ingot moulds should be well gre ased

before using to prevent the gold adhering to the m
, .

It is much better and safer to close them up and

pour in a solution of salt and water and let it ,

remain for a day or t w o before using them ; this

— —
causes oxidation or rust of the s urfaces and i s
an excellent preventive to the gold sticking ,

which is sometimes found to be so obstinate as to

cause chipping of the mould thus ren dering it use
,

less for further Operations .

In badly prepared moulds a porosity is given

to the gold in the casting apart from other con
,

sid e rations a n d it is clearly discernible before the

,

rolling process t a kes place The inexperienced

.

may detect this porosity readily enough when once ,

having s een a bar of its kind by the unevennes s ,

of surface which is sunken in i n places upon the

, ,
 H E A TING O F GO L D A L L OYS . 22 9

upper side and exhibiti n g numerous small cracks

,

and blow holes all caused by a current of air meet

-
,

ing the molten m etal as it is poured and proceeds

down t h e mould p repared for its reception When .

gold and its alloys a re imperfectly fused a lo n g

point is generally left adheri n g to the end of the
bar and these porous irregularities S how them
,

selves also in the form of a scaly and unsmooth

surface and produce altogether very inferior cast
,

ings The remedy for this will be a remelting with

.

a fa r greate r addition of heat .

Th e alloys of gold should not be over heated -

,

and ought to be poured almost immediately after

complete fusion h a s taken place ; the latter may be
easily ascertained by stirring with an iron rod ,

previou sly heated to just redness ; the time of

p ou r ing that, is when the fu sed , mass is ready i s ,

g enerally a rrived at by the touch it having more ,

o f a watery touch and not at all cloggy like it h a s

, ,

w hen not p roperly fused Th e i n got moulds sho uld

.

be rather slanting and not quite straight the former ,

being more convenient to pour into ; and also it

prevents spitting in t o the face of the operator when
that irregularity takes place G old should certainly .

be stirred and especially in H all marke d qualities

,
-
,

in order to produce a perfect mixture which wo u ld ,

assay evenly This information is given in answer

.

to several questions we have received from corre

s p on den ts wishing to be practically advised upon

the subjects of these remarks .

B lu e gold is very diffi cult to prepare at all

times ; it has however a ve ry pleasing effect when
, ,

used in conj unction with othe r shades of coloure d

2 30 B L UE GOL D .

gold in the for m ation of arti s tic work so that a fe w ,

remarks upon its treatment may b e of some se r v ice

to that class of art workers who are striving to
-

promote a r t and taste in design as opposed to

“

the cheap and the vulgar B lue gold is a m i x

.

ture of iron and gold The formula for 1 8 carat i s

.

as follows
B L UE G OLD .

oz . dwt s .
grs .

o 15 o
o 5 o

This all oy wil l cost about 6 45 per ounce an d is

.
,

of a light blue colour The colour is shown to

.

advantage in the finish by well polishing the parts

composed of it and then pecking it up with the
,

engraving or chasing tool No colouring should

.

be allowed to take place with this gold but where ,

it i s unavoidable the colour must be subsequently

removed by the usual mechanical means or the ,

proper S hade of colour would not b e given to this

alloy of gold Th e preparation of the mixture
.

being the most impo rtant point with which we are

now concerned calls for a few detailed remarks
,

upon it It is best prepared in the mixture by

.

dipping iron wire n ot too thick into the molten

gold which should be well covered with charcoal
,

—
flux and this is one of the most imp ortant poin ts
of its preparation — to prevent oxidation Th e iron .

use d of which charcoal is by fa r the best in pro

,

du c i n g homogeneo u s alloys with gol d should be ,

quite clean and free from oxide b efore adding it t o

2 32 G RE Y G O L D .

This alloy costs about 7 8 3 3d per o unce before

. .

it is put into the melting pot the latter of cou rse

, , ,

increasing the cost a little in accordance to t he

success of the operation Iron becomes rapidly
.

oxidised in contact with the air therefore it is of ,

the greatest importance that a good protective

coating S hould always be secured for the surface of
the fused m ass in the crucible .

Another alloy employed in j ewellery is t o be

foun d oc c a s i on a lly a l loy e d with iron It is c alled .

g y g
r e old I.t has a greyish yellow appearanc e and ,

is used for leaves and other ornaments Th e follow .

i n g is the 2 0 carat for m ula

GRE Y G O LD .

Gold, fin e
Iron C harcoal

This alloy costs about 7 1 3 3d per ounce ; and

. .

the same remarks and treatment apply to thi s

alloy a s to the others named the details of which ,

havi ng been given when describing the m it will be ,

unnecessary for a further comprehensive des crip

tion here .

F ormerly the bath employed for imparting

the colour of fi n e gold to jewellery consisted chiefly
of the following ingredients : an alka line nitrate ,

such as a nitrate of potash or soda and common

salt to which was added some acid sulphate like
, ,

alum or ferric ox ide in orde r to produce a dilute

, ,

a ua r e ia
q g D r
. Wagner
. a G erman
, attempted to ,

s ub s titute the l a tt e r in place of the former but ,

 WA GNE R
’
DR S G OL D C OL OU R 2 33
-

. .

without success H e is stated however to

.
, ,

accomplished his obj ect by using a solution

posed as follows .

B rom in e I gram m e .

C alcic B rom ide 25 gra m m e s .

W ater 1 li tre .

S ometimes in place of the calcic bromide he used

3 0 grammes o f potassic bromide T h e articles are .

reported to be left in the solution from three to fi v e

m inutes then removed and rinsed in the usual way

,

w ith C lean water and afterwards drawn through a

,

so lution of sodic hyposulphite This recipe is .

said to accomplish all the purposes which it was

i n tended it should do Now our experience has .
,

been different and we unhesitatingly say no such

,

s u ccessful results can be achieved by its employ

m ent as those stated No ; not even with the best
.

quality of gold jewellers employ in their businesses .

W e have submitted all the higher qualities of gold

to the action of the above mixture without ach i ev
ing any good commercial success 1 8 carat gold .
-

cann o t be made to present a fine rich colour wh e n

treated with it not so fin e in fact as it can with
, , ,

d ilute sulphuric acid alone ; in short such recipes ,

are not only utterly wo rthless and misleading to

the trade but they go through the various scientific
,

j ournals without the f raud being detected and , ,

consequently eventually come to be looked upon

,

as established facts The mixture may be em .

p loyed for the p u rpose of removing tarn i sh from

n e w ly coloure d gold goo ds
-
which may have be ,

c ome tarnished in stock but for a n y other pu rpose ,

w e cannot recommend its employm e nt .

2 34 G OL D RE NE WE R , O R A NTI O X ID E -
.

(IO .
) Th e following
mixture is even better than
the above for renovating tarnished goods ; it can be
used in the following proportions

B ic ar bon ate of S oda

C hloride of L im e

C om m on S alt
“Tater

2 0 OZ .

Well mix together and apply with a soft b ru sh .

A very small quantity of solution is suffi cien t for

effecting the desired purpose and it may be u s ed ,

either cold or in a lukewar m state Plain arti c les .

may be brightened equal to new by putting a s pot

or two of the liquid upon them from the stoppe r of
the bottle and lightly brushing over the s u rfaces
with fin e tissue paper until suffi ciently dried O ff to
accomplish the O bj ect intended .

n colouring by the F rench process without

( )
II I .

acid some years ago we substituted sulphuric a cid

, ,

for the alum as formerly employed therein a n d

, ,

found it an advantage with some alloys of gold ,

when the quality was good The process w a s .

rendered much quicker and the surface of the ,

work presented a much brighter appearance than ,

when alu m was used An y quality over 1 4 .

carats could be coloured by it This colou ring .

solut ion was quick in its action and if not em , ,

ployed too strong was not so liable to rot the work

,

a s was the more extended process of alum colo u r

ing for alum is a very penetrating salt and often

, ,

c aused the work to a pear overdone T h fo l low

p e .
2 36 P RE C IPITA TING GOL D WITH C O PPE R A S .

ever preferred Jewellers

. work treated by thi
’
s

recipe in the manner described receives a fin e

and bright colour if the quality is 1 4 carats a n d
upwards .S even minutes is the time in all the
work should be in the colour pot and the above -
,

quantity of solution w ill be s ufli cien t to colour

1 0 oz .of solid gold chains or rings and about

5 oz . of hollow work ; but this will to a gr ea t

extent depen d upon the amount of surface a s a ll ,

must b e conveniently covered in the pot to produce

an even and reguline surface .

In precipitating gold in the waste waters

of jewellers care should be taken not to add t oo
,
—
much of the precipitating salt copperas as if t oo —
much is added to a given bulk of solution it will
cause the re dissolvi n g of the precipitating gold
-
,

which then passes ofl with the water as it is drawn

away and is lost Of late an unusual quantity of
.

light hol low work has been made that is w o rk , ,

drawn on iron wire and before the work can be,

finished this iron wire has to be dissolved from the

interior of it Now we have found in adding the
.
,

liquid and the residuum from the process to the

genera l waste waters that it caused too much of ,

the sulphate of iron to be added to properly e ffect

the pu rpose intended V iz the precipitation of the
,
.
,

gold Th e effect of this increased volume of sul

.

p h u r i c acid a n d the sulphate of oxide of iron com

bi n e d was the re dissolving of the gold precipitate
-
,

causing it to be held in the solution as at first and ,

as the supern a tant water was fi nally draw n off the

s e dimen t it very n a turally passed a way with it .

T he truth of this assertion may readily be veri fied

 S OD A , ITS A C TIO N O N SUL PH ATE O F IR ON . 2 37

by taking a small quantity of the solution from the

bulk and largely diluting it with water ; when on ,

the addition to it of a few drops of a very pure solu

tion of proto sulphate of iron it produces turbidness
-
, ,

the gold cannot have been effectually precipitated

in the first instance or on the other hand the re
, ,

dissolution of the precipitate must have taken place

as indicated Th e best way to treat the spent liqu id
.

from the iron dissolving which contains sulphuric,

acid not decomposed and sulphate of oxide of iron ,

is to keep a special receptacle formed of stoneware

for receiving and preserving it ; no hindrance or
disadvantage will thereby accrue to the gold worker -

i n causing a depar ture from the usual waste w ater -

treatment of his establishment which otherwise ,

w ould have to be or a consequent loss of gold

,

w ould be annually taking place .

( )
I3
. It is not generally known in the gold
w orkers trade that common washing soda quickly
’

d issolves in conj unction with hot water the hard

, ,

c ake of sulphate of i ro n which forms in the dis

s olving vessel when the liquid becomes saturated

,

with i t which it does if attention be not constantly

,

directed thereto The plan adopted in some gold

.

working establishments where crystallisation is ,

found to have taken place is to put into the vessel ,

some water and then place it upon the gas j et and

,

heat it until the whole is completely dissolved

again This method takes a long time to do and
.
,

therefore causes a great waste of time which may ,

be utilised to greater advantage If the c rystallised .

mass after the remaining unc rystallised liquid is

,

poured from the surface be treated as follows , ,

2 38 TE ST F OR S TEEL O R IR O N TO OL S .

compl e te liquefaction will almost immediately take

—
e ffect Take a bout one ounce of the soda above
named either in powder or the lump will do for
,

the purpose and put it into the vessel contain ing

,

the substance to be O perated upon then add a ,

small quantity of boiling water when great e fi e r ,

v es c e n c e w ill instantaneously commence ; this m a y

be increased and dissolution of the incrustated

,

—
mass as sisted by taking the pipkin which i s the
—
best vessel that can be employed with the r i ght
hand and briskly moving it in a circular direction ,

thus causing greater agitation of the liquid wit h

increas ed action of the salt and the breaki ng u p of
,

the refractory mass into the liquid state at which ,

'

stage it should be poured O fl and a fresh addition

,

of the sodic salt and boi ling water should be m ade ,

when the c rystallisation of the iron salt is found to

be hard and large in quantity which wi ll v ery ,

oft en be found to be the case where there are

unlimited proportions of iron to be dissolved when ,

the liquid employed for the latter purpose has been

str ong and its removal from the pipkin has not
,

been effected at th e proper time .

I4 )A simple test for distinguishing steel tools

( .

from iron ones which have the same polish and

,

workmanship alike as if all were steel consists as

, ,

follows and when it is wanted to make the dis

,

tinction quickly place a spot of dilute nitric acid

,

upon the tool and if the tool remains pretty clear

, ,

or at the most only shows a whitish mark then ,

the characteristics named prove it to be iron but

i f it shows a dark m a rk where touched by the acid
it is steel The acid testing solution may be of the
.
2 40 NE W C O L OUR ING M I TUR E X .

in the powdered salts stirri n g them all the ti m e ,

until fin e and hot Th e a c id is then to be added

.
,

and the heat increased until the boiling p oint is

attained Th e work is next put in a n d all owed to
.

remain with gentle a gitation for 3 m i n utes when it ,

is withdrawn and rinsed in boiling water to which

a spot or two of muriatic acid has been added .

NO W thin the colour with 1 oz of muriatic a cid .

and 1 oz of water and boil it up again F ina ll y

.
, .
,

put in the work for 1 m i n ute lon ger then well rin s e ,

as before in fresh hot water scratch brush and dry ,

-
,

in sawdust and the colouring is completed with a

,

capital effect if properly manipulated from the

,

commencement of the process This solution will .

colour 4 65 gold and upwards with every s a t i s fa c

.

tion .

We have often tried to colour gold in an

entire liquid solution after the style of the electro
gilding process and ultimately hope to be com
,

m erc i a lly successful in the endeavour In the .

meantime however we have succeeded with so m e

, ,

alloys of gold in colouring with the following che

m i c a ls Th e solution employed would be a dilute
.

a ua r eg i a and it was the nearest approach to good

g
-
,

gold colouring we could arrive at after some months

of experimenting Th e aqua regia was prepared
.
-

on a much more dilute scale than that of the true

aqua regia It consisted as follows
-
.

H y drochl oric A cid, chem in cally p ure

Ni tric A cid, chem ically p ure

These were intimately well mix e d and put int o a

stop pered bottle for use When we desired to .
 NE “! C O LOURING M IXTU

colour we used to take 4 oz of the liquid arising

, .

from the old process of colouring or from this ,

when s ufi c ien t had accu m ulated to 1 oz of the , .

above prepared mix ture Th e solution was then

.

boiled and the work dipped in for a period of from

one to three minutes according to the depth of
,

shade required upon th e work Nitrate of potash .

( saltpetre ) may b e substituted for the nitric acid

in prep aring th e ab ove formula and in colouring ,

with s o me alloys we have found it an advantage .

To 8 o z of muriatic acid 2 oz of saltpetre

. .

would be required in making the aqua regia The -

.

muriatic acid should be gently heated until the

saltpetre is dissolved then placed aside to cool
, ,

and afterwards b ottled securely When required .

for use in colouring well shake the mixture in the

,

bottle and take of the same proportions as pre

,

v i ou s ly stated G ood recipe for good gold C olour

. .

deep .

( 1 A nother co l ouring mixture we have found

to answer in exp erimenting in that direction , v iz .

H y drochl oric A cid 6 p arts .

Nitric A cid 1

C hloride of Am m oni a 1
Biborate of Soda 1

Water 1

10 p art s .

This solution was used repeatedly as old colour

and when it was desired to revive the stren gth of
it a little the same proportio n of dilute aqua regia
,
-

was added when colouring as named i n the pre ,

v ious recip e .
 2 42 TAR NISH E D GO L D .

dissolve copper from gold articles take

To ,

2 oz of proto sulphate of iron and dissolve it i n

.
-

half a pint of water then add to it in p owder

,

2 oz of nitrate of potash
. boil the mixture for ,

some time and afterwards pour it into a s hallow

,

vessel to cool and crystallize the n to every ounce ,

of the c rystallized salt add 8 oz of muriatic .

acid and preserve in a bottle for use 2 oz of

, . .

the above preparation should be mixed with

2 oz of b oiling water as the right proportion to
.

use in dissolvi ng copper or 1 oz of nitric acid,

.

may be used to 4 oz of boiling water as a sub

.

s t it ut e .

gold may be renova ted and the

Ta m is h e d
oxide removed from new or s orled work by apply
ing warm spirits of wine with a soft brush or flannel ,

when its brilliancy will be restored again .

( 2 I H igh quality gold articles when their colour ,

has deteri ori a te d can be restored to their primitive

,

beauty by the application of the fo ll owing mixture .

It is thus comp osed

S esquioxide of Iron
C al cin ed B orax
C hloride of Am m onia
Water to form p as te

Well m ix the powdered in gredients together until

a thick and even paste h a s been formed then take ,

the work and either dip it into the mixture or other

wise brush it over wi th it care being taken to see
,

that it is well covered w ith the colour The articles .

t o be brightened a r e then taken and placed upon a

2 44 G O L D S OL D E R S .

using to free it from the vinegar or it will pro b ab ly ,

corrode the work In this recipe the sesquiox ide of

.

iron should be the red whereas in t h e other it m ay ,

be the y ellow Th e treatment is exactly the sam e

.

as that in the one j ust describ ed .

A s it is diffi cult to procure at the time when ,

most wanted alloys for solders that are the most

,

suitable and advantageous for the various kinds of

work with out no little inconvenience in effecting a
proper composition we here append a list suitable ,

for all the qualities of coloured gold work a s manu

fa c tured by j ewellers and goldsmith s

G old S ol der to co s t 5 8 s . per o z . s uitable for

”
1 8 -
carat work .

O r 3 dwt s . of copper an d I dwt . of com o

p . in stead of all copper .

G ol d S ol der to cost 535 . 6d . per o z . s uitable for

”
I8 - carat work .

O r 4 dw ts of co d
.
pp er an 1 5 dw t s . of com
po . in stead of a ll cop per .
 G OL D S OL D E R S . 2 45

“
Gold S older to cost 5 0 5 . per o z s uitable . for
I6- carat wor

1 15 0

Or 5 dwts . of copp er an d 2 dwts . of com o

p . instead of all cop p er .

G old S ol der to cost 44 9 . per o z . uitable

s for
1 5- carat work .

Or 7} dw ts . of copp er an d 2 } dw ts . of com p o . ins tead of all copper .

G old S older to cost 4 os per o

. z suitabl e . for
I4 -
carat wor

2 5 0

O r 9 } dw ts . of copp er an d 3 dw ts . of com p o. in stead of all copp er .

M 2
2 46 L E ME L .

G o l d S older
to cost 37 3 . 6d . per Oz . suitable for
”
any coloured work .

O r 9 5 dwt s . of copper an d 3dw t s . of com p o . in stead of all C opper

.

S ince
much iron has been used in the
so

trade of late in the preparation of light hollow

,

work a few words in reference to the treat m ent of

,

l emel or fi lings arisi n g therefrom will be most

, ,

welcome to that circle of the trade The iro n which .

the lemel contains can never all b e got out with the
magnet ; in the melting of it we have expe rienced
a diffi culty in effecting a clear a n d perfect collee
tion such as did not pre s ent itself in lemel fl ee
,

from iron We however reduced the process to

.
, ,

the s ame simplici ty as the former one by u sin g ,

the following flux in the following manner .

Take

2 4 oz .

Well mix the lemel with half of each of the two

former s alts and put it into a suffi ciently large clay
2 48 B R IGH T 1 8 C A RA T AL L OY
-
.

and rich The bright alloy for

. 18 carats is com
posed as follows
G old, fin e
S ilv er, fin e
C opper wire

Add 2 grs . of copp er p er oz . for loss in m eltin g .

This alloy is for H all

marking a n d the three
-
,

grains extra of fi n e gold in the alloy is an a llowance

for th e gold never b eing b ought quite pure and to ,

enable it to pass the H all in safety The t w o g rains .

of copper added for melting loss we have found to

be an advantage since it keeps the alloy more uni

,

form as to its original weight and the cost per ,

ounce is more certain and regular whilst its safety ,

in passing the H all is more than g uaranteed by its

adoption .

Wh en coloured gold work intended for

colouring h as by accident in mistaking the solder
, ,

b ecome soldered with silver solder which renders ,

it unfit for the process it can be prepared for i t

,

again by placing the work in tolerably strong

nitric acid of good commercial quality and free
from muriatic acid as the latter would cause t h e
,

mixture to be decomposed wi th liberation of ,

chlorine and dissolution of the gol d This is .

therefore to be avoided in order to prevent the,

complete destruction of the work when seeking

only for the removal of the inferior s older wh ich
has been inadvertently applied to its connections .

The nitric acid solution i f chemically pure acid is

,

e m ploye d will e ntirely free the work fro m a ll

,
 R E M OV ING IR ON F R O M G OL D . 2 49

trac e s Of this solder as the acid will break it up

,

and dissolve it w ithout injuring the articles ope

rate d upon i n any way After the solder has been
.

removed a n d the work taken from the solution Of

acid it should be rinsed annealed and boiled out
, , ,

—
in dilute sulphuric acid commonly called oil of
—
vitri ol before resolderi n g again with the proper
solder The nitric acid s olution should be Of a
.

good strength although not too strong ; a good

,

m ixture consists of one of acid to four of water .

This is a convenient strength for effecting the

above purpose ; it should be used hot and the ,

necessary degree of heat can b e kept up to the

point re quired by means of the gas j et .

D esigns of gold articles as now made for

the market are of such a delicate make and con
struction some of them that they have to be sup
, ,

ported underneath in the process of manufact ure

with iron wire ; charcoal is the best for the purpose”
and should be the only kind used because any ,

other is very difli cult to remove A t the finish of .

the work this iron has to be removed by dissolvin g

in some acid with which it has great chemical
attraction Sulphuric acid is the best for this pur
.

pose ; it is sold under the name of O il of vitriol ,

at a cost of three halfpence per lb To dissolve the

- .

iron from the work take a stoneware j ar or pipkin

,

large enough for the work in hand put the work ,

into it and add s ufli cie n t bo iling water to well

,

cover the work ; the pipkin must not be filled with

wat e r for when the ac id is added it will boil over
,

and carry all the liquid away without its being

properly uti li s ed In putting the acid to the wat e r
.
2 50 R E M OVING IRON F R OM GOL D .

great care sh oul d b e taken to prevent its flyin g

about as the scald or burn will destroy eve rything
,

it comes in contact with The proper way to add

.

it to the b oiling water would be as follows — T ake

an ordinary copper boiling out pan and fi rstly -
,

put into th at receptacle the oil of vitriol and th en ,

take hol d of the mouthpiece with a long pai r of

tongs and very gradually pour th e contents i n to
,

the pipkin holding the work and the boiling w a t er .

When this is done place the pipkin with its c o n

,

tents in a water bath or upon a sand bath but if ,

these co n veniences are not at hand put it up o n a

sh eet of iron with a gas light underneath w hich ,

w ill keep the mixture at a regular temperatu re .

After the expiration of one h our th e liquid w ill

re quire to b e poured off and another additio n of
,

hot water and oil of vitriol a s before made to th e

, ,

work This should be kept in action a li ttle

.

longer when a third one is made and which

, ,

generally completes the process if all things have

been favourable The strength of solution which
.

acts best i s this : to every 8 o z of boiling water .

take 1 oz of Oi l of vi triol ; that would be 5 o z

. .

of oil of vitriol to the quart of boiling wate r .

These proportions re fer to when the solution is kept

hot by means of the gas j et and not when t he ,

dissolutio n is allowed to proceed without its actio n

being increased by the aid of applied heat In t he .

l atter case the dis s olv ing mixture may wisely be

,

used a little stronger B y this process a large

.

quantity of iron may be dissolved without affecting

the gold in the least degree Three hours with .
,

proper attention bestowed upon it is ample time ,

252 D IFFIC UL TIE S O F ME L TING .

gold from going through the meshes with the p ow

dered dust The gold is now picked at this stage
.

fro m th e refus e in the siev e ; and if there be any

solid particles Of refuse still unpounded it is put
through the process agai n It is very seldom that
.

the whole of the gold can be collected when once

spi ll ed into the fi re but the major portion of it can
,

be recovered by these means Th e other goes into

.

the sweep to be treated by the refi ner .

In carrying out any Of thes e suggestions it

is imp ortant that the chemicals e m ployed for the
purpose should b e of the best quality if not chem i
,

cally p ure when complete success a n d good com

,

m erci a l results are desired to be achieved by the

ado p tio n Of any of the various p roc e sse s described
in this work .
 IN D E X .

A
F R IC A , sources of gold, 8 A lloy in g, m a terials for, 5 8
All oy s , t able of, 5 ,
2 2 1 5 Am eri ca, sources Of gold, 6
c olours of, 43 An cien t J ewi sh m ethod of worki n g
a n n eali n g O f, 9 3 gold, 2 8
fusin g-p oin t Of, 9 2 An ci en t J
ewish m ethod of w ire
v ari ous quali ti es , 30, 2 06 drawin g. 9 7
for p artin g, 2 1 6 w orks of gold, 4 ,

for chain s, 98 Ann ealin g differen t quali ties, 93

t ables of v alues, 2 1 6 A pron s, w ork p eople s, 2 20
’

coloured, 2 1 7 Asi a , sources of gold, 8

for dry -colourin g, 1 48 A ss ay ers ’
report , 2 1 9

2 2 -carat , 32 w eight , 2 19

20 -carat , 39 Australia, sources of gold, 7

I8 -carat , 40 Australian sy stem of treatin g the
I5 -carat , 44 ore , I5

I3-c arat , 45 Australi an sov ereign , 35

1 2 -cara t , 47

Io-carat , 47
BAD w orkable gold, 1 89

g o s t at , 48 B ars gold, 69 , 74
of

8 -c arat , 49 B ars wi th serrated edges, c aus e of,

cara t , 22 7
7 -
50

reducin g, 2 06 —2 1 2 B en v en ut o C elli n i, I33

reduci n g st an dard, 2 1 4 B lue gold, 2 2 9

re duci n g fin e , 2 14 how to w ork i t , 2 30 , 2 31
of gold, 2 29 —2 32 B oard, j ew ellers , 80
’

heati n g of, 2 2 9 B right 1 8 -c arat alloy , 2 48

18 -c arat bri ght , 2 47 treatm en t an d fini shin g, 2 7
4
difi culties in m el tin g, 2 52 B rightn ess of the sovereign , 7 7
2 54 IND E X .

B ri tain , G reat , gold supply , 1 0, 1 1 C olour for gold, n ew processes, 240,

B urni n g lem el, 1 86 2 41

solderi n g wi thout chan gin g, 242,

A L C UL ATIONS , t able of, 63

C 2 43

C arat Of gold, 2 1 9 C olours , arran gem en t of, 1 1 4

C elli n i , B en v en ut o, 1 33 deep , 1 1 9
C olours Of gold, v arious , 43
’
C em en t , en grav ers , 1 29

C hain -m akin g, 107 C om m on lock ets , 8 7

C hain s , prep arin g wire for, 98 C om p ositi on of soft solder, 1 38
C hasin g, 1 31 of la p s, 1 79
C hem ic als , pure, 2 5 2 of the sov erei gn , 2 0 5
C hief p lac es of j ew ellery m an ufac C on clusion , 2 2 3
tur e, 2 1 3 C op p er used by j ew ellers, 57
C oin in g, Ol d m ethod, 36 p urchaseabl e p ri c e of, 57

C oin s , m an ufac ture of, 7 2 C oppe ras in p re cip i ta tin g gold, 23

6
E n glish. 33 C os t of gold-rolli n g, table of, 71
C ollectin g lem el , 1 8 3 C rucible, m ixture for , 1 8 7
gold from co lo u r -wat e
r, 181 treatm en t of g old, 59
C oloured gold alloy s , 2 06 2 1 2 , — 2 17 C rushin g m achi n es , 1 7
C oloured gold solders, 1 36 , 2 1 7 C utter, gold 1 7 8 —1 80 , 2 20
C oloured w ork , silv er solder on , 2 48 C ut tin g-out p resses , 75
C olourin g gold, dry p rocesses, 1 46
in gredi en ts em ploy ed, 1 48 ANIE L L S table , 9 2 ’

D
origin al p rocess , 1 49 D eep c olours of en am el, 1 1 9
L on don do . 1 51 D efects In coin in g, 7 6
n ew p rocess , 1 56 D efe c ts Of solder wi th m uch z inc, 95
w e t -p rocesse s , 1 5 8 D e gree of heat for q
op a ue colours,
dep osi ti on in , 1 61 121
F ren ch p rocess , 1 6 2 D ep osi ti on In w et-c olourin g, 1 61
L on don do 1 65 .
Diam on d w ork , 1 2 3
-

effec ts on the op erator , 1 6 7 D iffi cul ty of treatm en t , 1 42

B irm in gham p rocess , 1 6 8 D ifficulti es in m atin g alloy s, 252
Germ an process, 1 73 D issolv in g soft solder, 1 42
frostin g, 1 77 sulp hate Of ir on , 2 37
C olourin g w i th sulp huric acid, 2 35 sil v er solder in coloured work,
C olour of fin e gold, 2 2 48
silv er, 50
iron , 2 49 , 2 50
C op p er, 5 1 D rap er, 1 2 7
Sp el ter, 5 2 D raw -p la te, 9 7
C olour for gold, D r . Wagn er s ’
,
2 33 D ross, rem ovin g, from m olten m etal,
useful on e , 2
39 1‘ O
lem on , 2 5 1 D ry tc olourin
g, 1 46 —1 56
256 INDE X .

Gold, heatin g of alloy s, 2 2 9 J w ll w

e e ers
’
ast e w aters, 1 97
hall-m arked, m eltin g of, 2 29 J w lli g 89
e e n .

blue, 2 2 9 J wi h wo k
e s r s of gold, 4
p ale y ellow , 2 31

WY : 2 32
L AP PING process , 1 78 —1 80

colour, Dr . Wagn er s ’
, 2 33 L em el , 2 46

colourin g, 2 35 , 2 39 , 2 40 , 2 4 1 re finin g: I9 3"" l 95

tarnished, 2 42 directi ons , 2 2 0
L em on colour for gold, 2 51

lem el, Lock et -m ak ers bars , 68

’
2 46

lem on colour, 2 5 1 m akin g,

82
com m on , 8 7

AL L MA RKE D gold, m eltin g L oss in re-m eltin g, 63

H -

of, 2 2 9 in m ak in g, 1 8 4
H an d-w ashin g, 2 20 gen eral was te , 1 90 —3 20
H ard gold, 5 1 Lum p charcoal , 225

H ard solder, I35

A C HINE S for
H eadin g in a lap , 1 79 M crushin g, 1 7
—8 7
H ea tin g-poin t of gold, 2 2 9 M akin g lock ets , 80
of in got m oulds, 2 2 8 Makin g chain s 69 , 1 0 7 ,

H istory of gold, 2 Malleabili ty of gold, 2 3

H ollow wire-drawin g, 1 0 3 —1 06 M an ufac ture of coin s , 7 2
M an ufac t ured arti cl es , 80
M PR OVING the quali ties of M an ufac turi n g proc esses 1 08
I —1 1 0
,

gold, 65 gold-
p lati n g, 1 0 8
Meltin g gold. 5 7. 63. 1 39 1 40 .

In got m oulds , 2 2 6 H M gold alloy s, 2 2 9

.

m i trin g of, 2 2 7 blue gold, 2 2 9

heatin g of, 2 2 8 di fi cult ies of, all oy s, 2 52
n ew , 2 2 8 Metals , fusi n g-poin t of, 9 2
In gredi en ts em p loy ed in colourin g, rem ov in g dross, 1 40

1 48 Method of coin in g 36 ,

In troducti on of coloured gold, 1 47 wire -drawin g, an cien t, 97

In troduc tory , 1 m odern ,
97 - 1 06

Iron : di SSOIVin gr 2 49 : 2 50 Mild test for alloy ed gold, 2 39

tes t, 2 38 M in t : R oy al, 73—79
M ixed states of gold, 1 2
E WE L L E R S furn ace, 60 ’
M ixin g gold, n ew sy s tem , 65 68 —
board, 80 M ixtures dissolvin g soft solder, 142

Je w elle rs
’
w ork , takin g im p ressions , _ 1 44
91 dry -co louri n g, 1 46—1 56
sw ee
p , 202 wet -colourin g, 1 58— 1 77
 IND E X . 2 57

vari ous . 1 95 Pure gold, 2 , 20

gold, 66 , 2 06 —8 21
M odern im prov em en ts, 8 1
M od 2 6

i fi s
e
UALITIE S, tables of, 30, 20 6

z Is
n ew , 2 2 8

h eati n g of, 2 28
i
v alueof 30 2 06—2 1 8
described, 38 , 50 - 5 2
reducin g, 64 66 —
N A TIONS lon g kn own gold, 5
New sy stem of m ixin g gold, 66
fusin g-p oin t , 92
ann ealin g, 9
3
of colourin g, 1 56

guin ea. 35
2 33 , 2 40 . 2 4 1

Ni ello engravin g, 1 25
E C OVE R ING gold from waste,
R —
1 89
—
1 97

P E R ATO R , effects on , 1 67 R educin g gold, 64, 206 2 1 8

O
Ore , se p aratin g gold, 1 3 R eferen ces In Scrip ture, 3
Ou r m e thod of prep arin g, a n R efin in g lem el , 1 93
secret m ixture, 1 44 R em edy . 7 9
Ox idation of gold, 2 25 R em ov in g articles from cem en t , 1 31

gold from laps, 1 80

P A LE lem on gold, 2 5 1 silver solder from coloured work,
P ale y ellow gold, 2 3: 2 48

iron from gold work , 2 49 , 2 50

~

P artin g table of alloy s , 2 1 6

R en ewer for gold, 2 34
R esp onsibilities of workm en , 1 8 5
P oin t , fusin g, 94 R oun d wire, 1 10
P oli shi n g, 1 1 I
P orous gold, 2 2 8
Pre ci p i tati n g gold, 1 8 1 , 2 36 C R IP TURAL references, 3
S
Prep ari n g w ork for enam el , 1 20 S ources Of gold, 5
v arious m ixtures, 1
43, 1 44 A m erica, 6
Prep ari n g s trip s, 70 Australia, 7
Process of w orkin g at Min t, 7 3—79 A sia , 8
dry -c olourin g, 1 46 —1 56 Africa, 8
w et -c olourin g, 1 58 —77 1 E urOpe, 9
Grea t B ritai n , 10
Purchaseable price of, Secre t m ixture, 1 44
31
C op p er, 57 S ep aratin g gold from ore, 1 4

O
2 5 8 IND EX .

S ep aratin g gold from ore, Am eri can

sy stem , 1 4 Tarni shed gold, 2 42
A ustralian sy stem , 1 5 Ten aci ty of gold, 2 9
R ussian sy s tem , 1 6 Test for iron or steel tools, 2 38

S erra ted edges in bars, 2 2 7 gold, 2 m ild on e, 2 39

S i z e of m int bars , 74 Testi n g gold, 2 2 2
S oda, its action on sulphate of iron , Tough gold, 60
2 37 Treatm en t of gol d, 59
S oft diss olv in g, 1 42 1 44
solder, — in crucible, 59
S ort -solderin g fluid, 1 40 soft solder, 1 38

S older, silv er , in coloured work , 2 48 difi cul ty of, 1 42

S olderin g, 8 5 , 1 09 Treatm en t of lem el , 1 8 3, 246
S olderin g without chan gin g colour, in the fire , 1 88
2 4 2 1 343 Trial of PY x. 34
S olders, 93. 94. 1 35. 1 37. 1 38 . 2 1 7
coloured, 2 44 2 46 — USE FUL gol d l
c o our, 2 39
S ov erei gn . 77 79. 2 06
S p eci fic gravi ties, 1 8 , 53, 205 AL UE S of gold alloy s , 30, 216
V ,

S quare lapp in g, 1 80 V arious colours o f gold, 43

wire, 1 0 2 , 1 06 m ixed sta tes , 1 2
S teel tools , a test for, 2 38 uses of gold 2 5
—1 77
,

S tri p s of gold, 70 c olourin g p roces ses 1 46

2 06—
,

S ulphuric acid in colouri n g, 2 35 quali ties of gold , 2 18

S upply of Grea t Bri tain , 1 1 p lac es of m an ufac ture, 2 1 3

S w ea ti n g, 1 09
S y m bols, 2 1 8 colour for gold, 23

—
S y s tem of m ixin g, 66 han ds , 2 2 0
S y stem , our, 1 00 Waste waters 1 9 7 20 1
,

Water of Ay r ston e 1 I2
- -
,

TAB LE of m etals an d s m b
y ols, 2 1 Wear of sovereign 79 ,

qualities , 3,
0 5 2 Weddin g rin gs 37 38
-
, 2

v alues,
3 , 217
0 Weight of guin ea 35 ,

calcula ti ons , 63 sov erei gn ,

78
D an iell
’
s, 92 t ables of, 5 4
’
ours, 9 2

—
assay ers , 2 1 9
sp ecific graviti es , weight, 53 Wet-colourin g, 1 58 1 7 7
of colours, 43 c oloured solder, 2 1
3
—
coloured allo s , 2 06
y
of alloy s , m ixin g, 2 1 2
2
—
1 2
217
William H ogarth, 1 2 7
Work , wrought, 8 8
reducin g, 2 1 8 ress 8 8
p ,

duty , 2 1 8 takin g im p ression s, 9 1

Table of gold-rolling, 7 1 washin g out, 1 1 3
 B Y TH E A UTH OR OF

TH E G OLD S M ]TH S ’
H AND B O OK .

j ust p ub
lislzed, 1 2 m o, 3s . 6d . clot}: boa rds,

SILVERSMITHS HAN
’

DBOO
C ONTAINING

FUL L INSTR U C TIONS F OR TH E A L L OYING AND

WOR KING OF S ILVE R ,
INC LU D ING TH E D IFFE RE NT MOD E S O F R E FINING AND ME TING L TH E M E TA L , ITS
L
SO D E RS , T H E PRE PARATION OF IM IT AT IO N A LL Y
O S , M E T H OD S O F M ANI PU LA
T l ON, PR EVENTION OF WASTE INSTR C TIO S FOR IMPROVING AND , U N
F INIS H ING T H E S U RFAC E O F T H E OR T OG E T H E R WIT H W K ,

O T H E R U S E F UL INF ORMATION A ND M RMORAND A .

WITH N UM E R O US IL L US TRA TIONS .

The w ork is des tin ed to ta k e up as

o od a p os it ion i n tec hn ica l lite ra ture as
-w ork er a b ook w Ic h h as p asse d thro u h the o rdea l of
’
the P ra c t i c a l G o l d , g
cr iti c a l e xa m in a t i on a n d bu s rn e s s t es ts w rth grea t s ucc es s
.

The w rite r i s m a s te r .

”-
O

of hi s s ub j ec t a n d d e al s w rth r t In a th o rough m an n er 5 ew elle r a n d M e ta l

‘
.

The c hie f m eri t of the w ork is i ts p ra c ti ca l c ha ra c ter The w o r er s i n the

.
. k
h h
.

tra de w i ll Sp eedily di sc ov er rts m w e y s rt down to s tudy i r

”
e ri t s n t e .

M ec ha n i c .

Thi s w o r fko rm s a v a lu ab le s eq u e l t o t he a u thor

’
s P r a t i
c c a l G old w ork er
-
,
’

a n d s up li es a w a n t l on g fe lt i n t he s rlv e r t ra de It _ will be foun d a thoroug hl

P — y
.

"
rs m rt11 s Tra d e f oa m ed
’

p ra c t i ca t re a t i se .S i l w .

We ’hav e before ha d occasion t o sp eak in high term s of The Pra c tic a l G o ld

k
w or e r, by M r G ee
—
The p res e n t tre a t i se rs q urte e q a l t o i t i n c o m p le ten es s
. .
u
a n d p r a c t i c al v a lue , an d m a y be c on s rde red a c om p an ron w or
”
H orolog i ca l k .

y ou m a l .

k
The w or i s thoroughly w ell wr i tt e n ; e ve ry p age bea rs the im p ress of a m i n d
tha t has w h olly m a s tere d ev ery de ta i l of t he a rt dea lt w ith, an d w e a re s ure t ha t
ev e ry m e m be r of the tra de w ho does n ot y e t p ossess the boo
”
s hould has te n to k
s e c ure a C op y . C l er k en w e l l P ress .

Tre a ts in a c om p rehen s iv e a n d sy s tem a t ic fm a n n er the v a ri ous p roc e ss es c on

us et ed w ith the s ilv e r w or e r s a rt
-
k
’
A s a gui de t o w or m e n a n d a p p re n ti c es it
. k
wi ll rov e a good te chn ic a l e duc a t or, w hi le m a n ufac turers an d dea lers m a y l ear n
E
m uc fr om i t s p a ge s
”
Gla sg ow H era ld
. .

S up p lies a w an t l on g fe lt in the s ilv e r tr a de , n am e y , a w or of re fe ren c e 6 0 111 k

w hic h a rt isa n s , a p p re n t rc es , a n d m a n ufa c t n re rs , a n d, or t ha t m a tte r , buy e rs a l s o , l
e m p l oy i n g t he m a te ria l , m a y fi n d In form a ti on w hi ch Wi ll be of as s is ta n c e t o t h em
,
ra c t ica l s rlv ersm rth t o be c om e a p erfec t m as ter of his a rt o r
e n a bl in g t e

p r o fess r on .
h n d us tri a l A r t .

n
A v ol um e of a thoroughly p rac tic a l c ha ra c ter, a n d c on ta in in g a dvi c e a n d
in form a t ion as t o s ilv e rrw ork rn g ge n e ra l ly The drre c tion s gi v en a re full a n d
.

i d o l ai n ly e x e s se d t ha t o n l y a m os t dull or c a r e le ss r e a de r
p p
e a n a r e s r
p rec s
k
, .

c a n fa il t o u n de rs ta n ( them S ould be up on the shelf of e v ery s ilve r w or er ”

.
.

B i rm i n g lra m P os t .

k
Th e boo is well written by on e w ho n ows w ha t he is trea tin g of ” k C oven try .

S ta n da rd .

C RO S B Y L O C KWO O D 8: C O ., 7 , S TAT IONE RS H AL L C OURT, E C ’

. .
 w h at s
’
5 mm
LO ND O N, 1 8 6 2 .

TH E P R IZ E M E D A L
Was awarde d to the Publishers of

NEALES SERIES
’
.

A NE W L IST O F

W E AL E ’
S S E R IE S
R U D IM E NT A RY S C IE NT IF IC , E D U C A T IO NA L ,
A ND C L A S S IC A L .

ly Th ree H u n dr ed di sti nc t w or ks i n a l m os t ev ery

and
C om p r zsi n g t F:
'
n ea r

det a r t m en t of S c i e n ce , A r t , a n d E u ca ti on , recom m e n ded to the n otic e of E n e i n r w 0 .

A r c h i tec ts , B u i lde rs , A r t t isa n s a n d S t u de n ts gen e ra l ly , a s w ell a s to those m te res t ed

'

l
a n d éc ze n t z c In s tit u t i on s C ol l eg es , S c hools ,
H/o r h m e n s L i br a r i es , L i te r a
fi
’
m
z ,
Sc i e n c e l -
a st ses
,

E WE AL E S S E RIE S in clude s T ext Book s on alm os t every bran c h of

' -

Sc i e n c e a n d In dus try , c om p ri s in g s uc h s ubj ec t s a s Agr ic ulture , Arc hi te c ture

an d B u ild in g, C iv i l E n gin eerin g. F in e Arts , M e c h a n ic s a n d M e c h an ic a l
E n gi n eer in g, Phy s ic a l an d C h e m ic a l S c ie n c e , a n d m an y m is c e lla n e ous
Tr e a t is e s T he w hole a re c on s tan tly u n de rgoin g re v is ion , an d n e w e di tion s ,
.

brou ght u p to th e la te s t di s c ov er ies in s c ien t ifi c re s e arc h , a re c on s ta n tly

is s u e d T he p ric e s a t w h ic h th e y a re s old are as low a s th e ir e xc e lle n c e i s
—
.

as s u re d Am er i ca n L i ter a ry G az ette
. .

Am on gs t th e lite ra ture o f te c hn ical educa t ion , WE AL E S S E RIE S ha s e v e r

'

en j oy e d a h igh rep uta tion , an d th e a ddi tion s be in g m a de by M e s s rs C RO S B Y .

L O C KWO O D C o re n de r the s er ie s e v e n m ore c o m p le te , a n d brin g th e i n for

—
.

m a t ion up on th e s e ve ral s ub M
’

j e c ts do w n to th e p re s e n t t i m e i m ng .

y ou r n a l .

It i s n ot too m uch to sa y that n o book s hav e e v e r p rov e d m ore p omi la l

w i th , or m ore use ful to, y oun g e n gin e e rs an d oth e rs tha n the e xc e l le n t
trea t i se s com p ri se d in WE AL E S S E RIE S
' ”
E n gi n eer .
— .

T he e xc ell e n ce of WE AL E S S E RIE S i s n ow s o w ell ap p rec ia te d , th a t i t

'

w ould be w as t in g our sp ace to en la rge up on th e ir gen e ra l us e fuln ess an d

va l ue .
—
B ui lder .

WE AL E S S E RIE S has bec om e a stan dard as w ell a s an un riv alled

—
'

"
collec ti on of treati se s in all bra n c h e s of a rt an d sc ie n ce P ubli c Op i n i on . .

PH ILAD E L PH IA, 1 8 7 6 .

T H E P R IZ E M E D A L
“W
as a wa rded t o the Publi she rs for

Books : Rudi m en tary , Sci en t ifi c,

"
NEALES SERIES
’
,
”
ETG .

C RO S BY L O C KWO O D
’
sn n ox
sn s H AL L C OURT, L UD G AT E H IL L ,
 WEALE S ’
E UDIMENTAE Y SCIENTIFIC SERIE S .

“
I The v olum es Il l ust r a te d with
of this S e ries are fre e]
Woodc uts , or otherwi se , w he re req uis i te T ro ugho u t t h e fol .

l ow in g L is t it m us t be un de rs tood t ha t the boo s a r e bo un d in k

l im p c loth, un l es s otherw is e s ta ted ; bu t th e v ol u m es m a r ked
w i ”, a t m ay a l so b e ha d s tron g ly bou n d i n cloth b oa r d s for 64 .

e xt m .

NB . .
—In th i s L id i t i s r ecom m e n ded , as a
or der i n g f rom
m ea n s of f a c i l i ta t i n g bus i n ess a n d obv i a ti n g e rr or , to q u o te the
n um b e rs afi x ed to the v ol u m es , as w ell as the ti tles a n d p r i ces .

C IV IL E NG INE E R ING , S URV E Y ING , E T C .

N0
WE LL S WE L L JO H N G E O
.

3x. AND - S INKING . By . S WIND E L L,

an d G . R . B U RNE LL , C E R e v is ed E di t ion
. . . W ith a New
Wa te r
n dix on ua l it ie s of Illust ra te d
fi
the 23
g
. . .

35 T . B L A S T I G A N D O U A RR Y IN G O F S T O N E , fo r
B uildin g a n d other Purp oses 1W i th Re m a rks on the B low in g up of B ri dge s
U RGOYNE
. .

B G en Sir OE N K C B Ill us t ra ted Is 6 d

B '
B a rt
O
. . . . . . .
,

AND O TH E R IR ON GIRD E R B R ID GE S , p ar
.
,

43 T E U
.L A ,
t ic ularly desc r ibin g t he B ri ta n n ia a n d C on w ay T ubula r B ridg es By G
Y L
. .

D R S D A E D E NPS E v C E . Fo urt h E dit ion as

W
. . .

’
44 F 0
. UN D A T ION S A N D C O N C R E T E O R K S , w ith P ra c ti cal
R em arks )on Footin S a n d C on c re te B ét on , Pile driv i n g, C a i sson s , an d
g
-
, , ,
'

C ofierda m s , &c . By D O DSO N . F ifth E diti on . Is . 6d .

60 L AND A ND E NGINE E RING S UR VE YING

. . B y T B AKE R, .

C E New E di tion rev i se d by E DWAR D NuC E Nr C E 2s t

W
. .

E M B ANKING LAND S FR OM TH E S E A
.
.
,

80 ' i th exam ples .

an d Pa rt ic ula rs of a c t ual E m ban m en ts , &c B y J W IGGINS , F G S as k

W W W
. . . . . .

81. A TE R ORKS , for the S up pl of C i ti es an d T own s

O

i th
y .

a D es c rip ti on of the Pri n c ip a l G e olo i c a l Form a ti ons of E n g lan d as in

lies of Wa ter ; a n d D e ta i s of E n n es a n d Pum p in M a c hin ery g
fluen c in g S
w
°

tor ra is in a te r B S AM E H G H E S , F G C E
. Ne w E t io n U L U . .
°

NGINE RING IN NOR TH AM E RICA , a S ketch

. .

I1 8 C IVIL
.

of B D A ID S TE E NSO N, V &c V
Pl a tes a n d D ia gra m s 3s
l
. .

GIR D E R S , R OOFS , AND

. .

1 6 7. IR OA B R ID G E S , O TH E R
WO R KS ; B y FRANC IS C AKPIN C E as 6d :
. . . . .

R OA D S AND S TRE E TS ( TIIE C ONS TR UC TION of)

,

I9 7 .
L
.

Y
B y H E NR L AW, C E , rev is ed a n d e n l ar ged by D K C ARE , C E
. . . . . i n cl udm g
’

av e m e n ts of St on e , Wood As ha lte , &c

.

4s 6 d t
WOR K IN IIE S M AL L E R TO WNS AND E v
. . .

2 0 3. A NITA K Y
V ILL AG E S Re v ise d E di t ion
B y C S L AGC ,
GA S WORKS , TIIE IR C ONS TR UC TIONAND A R A NGE R
. . .

z I2 .
.

M E NT a n d the M a n ufac t ure an d D is t ributi on of C oa l G as O r i n a lly

°
°

w ri tten hy S AM U E H UG HE S C E L g
.

Re -w rit te n a n d en la rged by “ u n !
Seve n th E :ii t iou , wi th im ot ta n t a ddi ti on s
. .

R IC H ARD S , C E 3 6d : . .

PIONE E R E NGINE E R ING

. . .

2 I3. A t es tis s on th e n gi n e erin g .

O pe ra t ion s c on n ec t e d w i th the S et tl em en t of Was te L a n ds in New C o un

t ri e s B E D WARD D ODS ON, Ass oc In s t C E
. s o dt . . . . . .

2 I6 . M A TE IA L S AND C ONS TR UC TIO A Theoreti cal and

Pra ct ica l Tre a t i s e on the S tra in s , D es ign in g , an d E rec ti on of W or s of C on k
s t ruc t ion B y F RA NC IS C AM IN, C E
. S ec on d E dit ion , re v i s e dP3s t .

N
. . .

z I9 . C IVIL E GI E E R I G N
B y H ENRY L AW, M In s t C E N . . . . .

Y UL
In c l udin g H D RA IC E NG INE E RING by G E O R B RNE , M In s t C E U LL
L K
. . . . . .

S ev e n th E di t ion , rev is e d, w i th la rg e a ddi t ion s by D KINNE A R C AR , .

M In s t C E 6s 6d , C loth boards , 7 3 6d
,

. . . . . . . .

a The 3 i n di ca tes t ha t th ese

“
v ol s . m ay be had s t ron g ly boun d at 6d . ex tra .
 WEALE S RUD IIIENTARY SE RIE S.
’

M INING , M E TA L L URG Y, E T C .

4 . M INE RAL O G Y R udi m en ts of ; a con cise V iew of ; th e G en eral

Prop erties of M in era l s B y A RAH SAY, F . . &c . Third
E di ti on , revise d a n d en la rge d Ill us tra te d. 3s 6d : . . .
[$16 c q
Ir7 .S UB TE RRANE O US S UR VE YING , E lem en an d P r actical
Trea tise on’ wi th an d w ithout the M a gn e tic Needle By H on s F E Nwc ,
K
.

S urvey or ot M in es an d THOIsAs B A E R, C E Illus tra ted

, as 6 d t . . . . .

1 33 M E TAL L UR G Y OF C OP PE R
. an In troduction to th e M e thods
of Seeki n g , M in in g, an d Ass a vi n g C Op r an d Man ufa cturin g i ts Alloy s
W
, .

B y ROBE RT H . L ANEO RN Ph D . . cuts . as . 6d :.

1 35 . E L E C TR O-ME TAL L UR G Y; Practically Treated A LEX . By

AND E R WATT , E i ght h E diti on , revis ed, with a ddi ti on al M at hs
an d Ill ustra tion s , in c ludin g the m os t recen t Proc esses .
3s i .

1 72 . M INING TOOL S , M an ual of F or the Use of Mine M an agers, .

Agen ts S tuden ts are B y WILLIAII M O RGANS as 6d t

, , . . . .

M INHVG TO OL S A TLA S of E n gravin gs to Illus trate the above,

,

c on ta i n i n g 2 35 Illus t ra ti ons , dra w n t o S ca le .

43 6d. ;
. c loth boar ds , és .

1 76 . M E TAL L UR G Y OF IR ON . C on tain in g H is tory of Iron M an u

fa ct ure M e thods of Assa
. an d An al Iron O res , Proces s es o f M an u
of
fa c ture of Iron an d S tee et c . By BAUE RIIAN, F G S F ilth E diti on , . . .

rev ise d an d en la rged .

I80 . C OAL AND C OAL M INING B y WAE INOTON W S m vTH , . .

M A , F R S S ixth E diti on rev i sed 33 6d t

. . . .
[f a s t M IA/ted , . . . .

TH E M INE RAL S UR VE YOR AND VAL UE R S C OM

’
1 95 .
P L E TE G UID E , wi th n e w Tra v ers e Ta bles , an d D es crip ti on s of In rove d
In s trum en ts ; also the C orre c t Pri n c i les of L a y in g out a n d V al uin g in eral
Prop e rties By WILLIAM L INT E R N,
. in in g a n d C iv il E n gin ee r 3s 6d : . . .

2 1 4. S L A TE AND SL A TE Q UARR YING, S cien tific, Practi cal , an d

C om m erc ial By D C D A IE S
. Min in g E n gi n ee r, arc . . V , .

2 20 . M A GNE TIC S UR VE YING, AND ANG UL AR S UR VE Y

ING , wi th Rec ords of the Pec ul ia rities of Needle D is turban ces C om p iled .

from the Results of carefully m a de E xp eri m en ts By W L INTE RN as . . . .

A R C H IT E C T URE , B UIL D ING , E T C

AR CH IYE C TURE —ORD E RS—The Orders
.

1 6. an d their E sthetic
Prin c ip les . By W . H L s sn s
. . Ill us t ra te d . Is. 6d .

17 . AR CH ITE OTURE - S M EL The H istory an d D escrip ti on Of

the Sty les of Architec t ure
V arious C oun tries, from the E arlies t to the of
Presen t Period B T TALB OT B UR , . ac
" O RD ERS AND Tr u e or ARC HITE CTURE i n On e Vol
Il lus tra ted. as
. Y . .

fl, 3 6d

1 8 AR CH ITE OTUR E —D E S IGN The Prin ci les

, 3
—
. .
, .

. of D esi gn in
de duc ible from Na ture an d exem p li ed in the Works of the
Archite cture , as
G reek a n d G othic ArC hitec ts B E L G ARRETT, Archi te c t Illus tr a te d as 6d
W
. . . . .

Tbs M m e p recedi e Wor ks , i n

. .

5 ° n '
n o ha n d som e Vol , bou n d , en tit led
"
.

M OD E RN ARC HITE CT U RE , p rice 6s .

22. TH E AR T OF B UIL D ING, R udim en ts of Gen eral P rin ci les .

of C on s tr uc tion , M a teria ls us e d i n B uildin g S tren gt h an d Us e of M a te als,

Workin g D rawin gs , Sp ecifica t ions an d E sti m a tes By E D OESON,
,
. .
,

2 5 M AS ONR Y AND
. S TONE C UTTING R udim en tary T reatise
on the Prin c ip les of Ma son i c P ro c ti on an d the ir ap p lica t i on t o C on
st r uc ti on By E D WARD D O ESON, M
. &C as 6d t . fi . . .

4 2 C O
. TT A GE B UI L D I N G B y C B R U C E A L LE N , A rc hi tect . . .

Nin th E di tion rev is ed an d e n la rged Num erous Illustra tion s 1 s 6d

, . . . .

45 L IM E S , CE M E NTS , M OR TAR S , C ONCRE TE S , M A S TICS,

.

P L A ST E RING ac By G R B U RNE LL C E Twelft h E di t ion

, . Is 6d . .
, . . . . .

LOND ON : C ROSBY L OC KWOOD AND 000 ,

 WEALE
'
S RUDIM ENTARY SERIES .
5
A rc h i t e c t u r e , B u i l d i n g, e t c , con ti n ued . .

5 7 W A R .M I N G A N D V E N T I L A TI OIV . An E x osi tion of the

G en eral Prin ci p les as up l ied to D om es tic an d Publi c uildin gs M in es ,
L i ghthouses , Ship s , &c y C T OIILINSON, . . &c . Illus tra ted .
33 .

1 11. AR C H E S , PIE RS , B UTTRE S S E S , é o ‘

. E xp erim en tal E ssay s
on the Prin c ip les of C ons tructi on . By W . B AND L . Illus t ra ted . 1 3. 6d .

1 1 6. TH E A C O US TICS OF P UB L IC B UIL D INGS ; or, The

Pr i n c ip les of the S c i e n ce of Soun d a sl ied to the p urp oses of theiArchi wct an d
B uilder B y T R OG E R S u n H , M
.
-
. p
. Arc hi tec t . Illus tra ted . 1 3. 6d .

1 2 7. AR CH ITE C T UR AL M OD E L L ING IN PA PE R, the Art O f.

B y T A RIC HARDS O N, Archit e c t
. . . Illus tra t ed . Is .
‘
6d .

1 38 . VITR UVIUS TH E AR CH ITE C TURE OF M AR C US

VITR UVIUS P OL L O In Te n B oo s k
Tran slated from the L a tin by
J
. .

OS EPH G WILT, With 2 3 Plates 5 3 . .

1 30. GRE CIA N AR CH ITE C T URE , An I qui ry in to the Prin ciples

n
B ea uty in ; w i th an H is tori c a l V iew of the Ri se an d Progress of the Art in
of
G reec e B y the E ARL or AB E RD E E N I3
The two t rea d i n g Worhs i n O n e h a n ds om e Vol , ha lf boun d, en ti tled ANCIE NT
. .
° ° “
e .
”
ARC H ITECT RE , { ri ce 6 s U .

1 32 . TH E E RE C TION OF D WE L L ING - H O USE S . Ill us trated by

a Persp ec ti v e V iew , Pla n s , E lev a t ion s , an d Se c t ion s of a p a ir of Sem i
de tached Villas , wi th t he S p ecifi c a ti on , uan ti t ies , an d E s t i m a tes , are By Q
K
.

S H B ROO S
. . New E di ti on , with Pla tes as 6d :
. . . .

1 56 .
Q UANTITIE S AND M E AS URE M E NTS , H ow’to C alculate an d
k k
Ta e the m in B ric lay ers , M as on s , Plaste re rs , Plum be rs Pa in ters , Pa p er
Wk
’ ’ ’ ’

ha n gers , G ilders , Sm iths , C a rp e n te rs , a n d oin ers

’ ’ ’ ’ ’
or By A C J . . .

B EATON, Archi tect an d S ur vey or New a n d E n lar ged E di t ion Illus

.

1 s 6d . . . . .

1 75 . L O CK WOOD é C O S B UIL D E R S AND C ONTRA C TOR S ‘

.
’ ’ ’

PRIC E B O O K c on ta in in g the la tes t Pri ces of al l ki n ds of B ui lde rs M a te ria ls

’
.

an d L a bour, an d of a ll Tra des c on n ec te d wi th B uildin g, &c arc E dited

L
by F :T W M I L E R, Architec t Publ is hed a n n ua l ly 33 6 d ha lf boun d, 4s
. .

—
. . . . . . . .

i sz . CAR PE TR Y A D N OI E R Y TH E E LE ME NTARY P RINN N

C IPLl s or C AR E NT R hiefly c om p os e d from the S ta n da rd Wor
P Y of k
With Addi tion s , Al te ra t ion s , a n d C orre c tion s
.

TH OMAS TRE D GOLD , C E .

from the W or s of t he m os t R ec en t A uthori ties , an d a T R E ATIS E O N

.

k
JO INE RY b E WYND IIAII TARN. M A Fourth E dit ion , R e v is e d an d
. . .

e xte n ded , w i t n um e rous Il lus t ra t ion s 3s 6d : [f us t p u bl zlrhed . . .

C ARPE TR Y A D N OI E R Y N
A TL AS of 35 P lates t o N .

acc om p an y the a bov e W it D es c rip tiv e Le tterp res s 4to 6s ; c loth, 7 s 6d.
. . . . .

1 85. TH E C OM PL E TE M E A S UR E R th e M easurem en t of B oards,

G lass &c ; Un eq ua l s ided, S ua re -s i ded, O cta gon a l si ded, Ro un d Ti m be r
. .
- -

a n d S t on e , a n d S ta n din g im be r, a c B y RIC HARD H ORTON Fifth . .

E dit ion 4s ; s tron gly boun d in lea ther , 5 3

. . .

1 8 7. N
H I TS T O YO U G A R CH ITE C TS . B y G N IG HTWICE . W .

New E dit ion B y G H G UILLAUIIE Illus tra ted 3s 6d :t

. . . . . . .

1 88 . H O US E P AIIVTING, GRAINING , M A RBL ING , AND S IGN

WRITING a Pra c tic al M a n ual of w ith a C ours e of E lem en ta ry D r awi n g
for H o use-Pa in te rs , S ign - W rit e rs &c , an d a C ollec t ion of Us e ful Rec e i ts
,

LL
B y E IS A D A ID S O N Fourth Edi ti on V
With C oloured Pla tes 5 3 c oth p
.

. . . . .

lim p ; 6s C loth boa rds . .

1 89. TH E R UD IM E NTS OF PRA C TICAL B RICKL A YING

In S ix S ec tion s : G e n era l Pri n c ip l es ; Arc h D raw in C utt in g , an d S e tti n g
Poin tin g ; Pa v i n g , T ilin g , M a te ri a ls ; S la t i n g an Pl a s te r i n g ; Pra c t ic a
G eom e try , M e n s ura ti on , ac B y AD AII H AH H OND . . F ifth E di ti on Is 6d . . .

191 . PL UM B ING . A Text B ook to the Practi ce - of the Art or C raft of

the Plum be r i th C ha p t e rs u W on H ouse D ra in a ge . Fourth E di tion
W
. .

ith 330 Ill us tr a t ion s By P . W . . U C H AN 3s 6d : . . .

'

a The 2 sn d sl a tes
‘
tha t thes e v ols . m ay be ha d s tron g ly bou n d at 6d . ex tra .

STATIONE RS
’
7 , HAL L C OURT . LUDGATE H ILL , E . C.
6 WE ALE S ’
RUDIM ENTARY SE RIES .

Arc h i t ec t u re , B u i l d i n g , e t c , con ti n ued . .

1 92 TH E TIM B E R IM P OR TE R S TIM B E R M E R C H ANT S,

.
’
,

a n d B UIL D E R S S TAND AR D G UID E B y RIC H ARD E G RANDI ’

. . .

S ec on d E dition , Rev ise d .

334
2 06. A B OOK ON B UIL D ING, a h a
'
a nd E ccle n a s tzca l , in cluding
’

C H URC H R E STO RAT ION With the Theo of D om es a n d t he G rea t Py ram id,
K
.

8t e B y S i r E D M U ND B EC
.
Q C F R AS 4s 6d t E TT, B a rt LL . . .
, . . . . .

2 26 . TH E 7 01 NTS M AD E AND US E D B Y B UIL D E R S in the

C on s truct ion of v ar ious ki n ds of E ng in eeri n g a n d Archite ct ura l Wor s By k
WYV ILL J C HRIST , Ar chitec t Y
.

. . With up wards of 1 60 E n gra v i n gs on Wood 334 .

28 S O F WO OD A ND IRON
TH E C ONS TR UC TION OF R O OFI
’
~
.

B E WYND HAII TARN, M A , E di ti o n , re v ise d 1 3 6d

L
. . .

E E M E NTAR Y D E C ORA TION : as a p lied t o the In terior

. . .

2 2 9.
a n d E xteri orD ec ora ti on of D wellin g -H ous es , &c y .
JAIsE S W . FACE Y Ju , n.
Il lustra ted w ith S ixty -e ight e xp lan a t ory E n grav in gs . as .

230 . H AND RAIL ING ( A P ractical Trea tis e on ) S how in g New and .

S im p l e M ethods for hudin the Pitc h of the Plan k, D ra w in g t he Moulds

Sq ua rin g the Wrea th
,

B ev el lin g, Join ti n -u
p, an . B y G E O RGE C OLLINOS .

Illus trated w i th P a tes a n d D iag ra m s 1 3 6d, . .

2 47 . B UIL D ING E S TA TE S R udi m en ta ry Treatise on the D evel p

a
o
m en tS al e , Purchase , an d G en er al M an a gem en t of B uil di n g L a n d in cludi ng
t he orm a ti on of S t ree ts a n d S e we rs , a n d the Req uir e m e n ts oi Sa nitary
A uthori ti es B y FOW E R M AITLAND , S urve y or
. Ill us tra t e d 23L . . .

2 48 . P OR TL AND CE M E NT F OR US E RS B y H E NRY FAHA, .

Assoc M In st C E . Se con d Edi t ion , c orrec ted Illus tra ted 2 3

. . . . . . .

z 52 . B RICK WORK a Practical Treati s e, em b ody i n g the General

a n d H igher Pr i n ci p les ! of B ric kl ay in g , C utt i n g a n d S e t ti n &c B F
WALK E R giuildi C
. .

, C e rtific ate d by t he S c ie n c e an d Art D e p ar tm en t in n ir on

s tr uc ti on , S ol i d G eo m e try , 8tc IS 6d
TH E TIM B E R M E R CH ANT S , S A W M IL L E R S , AND
. . .

’ ’
2 53 .
-

IM PO RTE R S FR E IG H T- B O O K AND A S S IS TA NT B y Wu RICE

’
.

W i th a C hap ter on S p e eds of Sa w -M ill M a c h i n e r , arc By

.

ARDS ON
an d a L on don P ri c e L i s t fo r y im b
L
. .

M POWIS B A E ,
. er and
D ea l S a win g, &c .
, 1 88 4. [3m p u bl zlrhed .

S H IP B UIL D ING , NA V IG AT IO N, M A RINE

E NG INE E R ING , E T C .

5 1 . NA VAL AR CH ITE C T UR E . An E x osi ti on of the E lem en tary

Pri n c ip les of the S c ie n c e a n d the ir Pra c t ic al p p lica t ion t o Na val C onstrue
t i on By.
J . PEAKE . f
Fi th Edi t ion , w i th Pla tes a n d D ia gra m s 3s. 6d : . .

S H IP S F OR O CE AN AND RIVE R S E R VICE , E l em en tary

and Prac t ic a l Prin c i les of the C on s truc ti on of B H A 8 0 1110 11 a ,
Wi th an p p en dix 1 3 6d
. . .

S urv or of t he Roy a Norw e Na

A g
. . . .

A N TL AS OF E GR VI G to Illustrate the above. Twelve N N

lar ge foldin g p la tes Roy a l 4to, c loth 7 3 6d . . . .

54 M A
.S TI IVG , M A S T -M AKI N G , A N D RIG GING OF S H IPS ,

Rudim en Trea tise on Al s o Ta bles of Sp ars R i gi n g Bloc ks C hain ,

Wire an d em Rop es &c , rela tive t o ev e ry c lass v essels B y OEERT

. , ,
.

ifteen th E di t i on
.
,
m em e N A Illust ra te d
, . . . .

IR ON S H IP -B UIL D ING . Wi th Practical E xam ples an d D etails

for the Use of Ship O w n ers a n d S hip B ui lde rs B y OHN G RANT H AII, C on . J
s ui tin g E n gi n eer a n d Na v al Archite c t sth E di ti on , wi th A ddi ti ons 4s
. .

. . .

A N A TL A S OF F OR TY PL A TE S to Illustrate the above .

F ilt h E diti on . 4to, boards

‘
.
38 s .

TH E S AIL OR S S E A B O OK : R udim en tary Treatise

’
55 . a on
Na vi ga ti on . By JAM G RE E NWOO D, B A
ES . With n um e rous Woodcuts and
B y W H R OS SE R
.

C olo ur ed Pla tes . Ne w a n d e n la rged edit ion . 23 M t . . . .

a
“
The i n d i c a tes th a t t hes e be ha d
v ols . m ay s t r on gly bou n d at 6d . ex tra .

LO ND ON 2 C RO S B Y L O C KWOOD AND C O . ,
8 WEALE S RUDIMENTARY SERIES.
’

A g r i c u l t u r e , G a r d e n i n g , e t c , con ti n ued . .

2 0 9 TH E. TRE E PL ANTE R A ND P L ANT P R OPA GA TOR .

A Pra ctica l M an ua l on t he Prop a ga t ion of Fores t Trees , Fruit Trees,

Floweri n g Shrubs , Fl ow erin g Plan ts , arc B y SAM U E L “ 0 0 D
7
2 34 . .

2 1 0. TH E TRE E PR UNE R A P racti cal M an ual on the P run ingof .

Fruit Trees in c ludin g a ls o the ir Tra i n in g an d Re n ov a ti o n ; a l s o the Pruning

of Shrub s , Cli m be rs , a n d Flow e ri n g Pla n ts B y SAMU E W OOD . L .

Nos 2 09 6 210 in O n e Vol , ha n ds om ely ha lf bou n d, en t itl ed TH E Tm - “

L L
.

B y SAM E WO O D
.

P ANTE R, PRO P AG ATOR, AND PR NE R

”
UP r i c e 53 . U . .

2 1 8. TH E H A Y A ND S TR A IV M E A S UR E R B ei n g Ne w Tables
for the U se of A uc t io n eers , V a lue rs , Farm ers , H a y an d S t raw D ea lers, so
J
B y O H N S T E E E Fourth E dition 2 3 L . . .
.

222 . S UB URB AN F ARM ING . The L ay i n g- out an d C ul tiv ation of

Farm s , a da p ted to the Pro duce of M ilk, B utt er an d C he es e , E ggs Poultr
y,
an d Pi gs B y Prof OH N D O NA
. .
‘

J L DS O N a n d .
,

R S CO TT B U R N . 3s 6dt . .

2 3I . TH E A R T OF GRA FTING A ND B UD D ING . B y C HARLES

With Il lus tra t ion s . as . 6d t .

2 32 . C O TTA GE GAR D E NING ; 01 , F low ers , Fruits , an d V egetables

for S m a ll G a rde n s . B y E H OBD A . Y . 1 s. 6d .

2 33 . GA RD E N RE CE IP TS E dited by C HARLE S W Q UIN Is 6d

. . . . .

2 34. TH E KITCH E N A ND M ARKE T G ARD E IV C om piled .

by C . W . S H Aw , E ditor of Ga r de n in g Il l us t rated .
”
33 4
2 30 D RAINING AND E M B A NKING . A Practi cal Treatise, em
bod in g the m os t rec e n t e xp e ri e n c e i n the Ap p l ic a t ion of Im p rov e d Methods .

By O H N SC OTT , la t e Pro fess or of Ag ric ul ture a n d R u ra l E c on om y at the

Roy a l Agri cult ural C oll e ge , C i re n ces te r . With 68 Ill us tra tion s 1 3 6d . . .

2 40 . IR RIGA TION AND WA TE R S UP PL Y A Trea ti se on Water .

M ea dows , Se w a ge Irriga t ion , Wa rp in g &c on the C o n s tr uct ion of Wells, .

P on ds a n d Res e rv o i rs ; a n d on R a iS i n g Wa te r by M a c hi n e ry for Agri cul

,

t ura l and
,

D om es t ic P urp ose s . B y Prof . J OH N SC OT T . Wit h 34 Illus . 1 3. 6d .

2 41 . F ARM R OAD S , FE NCE S , AND GA TE S . A Practical

Trea t is e on t he Roa ds , Tra m w a y s , a n d Wa t e rw a y s of t he Farm ; the
Pri n c ip les of E n clos ures ; a n d t he diil e re n t in ds of Fe n c e s , G ates, and
'

k
S tiles B y P rofes sor O H N S C OTT
. J
With 7 5 Illust ra t ion s 1 3 6d . . . .

2 42 . FARM B UIL D INGS . A Prac tical Treatis e

th e B uildings on
n e ce s s a ry fo r v a ri ous k
in ds of Fa rm s , t hei r Arra n ge m e n t a n d C on s truction,
in cludin g Pla n s a n d E s t im a tes B y Prof O H N S C OTT Wi t h 1 05 Illus as . . J . . .

B ARN IM P L E M E NTS A ND IA C H INE S

II A Practical
‘

2 43. .

T re a t is e on the Pow e r t o the O p e r a t ion s of A g ri c ulture and

App lic a t ion of
;
on v a r i ous M a c hin es u s e d i n the Th r es hi n g
-
ba rn , i n t he S t o c - a r d an d in the
y k
S C OTT W i th 1 2 3 Illus t ra ti on s as
,

D ai ry , 8t c B y Pr of . .
J . . . .

2 44. FIE L D IM P L E M E NTS A ND M A CH INE S . A Practical

T re a ti s e on the V arie t ies n ow in us e , w i th Prin c ip les a n d D e ta ils of C on
s tru c t ion the i r Poi n ts of E xc e l le n c e , an d M an a g em e n t
W
B y Profe ssor JOHN .

SC OTT i th 1 38 Illus tra ti on s

. as . .

2 45 . A GR IC UL T URAL S UR VE YING . A Prac tical Treatise on

L a n d S urv ey i n g, L e v e l l in g , a n d S e tt in g -out ; a n d on M eas urin g an d Esti
ua n t i t l e s , W ei ts a n d V a lues o f M a t er ia ls , Produce , S toc , etc k
gé
m a t in g
i th62 Illus tra t ion s
.

B y Pr of ouu S oon . . .

Nos 2 9 to 2 45 i n O n e Vol , ha n d so”m ely ha lf bou n d en ti tle d TH E C OMPLETI

.
- .
“

T E xT 0 0 K OE FARM E NGINE E R ING B y Profe ss or OH N S C O TT Pn ice u s . . .

2 50 . M E A T PR OD UC TION . A M an ual for P roducers , Distributors,

st c . By J OHN E WART . 2 3. 6d i .

LO ND ON : C RO SBY LOC KWOOD AND CO.

,
 WEALE ’
S RUD IMENTARY SE RIES. 9

M AT H E M AT IC S , A R IT H M E T IC , E T C .

32 . MA TH E M A TICAL INS TR UM E NTS a Treatis e on ; in , which

the ir C on s tr ucti on an d the M e thods
Test in g Adj us tin , a n d Us in the m of
are c on c ise ] E xp la in ed By F H u m an , A of e Roy a l M g
3
. il itary . . . .

Aca dem y , o olwic h O ri gi n a E diti on , i n I v ol , Il lus tra te d 1 3 6d

. . . . .

( No
“
I In orde r i n g th e a bov e be ca r ef u l to s ay ,
'

O m b n a l E di tion to di sti n
t
.

N
'

g m s h i t f r om he E n la rg e d E d i t i on i n 3 v ols ( os 1 68 -
9 . .

76 D E.S C R IP TIVE GE OM E TR Y, an E le m en tary Treatise on ;

w i th The ory of Sha dow s a n d of Pe rs p e c t iv e , e xt r a c te d fr om the F ren ch of
a
G M O NG E
. To w hich is a dded, a des c rip t ion of t he Pri n c i les a n d Pra c t ic e
.

of Isom e t ri c a l Proj ec t ion By F H E AT H E R, M A Wi t x4 Pla tes as

.
J . . . . . .

( 78 P R. A C T IC A L P L A NE G E O M E T R Y : g i v i n g th e S i m p lest
Modes o f C on s tr uc ti n g Fi res c on ta in ed in on e Pla n e a n d G eom e trical C on
s truc t ion o f t he G r oun d y F H E ATH E R, M A Wi th 2 1 5 Woodc ut s as
.
J . . . . . .

83 C OM M E R CIAL B O OK-KE E P ING Wi th C om m erci al P hras es

. .

an d F orm s in E n glish F ren ch, Ita l ian , a n d G e rm an By AM ES H AD DON, J

M
.

MA . .
, Ar i thm e t ic al as ter of Ki n g s C olle ge S c hool , L on don
’
TS 6d . . .

84 ARITH M E TIC ,
. a R udim en tary Trea ti s e on : wi th full E xp lan a
t ion s of i ts Theore ti c al Prin ci p les , E xa m p les for Pra c t ic e a n d n um e rous By
U
.

Profes s o r J
R YO NG Ten th E dit ion , correc ted rs 6d
. . .

A KE Y to t he a bove c on ta in in g S ol ut ion s in full to t he E xerci ses , to

. . .

the r
w i t h C o m m e n ts , Exp la n a t ion s , a n d Im rov ed Proc esses , for the s o of
Tea chers a n d Un ass is ted L ea rn e rs By R YO NG Is 6d . . U . . .

85 E Q UA TIONAL ARITH M E TIC ,

. a pli ed t o Q uesti ons of In terest ,
An n ui t i es , L ife Ass ura n ce,
G e n era l om m er c e ; w i th va ri ous Ta bles b y an d
whi ch a ll C a lc ula t ions m a y be gre a tly fa c i lita ted B y W H I S E 2s . . P LY . .

86 A L GE B R A , th e E le m e n ts O f
. By AM ES H A D D O N, M A . J . .

With A p e n dix, c on ta i n in g m is cellan eous In v es tiga tion s, an d a C ollec t ion

p
of P ro b em s in v a r ious p art s of Alg e bra 2s . .

' P
M A K“ AND C OM ANIO N t o the a bo v e B oo , form in g an e xte n s iv e re os itory oi k
fi
. .

S olv e d E xa m l es an d Problem s i n Illus t ra tion of the v a rious xp e dien ts

n ec es sa ry in ge bra i c a l O p era t ion s B y J R YO NG 1 s 6d . . . U . . .

88 E UC L ID , TH E E LE M E NTS O F : wi th m an y
. additi on al P ropositions
89 an d E xp l a n a tory Notes : to w hich is p re fixed an In troduc tory E s sa y on
Y LA
, ,

L ogi c W C E
. B y H E NR 6d x , . . 2s . .
’
‘ ’ S old a l so s a r a te ly , m s
g. .

88. E UC L ID , The Firs t Three B oo s y H E NR L AW, C E r s 6d k Y . . . .

L Y
.

89. k
E UC ID , B oo s 4, 5 , 6, I I, I2 B y H E NR L AW, C E Is 6d . . . . .

90 . ANA L YTICA L C ONIC S E C TIONS ,

GE OM E TR Y AND
By JA
M ESH NN A A Ne w E dition , by Profes s or. R YO U NG J . . .

9 I P L
. A N E T R IG O N O M E T R Y , th e E l e m en ts o f B y A M E S . J
H AHN, form erly M a the m a t ic a l M as te r of Kin g s C ollege , L on don rs 6d
’
. . .

9 2 S P
. H E R I C A L TR I G O N O M E T R Y , the E l e m e n ts o f B y AM ES . J
H AH N R evised by C HAR E S H B OWLING , C E
. Is L . . . .

O r w i th The E lem e n ts of P la n e Trigon om et ry , i n O n e Vol u m e, 2 s 6d . .

93 M .E N S U R A TI ON A N D M E A S U R IN G W i th th e M ensuration .

a n d L ev e ll in g of L a n d for the P oses of M ode rn E n gi n eeri n g By T

K
. .

BA E R, C E C E New
Illus t ra ted Is 6d
E dit ion b E UGE NT,
W
. . . . .
.

N
. .

IOI . D IFF E R E TIAL CAL UL US , E lem en ts of the B y S B . . . .

WooL H O Us E , ac xs 6d . . .

Ioz . INTE GRA L CA L C UL US , R udim en tary Tre atl s e on the By .

H OME RS H AM C ox, B A Illus tra te d Is . . . .

Ios. MNE M ONICAL L E S S ONS G E O M ETRY, A LG E E RA, AND .

T RIGO NO M ET Rv , in E M n em on ic al L es s on s B y the Rev THOMAs . .

P E NYNGTON KIRE MAN, A xs 6d . . . .

I36 . AR ITH M E TIC , R udim en ts for the U se of S chools an d S el f

In s tr uc t ion By JAMs s H AD D O N, A Revi s ed by A A RM AN Is 6d . .

A KE Y T o H AD DO N S R UD IM E NTAR Y A RIT H ME TIC B y A ARMAN 1 s 6d

. . . . .

’
1 37 . . . . . .

a
“
The 2 i n d ica tes tha t thes e v ol s . m ay be ha d s tron g ly bou n d at 6d . ex tra .

STATIONE RS
’
7, HAL L C OURT , LUDGATE HIL L , E e . .
l o WEALE ’
S RUD IM ENTARY SERIE S .

M a th em A r i t h m e t i c , e t c , con ti n ued
at i c s , . .

I6 S D RA WING A ND M E A S URING INS TR UME NTS In clud

in g—
. .

I In s tru m en ts e m p lo ed in G eom e tri c al a n d M ec h a n i ca l D rawing

.
,
an d in the C on s tr uc t ion , op y in g , a n d M eas urem en t of M ap s a n d Plans .

II In s tru m e n t s used for the n O ses of A c c ura te M eas ure m e n t and for
fiT
.

A ri thm e t ic a l C om p ut a tion s y F H E ATH E R, M A Ill us t ra ted Is 6d . . . . . . .

1 69 . OP TICAL INS TR UM E NTS In clud in g ( m ore esp ec ially )Tele .

sco s , M ic ros c op e s a n d Ap a ra tus for roduc in g c op ie s o f M a an d Plans

Bi ss
, .

IN
b by A
G 1 16
B F Ill us tra ted
R VE Y
U
0 to . . . RAT H E R, . . . rs .

t 70 . S D A S TR ONOM ICA L INS TR UM E NTS

—
In cl udin gh I In s trum en ts U se d for D e te rm in in g the G eom e tr ic a l Fea tures
.
.

of a p ort i on of G ro un d II In st rum e n ts E m p loy e d i n As tro n om i ca l O bserva

. .

“
t ion s By .
J
F H E AT HE R, M A Illus tra wd
. . Is 6d
'
a b v e th r ee v ol u m es f or m a n en la rg em en t of the A a tha r s or ig i n a l work
. . . . .

fl, “ T h e o ,
M a them a ti ca l In s t r u m en ts 5 “ No 32 i n the S eri es )
”

$
. . .

1 68 M A TH E M A TICA L IAS TR UM E TS
. By F H E ATHER, N .
J . .

M A E n larged E diti on , for the m ost p art en t irely re - w rl tte n The 3 Paris as
'

x6o . . . .

n o ab ove , in O n e thic V olum e k

“ri th n um e rous Illus tra t ion s as 6d r
W
. . .

N
. .

1 58 TH E S L ID E R UL E , A D H O
. T0 USE IT ; c on tainin
full , eas y an d s im lo In s tr uct ions to p erform all B us in ess C a lc ula ti ons v i
u n exa m p ied ra p i ty a n d a c cura B y C HARLES H OAR E , C E Wi th 2
°

. .

S li de Rule i n t uc of c over 23 t k . . .

1 96 . TH E OR Y OF C OM P O UND INTE RE S T AND ANNUI

T IE S ; w i th Ta bl es of L oga rithm s for the m ore D ifi c ul t C om p uta tions of
In te res t , D i sc oun t , An n uit ies , &c B F EDO R TH OMAN 4s t . . .

1 99 TH E C OM P E ND IO US CAL C L A TOR or, E as y an d C ncise

.
o
M ethods of Perform in g the various Arithm e ti ca l O ora ti on s re u xed in
C om m e rc ial an d B us in ess Tran sa c t i on s ; t o e the r w i t Use ful Ta bes By fl .

D O G O RMAN Tw e n ty - s ixth E di t ion , c a re ly revise d by C NORRIS 3

’
. . s, . .

-b
c lo th li m 3s 6d s tr o l y h lf o un d i n lea the r
g
i
r a . . .

2 04 M A TH
. C
M A TI A L A B L E S , for Tri on om etri cal , A s tron om ical,
an d Na uti c al C al c ul a t ion s ; t o w hich i s p re xed a Trea t ise o n L ogarithms
Y
.

B y H E NR L AW, C E To ge the r wi th a S eri es of Ta bles for Navigation

. .

an d Na uti ca l As tro n om y B y Prof R YO NG New E di ti on J U

W
. . . . . .

L O GARITH M S i th M a them atical Tables for T rigon om etli cal,

.

As tron om ic a l , a n d Na uti ca l C alc ula t ion s B y H ENR L AW, New . Y

a n d R e v i se d E di ti on ( Form in ar t of the a bov e W o r ) 33 k
WE IGH OF AL L w ol f
. . .

M E A S URE S S , AND M ONE YS

“

22 1. ,

TIONS , a n d an An aly s is of the C hris ti an H ebre w , an d M ahom etan

C a le n da rs B . w . s . B . WOOLH O U SE F S S . Sixth E dit ion . 2s t

TO TH E C ONS TR C C
.

APP L I
.

z z 7. M A TH E M TIC S AS ED
TIVE A R TS Ill us trat in g the v a ri ous
. roc esses of M a the m a t ic a l Investi
a t ion , by m ea n s of A r i thm e t ic a l a n d im lo Al e bra ic a l E q ua tions and
gTa c t ic al E xa m p les B y FRANC IS C AM IN, . P .E . a n d Edi t ion .

P H YS IC A L S C IE NC E , NAT URA L P H IL O
S O P H Y, E TC .

1 . CH E M IS TR Y B y Professor GE O RG E F OWNE S , F R S With

. . . .

A Ap l ic a tion
e n dix on the C hem is try to Agr i c ultu
of
P
U
an

2. NA T RAL P H IL S OPH Y, In troduction to the S tudy of. By

C . TO M LN
I S O N. Woodc uts . 1 3 6d . .

6 . M E CH A NICS , R udim en tary Treatis e on . B y C H ARLES Tou

LN
I SO N. Illus t ra te d . rs . 6d .

7 E L E C TRICIT Y;
. the G en eral P rin ci les Of E lectri cal
showin g
S c ien c e , an d t he p urp os es to w hi ch i t has been a p p i i B S ir W SNOW
Wi th A ddit ion s by R SAB INE , C E , S A Is 6d }
.

H ARR IS , &C
W
. . . . .

G A L VA NIS M
. . . .

B Sir S NOW H ARRIS

. New E dition by . .

R O B E RT SA Is 6d
M A G NE TIS M ; bein a con cis e E xp osi ti on of the Gen eral Prin
. . . . .

8
g
.
.

c ip e s of M a n e ti c a l S c i e n ce
l g B S ir W S NOW H ARRIS New Edition . .

M NOAD , Ph D ith 1 65 Woodc uts

.

r e v i s ed b H
y 3s 6 d :
. . . . . . .

Th e t i n d i c a tes t h a t t h es e
“

v ols . m ay be ha d s t r on g ly bou n d a t 6d . ex tra.

L O NDO N 3 C RO SB Y L OC KWOOD AND CO .

,
12 WE AL E S ’
RUD IME NTARY SE RIES .

IND US T R IA L A ND US E F U L A R T S .

2 3 B R IC KS A ND TIL E S R udi m en tary Treati s e on th e M anufac

.
,

t ure o f By E D O E S O N, Illus t ra ted, 3s t

WA TCH E S
. .
.

67 . C L OC KS , , A ND BE LL S , a R udi m en tary Treatise

on . B y S ir E D M U ND B C R E T E T LL D
, Q C Sev en th E dition rev is ed an d en
. .
, . . ,
la r ed 8 6d l i m 6d c l oth boards
I ROOTTON S
. . . 8 . . .

OF D O OR L O CKS
'

C O VS T . C om pil ed from the

Pa A C H O B B S a n d E di te d b C H AR E S TO M INS O N, F R S
e rs of L L With
A di ti on s by R OB E RT MAL LE T , M I E
. . . . .

Il l us 2 s 6d . . . . . . .

1 62 . TH E B RA S S F O UND E R S M ANUA L ; In struc ti ons for

’

M ode ll in g P a tt e rn M a kin g M ouldin g, Turn in g , F il in g B urn is hing,

-

W ith C O Rec e ip ts W ALTE R

, ,

B ron z in g . arc . io us . &c . B G R AH AM . 2 s .t

2 0 5. TH E AR T OF L TTE R P A INT] G MADE E AS Y . By

J . G B AD E NOC H
. . Ill us tra ted w ith
full -p a g e E n gravi n gs of E xa m p les 1 1 12 . .

2 1 5. TH E G OL D S M ITH s H AND B OOK con tai n in g full Instruc

’

t ion s for t he A110 n g a n d Wo r in g of G old k

'

B y G E O RG E E G E E
L
. .

C OA C H B UI D ING , A Practi c al Treati se , H i s tori cal and

.

2 24 .

D es c rip ti v e W B R G E SS 2 3 6d ! U
EJ
B ' . . . . . .

225 . TH E S IL V S M ITH S H A ND B O OK, c on ta i n in g full In

’
.

s tr uc t io n s fo r t he All oy i n a n d W o r in g of S i lv e r B y G E O RG E E G EE k . . .

2 35 . P RA C TIC A L OR G N B UIL D ING B y “I E D IC KSON, . . .

M A P re cen t or of E ly C a thedral Ill us tr a ted s e 6 d !

TH E H AL L -M AR KING O F y E WE L L E R YP R A C TICALL Y
. . . . . . .

2 49 .
C ONS ID E RE D B y G E ORG E E G E E 3s : . . . .

M IS C E L L A NE O US V O L UM E S .

36 A . D IC TIONAR Y OF TE R Il/S i n AR C H ITE C TURE, used

B UIL D ING , E NGINE E R ING , M INING, M E TA L L UR O V, A R C HeE
O L O G Y, the F INE A R TS , 6 m B y O H N W E A E Fifth E di t ion Revised . L . .

by RO B E RT H U NT , F R S Ill us tra te 5 3 lim p ; 6s c loth bo a rds . . . . . .

50 . TH E L A W OF C ONTR A C TS F OR ORKS A ND SE R W
VIC E S B y D A ID G IB B ONs . V
Th ird E dition , e n la rge d 3s t . . .

1 1 2. M ANUAL OF D OIlIE S TIC M E D ICINE By R G O OD ING, . .

D A, M D. In te n de d as a Fa m ily G uide in a ll C ases of A cc i den t and

. . .

Em er g e n c y . Third E di tion . 2 s.!

t NA GE M E NT OF H E AL TH . A M an ual of H om e and
P e rs on a l H y g i en e. B y the Rev
,
. J AM E S B AIRD , B A . . Is .

1 50 .L OGIC , P ure an d A p plied B y S H E M M E NS 1 3 6d . . . . . .

1 5 3 S E L E C TIONS FR OM L O CKE S E S S A YS ON THE

’
.

H UM A N UND E RS TA ND ING With Notes by S H E MM E NS . . . . 2s .

1 54 GE NE RAL H INTS TO E M IGRANTS

. Noti ces of th e . vari ous
Fie lds for E m igra tion , H in ts on O utfi ts , Us e ful R e c ip es 81 6 . . 2 s.

1 57 . E M I
TH E G R A N T S G U ID E T O N A TA L B y R oom
’
.

AME S M ANN J F M S S e c on d E di ti on M a p as
, . . . . . .

1 93 H AND B O OK OF FIE L D F OR TIFICA TION, in ten ded fOI the

.

G ui da n c e of O fli c e rs Prep arin g for Prom otion B y Maj or W W

LL
. .

With 1 63 Woodc uts

.

KNO YS . .
3s t .

TH E H O US E M ANA GE R B e in g Guide to H ous ek ee

ke y Pic klin g an d P ese i g H ouse hold Work g
1 9 4. a
.

Pra c tic a l C oo r
2111 r rv n

ge of Wi n es H om e b
, ,

Ma m e t the T a ble a d D ess t C l l

na e n rewi g n er e a ra - n
B oudoir a n d D e i g
, ,

a d in c m a k i g t h
n - om n T a ellin g
, Stabl
e r ss n -r o
, r v ,
e
E o om y G d g O p a t ion s &c B y AN O L D H O US E RE E P E R 3s 6d :
—
c n ,
ar en in er , . . . .

1 94 HO U S E B O O K ( T h e ) C om p ri s i n g I T H E H O U S E M A NA GE R . . .

B y RALPH GOODING
.

B O LD H O US E E E E PE R
an II D O M E S T IC M E D IC INE
E
1 12
L J
. .
.
.
,
L D III M ANAG E M E NT or H E A TH . By AM E S B AIRD In On e Vol ,
81
. . .
.

s t ron gly ha lf- boun d, 6s

.
.

1 12

w “
Th e 1 i n d i ca tes th a t th es e v ol s . m ay be ha d s tr on g ly bou n d at 6d . extra .

L ONDO N 3 C RO SBY L O C KWO O D AND C O .

,
 V E AL E S E DUCATIONAL AND C LASSICAL SERIES
’
. I3

E DUCATIONAL AND CLASSICAL SERIE S .

H IS T O RY .

1. E n gl an d , O u t l i n e s of t h e
o f ; m ore esp ecially with H i st ory
re fe ren ce to the O r n an d Pro
33 of t he E u l ish C on st it ut ion
‘

By
L
W I LIAM D O G LAS U ifl L
.

A of H er MI TON, F
aj es ty s Pub
’
lic Record . . .

Ofi c e 4th E di t ion , rev ised

. c lothboa rds , 63 . .

5 . G r e e c e , O u t li n e s o f t h e H i s t ory o f ; i n conn ecti on with the

Rise of the Ar ts a n d C iv i liz a ti on in E urop e B y W D O GLAS H AMILTON . . U
-
of Un ivers i C olleg e , L on don an d E D WARD L EVIE N, M A , of B allio
b
. .

C ollege , 0 ord as 6d ; cloth oa r ds , 33 6d . . . . .

7 . R om e , O u t l i n e s of t h e H i s t or y of : from the E arli est P eriod

to the C hri s t ia n E ra an d the C om m en c e m e n t of the D ec lin e of the E m p ire .

By E DWARD L EV IE N, of Ba lliol C olle ge , O xford M a p , 2 8 6d ; c l bds 3s 6d . . . . . . .

9 . C h r on ol ogy of H i s t o A rt , L i t e r a t u r e , a n d P r ogr e s s,
from the C rea ti on of the W
a r] to the C on clus ion of the Fra n c o- G erm an War
W
.

The C on ti n ua ti on by D H AIIIL T ON, F S A 3s ; c loth boa rds , 3s 6d

. . . . . . . .

5 .
0 D a t e s a n d E v e n t s i n E n gl i s h H i s t ory , for the use of
C an dida tes in Public an d Priv a te E xa m in a tion s B y the Rev E . RAND u . . . .

E NG L IS H L A NG UA G E A ND M IS C E L L ANE O US .

II. G r am m o f t h e E n gl i s h T on gu e , S p ok en an d
ar ri tten . W
W
ith a n In troduc tion to the S tudy of C om p ara tive Philology . B y H D E
’
Y
C L AR E , D C L K Fourth Edi tion
. . xs 6d
. . . .

P h i l ol ogy : H an dbook of the C om arati v e P hilolog of E n glish,

An lo-Sax on Fris ian , Flem i sh or D utch w or Pla tt D utc H igh D utch y
or G
e rm an , Da n i sh, S w e di sh , Icel an di c , a t in , Ital ian , Fr en ch, Sp an i sh, an d L
.

Portuguese Ton gues B y H D E C AR E , D C L . IS Y L K . . . .

1 3. D i ct i on a r y o f t h e E n gli s h L an u a a s S p ok en an d
Wri tten C on ta in in g a bov e Ioc , oc o Words
. By
,
IrD E C L A D C L .
g
ge . . .

3 s 6
.d c l ot
.h b oar d s , 43 6d ; c om p l e te w i th the G R
A NAR. , c l oth . s 6d
for
N . .

48 . C om p os i t i on a n d P u n c t u a t i on , fam i li arly E xplai n

those w ho ha ve lm the S tudy of G ram m ar By STIN B RE NAN JU
fi
. .

1 7 th E di tion Is
W ord
. .

49 . D er i v a t i v e S l un g B ook - I Gi vin g the Origin ofE v ery

fr om the Gr eek, ti n , S axon , G e rm an , Teuton i c , D ut ch, Fre n ch, Spa nish,
a n d other L an gua ges wi th the ir p res en t Ac cep ta ti on a nd Pron un c i a ti on .

By J
ROWB OTE AII,
. Im p rov e d E dition xe 6d . . .

5 1 . Th e A rt of E x t em p or e S p e a k i n g : H i n ts for the Pulp i t, the

Sen a te, an d the B ar B y M B A TAIN, Vi c a r -G en er al an d Professor a t the
. . U
Sorbonn e Trans la tedfrom tha en ch 7 th E diti on , carefully c orrect ed as 6d
. .
. . .

52 . M in in an d Q u a i n g, wi th the S m en ces conn ected there

kH C OLLINS, L ecturer to
d
with Iret B oo
. of, for ools B . . .

the M in e rs Ass oc ia ti on of C orn wa ll an D evon

’
Is . .

P l d F t i P li t i l d P h i l G e o ap hy
53 . a ce s a n a c s n o c a a n y s c a ,
for C an dida tes i n E xa m in a ti on s B y the Rev E D GAR RAND , B IS

o
. . .

54 A n a l y t i ca l C h e m i s t r y
.
,
uali tativ e an d Q uan ti tati v e, a C urse
of To whic h i s p refixed a B ri Trea ti se up on M ode rn C hem i c al Nom en cla
W PINE an d G E ORGE E WE BSTE R as
.

t ure an d Not ation By . 11 . . . . .

TH E S C H OO L M A NA G E R S S E R IE S O F R E A D ING ”

B OO K S ,
Edited by the Rev A R G RANT, Rec tor of H itcham an d H on orary
form erly E M In sp e c tor of Schools
. . .

. . .

II TROD UCTORY PRIIIE R, 34

FIRST STAND ARD

S E COND
TRIRD
L E S SO Ns TRON TE E B IBLE
L
.

L E SS ONS FR O! TE E B IB E.
TE E G E OGRA H P Y or T R ev C . .

TE ORNTOII F ou r“ .

STATIONERS
’
1, E ALI. COURT, L DDGATE H ILL . E .c.
 '
I4 WEAL E S ED UC ATIONAL AND C LASSIC AL SE RIES .

F R E NC H .

2 4. F re n c h G r a m m a r. Wi th C om p lete an d C on cise R ules on the

G e n de rs Fre n c h No un s
of B y G L STRA SS, Ph D rs 6d . . U . . . .

2 5. F r e n c h - E n gl i s h D i c t i o n a r y . C om p risin g a large n um ber of

New Term s used in E n gi n eerin g, M in in g, St e B y A FRE D E WE S Is 6d . L L . . .

2 6. E n gl i s h - F r e n c h D i c t i on a r y . A LFRED 15 m
c
as . .

F r e n c h D i c t i on ar y ( as abov e 0 m p le te , in O n e VOL, 3
3 .
”
c l oth boards , 3s 6d fl, O r wi th the RANMAR, c loth boards , 4s 6d
. . . .

47 . F r e n c h a n d E n g l i s h P h r a s e B ook : con tain in Intro

duc tory L es son s , wi th Tra n sl a ti on s , sev e ra l V oc a bula ries of Wor a Col .

lec ti on of s ui ta ble Phrase s , an d E a sy Fa m ili a r D ialogues . rs . 6d .

G E RM AN .

39 G e.r m a n G r am m a r . A dap ted for E n glish S tuden ts, fiom '

H ey se s Theoretical an d Prac ti ca l G ram m ar, by D r G L S TRA SS 1 s. 6d

’
. . . U . .

4 0 . G e r m a n R e a d e r : A S eri es o f E xtr ac ts , carefully c ull ed from the

m os t a pp rove d Authors of G e rm a r ; wi th Notes , Phil ologi c al and Ex

p lan a tory B y G L S T RA SS , Ph
. . Is . U . g .

4 43
I - . G e rm a n T r i g l o t D i c t i o n a r y . B y . E S A H AM ILTON N . . . .

In Three Parts Pa rt I G erm a n -Fre n ch-E u ish

. Part II E n glish-Ger
. . . .

m an - Fre n c h Part III Fren ch -G erm an - E n g ish

. .
as , o r c loth boards, “ . .

4 43
1 - G e r m a n T r i g l o t D i c t i o n a r y ( as a bo v e ) g
, to e th e r w i th Germ an
8: 39 . G ram m ar ( NO in O n e V olum e , c loth boa rds , 53.
.

ITA L IA N .

2 7. It al i an G r a m m a r , arran ged in Twen ty L essons , with a C ourse

ofE xe rc is es B y A FR E D E WE S
. 1 3 6d L L . . .

2 8. It a li an T r i g l ot D i c t i on a ry , w herein the Gen ders of all the

Ita l ian a n d F ren ch Noun s a re c a re fully n oted down B y A FRED ELWES . L .

V o I Ita l ia n
l . .
- E ng li s h-
F re n ch 2 s 6d . . .

30 . It a l i a n T r i g l ot D i c t i on a r y . B y A E L WE S Vol. 2 . . .

E n glish- Fre n c h - Ital ia n 2 3 6d . . .

32 . It a l i a n T r i g l ot D i c t i on a r y B y A L FRE D E LWE S . Vol 3 . . .

F ren c h -Ital ian - E n glis h 2 8 6d . . .

b I O V l . 6d
It a l i a n T r i g l ot D i c t i o n a r y ( as a ov e
). n n e o .
, 7
8 .

32 . C loth boards .

S P A NIS H A ND P O R T U G UE S E .

34 . S p an i s h G ra m m a r, in a S im ple an d P rac ti cal F orm . With

a C o urs e of E xe rc ises . By A L
F RE D E WE S L . rs. 6d .

35 . S p a n i s h E n gl i s h a n d E n
- fi s h - S
p a n i s h D i c t i on a r y .

In c l udin g a large n um ber of Tec hn ica l erm s used in M in in g E n gi n eeri n g, &c , .

L
,

with the rop er Ac c en ts a n d the G en der of ev e ry Noun B y A FRE D E LwEs

g
.
.

l t b d O w i th th e G R A u u A R c l oth boards , 63
o o , 5
4 s . c a r s 3 r . ,
.

P or t u g e s e G r a m
u m i S ii n l e an d P ra c ti c a l F o r m
55 a r, n a p .

L
.

Wi th a C ourse of E xercises B y AL FRE D E WE S IS 6d . . . .

6 P or t u g e e u E n g i sh
l d E n l i s h - P or t u
g u e s e D i c
5 . s - a n g
t ion a ry In c lu din g a la r ge n u m be r o f T e ch n i c a l T e rm s use d i n M in in g,
N
.

i
E n g ee i & c , w i th t he p o A cc en t s a n d t h e G e n d e r o f e v e ry oun

g
n r n g, r er
.

L L
.

B y A F R D E WE S l t b d s 6 3 O r W i t h th e G R AN E A R
E 5 ;
s c o o a r ,

N
.
,

M
. .

cl oth boar ds , 7 5 . [f a s t I /ced

H E B RE W .

H ebr e w G r am m a r B y D r B RE SSLAU Is 6d . . . . .

44 H . e br e w a n d E n gl i s h D i c t i on a r y , B iblical an d R abbinical
c on t a in in gt he H e brew a n d C ha l de e R oots of the O ld Tes ta m en t Post
R a bbin ic a l W
ri t in gs B y D r B RE SS A . . LU . 6s .

46 . E n gl i s h a n d H e br e w D i c t on a r y
i B y D r B R E S SL AU 3 8 . . . .

H e br e w V l l with
D i c t i on a ( as abov e), in w
T o o s , c om p ete, .

the G RANIIA R , c loth boa r s, rz s .

I6 WEALE S '
E DUCATIONAL AND C LASSIC AL SE RIE S.

G RE E K .

1 4. G r e ek G ra m m a r , in a ccordan ce wi th the Prin ci les an d P h il o

p
Iogi c a l R es ea rc he s of the m ost em in en t S chola r s of our ow n d B y H A NS
ay
LU
C A D E H AM I T O N 1 3 6d L . . .
.

G reek L e x i c on C on tain in g all the W ords in G en era l U se , wi th

Q
.

t he ir S ign ific a t ion s , In flec t i on s , a n d D oubtful ua n t i t ies . B y H E NR Y R

L
H AM I TON V ol I G ree - E n glish, 2 S 6 d ; V ol
. . . k . . . 3. E n gii s h G r eek , as Or
.

the Tw o V ol s i n O n e , 4s 6d : c loth boards , 5 3

. . .
.

G r ee k L e x i c on ( as above C om p le te, wi th the G E AMM A RJ D

I4, Is. ) .

I7 . O n e V ol .
, c loth boar ds , 6S .

G R E E K C L A S S IC S With E xplan atory Note s in E n glis h . .

I G r e ek D e l e ct u s
. C on tain in g E xtracts from C la ssic al A u th ors, .

w i th G e n ea log ica l V oc a bul a ri es a n d E x la n a t ory Notes b H YO U NG Ne w

y
E dit ion , w ith an im p rov e d an d e n la rg e d up p lem en t ry Voc a bula ry by
. .

U
H T C H ISO N, M A , of the H i gh Sc hool , G la s gow
. . x fi
on
. i .
J
2, 3. X e n o p h o n s A n a ba s i s ; or, The R etreat of the Ten Th ous a nd
’
.

Notes an d a G e ograp hica l Reg is ter, by H YO NG Part 1 Boo s i to iii , . U . k

k
. . .

Is . Part 2 B oo s iv t o v ii , Is. . . .

L u c i a n s S e l e c t D i al o gu e s The Text carefu revised, with

lly
’
4. .

G ra m m a t ical an d E xp lan a tory Not es , by H YO NG 13 . U . .

5 -1 2. om e r , The
H orks of W
A ccordin g to the Text of B AE UML E IN. .

Wi th Notes , C ritic a l a n d E xp lan atory , dra wn from the bes t a n d la test

Authorit ies , w i th Prelim in ary O bserva t ion s an d Ap p e n dic es , by T H . L . .

L B ARY, M A , D C L . . . . .

TH E ILIAD : Pa rt 1 B oo s i to v i IS 6d . k
Part 3 B oo s xii i . to xv i i i , 1 8 6d. . . . k .

k k
.

P a rt 2 B oo s v u to Is 6d. P a rt 4 B oo s xix t o xxi v , Is 6d

. . . . . .

k k
. .

TH E O D YSSI Y : Pa rt I B oo s i t o v i , 1 s 6d Part 3 B oo s xi i i t o xv i ii , 1 3 6d.

. . . . .

k
. . .

Pa rt 2 B oo s v i i to i , Is 6d P a t 4 B oo s xix to xxi v , an d k
I
. . . . . . . .

l ym-
n s , as .
'
1 3. P lat o s D i a l ogu e s : Th e A p ology of S ocra tes , the Gri to, an d
the t do F rom t he Te xt of C F H E RM ANN E dited wi th Note s , C ri tical
J V
. . . .

an d E xp l a n a tory , by the Rev AM E S D A IE S , M A as . . . .

1 4- 1 7 . H e r o d ot u s , Th e H istory of, chi efly a fter the T ext of G AIS F O RD .

With Prelim in a r O bserva ti on s an d Ap p e n dices , an d Notes, C ri tical an d

E xp l an a tory , b H L L B ARY M A , D C L y
g
. . .

he C li o a n d E n te e )
. . . .

Pa rt I ooks i i i .
( T , as . .

Pa rt 2
,
B oo s i ii , Iv The Tha l i a an d
. k elp om en e ), as . .

k
.

Part 3 B oo s v -v i i e Te s ic hore , E ra to, a n d P o] n ia )

p
a
.
, 28 . .

k
.

Pa r t 4 B oo s v iii , ix ( The
. ra n ia an d C all iop e )a n d n dex, 1 2 66 . .

N
. .

I8 . S op h oc l e s : ( E dip us Ty ran n us otes by H YO UNG Is . . . .

20 S o p h o c l e s : An ti gon e From the T ext of D IND O RF otes , . . N

J L
.

C rit ic al an d E lan a to ry , by the Rev O HN I NE R, B A as .

M . . .

23 . E u ri p i d es : ecuba an d M edea C hi cfiy from the Text of D 111 .

D OE E With Notes , C riti cal an d E xp lan atory , by W B E OWNE IGG S MITH ,

. .

M A, xs 6d
W
. . . .

2 6. E u r i p i d e s : A lc es tis C hi cfiy from the Text of D IND O RF . i th .

Notes , C ri ti c a l a n d E xp lan a te by O HN M I NE R , B A r s 6d J L . . . .

30 . E s c h y l u s : Prom e theus In ctus : The P rom etheus B oun d F rom .

the Te xt of D IND O RP E dit ed, w i th E n gl ish Notes , C riti ca l an d E xp la na tory ,

.

by the Rev AME S D AVIE S , M A . J Is . . .

32 . E s c h y l u s : S ep tem C on tra Thebes : Th e S ev en a gain s t T hebes .

F rom the T ext of D IND OE E E di te d, w i th E n glish Notes , C ri ti ca l a n d E x

J V
.

l t o b the R e v A M E S D A IE S , M A rs
p an a ry, y . . . .

0 A r i s t o p h a n e s : Ach am i an s C hiefly from the Tes t of C H .

4
. .
.

WE Iss With Notes , by C S T TO WNSHE ND , M A Is 6d . .

W
.

N
. . . .
.

4 1 . T u y d
h c i d e s : H i s t o r y o f th e P e l op o nn efl an ar o te s b y H . .

U
YO NG B oo 1 Is 6d k
N
. . . .

2 X e n op h on '
P an e g y r i c on A g e s i l a u s . otes an d In tro
4 . s
duc t ion b L L F W E WITT I S 6d

zh e n e s
. . . . . .

43 D . em os . he O ra ti on on the C rown an d the Phi l: es.

With E n gli sh Notes . B y Rev T H L L u n a , fm ly Sc ho
. d . . .

B ra s eu ose C oll ege, O xford . xs . 6d .

AND CO STATIONE RS
’
a os m r Loc xw00 D HALL COURT, L C.
.
, 7 .
 7 , STATIONE RS HALL COURT :
’
LONDON E C .

Af f a, 1 8 8 5 0 ‘

A C A T A L OG U E O F B O O K S
INC L UD ING MANY NE W AND S TAND ARD WO RKS IN

ENGINEERING , MECHANICS ARCHITECTURE . ,

CARPENTRY
, MINING,
NAVAL ARCHITEC TURE ,

SCIENCE MAT HEMATICS THE INDUS TRIAL ARTS, , .

MANUFACTURES AGRICULTURE GARDEN ING , , ,

ES TATE MANAGEMENT ti c , .

PUB L IS H E D B Y

C RO S B Y L O C KW O O D C O .

C IV IL E NG INE E RING , S URVE YING , et c .

Th e Wa t er S up p l y of C i ti e s a n d Tow n s .

A C OM P RE H E NS IVE TRE ATIS E on the WATE R S UPPL Y -

O F C ITIE S AND TO WNS B y WILL IAM H UME E E A-M In s t C E an d .

, . . . .
,

C as t an d Wrought Iron Bri dge C on struc tion ,

"
M In s t M
. E , Author of . . .
“

&c , pre Il lus trat ed w ith 5 0 D ouble Pla te s , I S in gle Pla te , C ol oured
.

Fron trs Ieee , an d up w a rds of 2 5 0 Woodc uts an d con tain in 400 p a ge s of

, g
T e xt m p 4to, £6 63 elegan tl y an d s ubstan ti all y half-boun d In m orocco .
. . .

L ist of C on ten ts
—XIV
.

k
I H ist orical S e tch of som e of the m e ans C on duits - XIII Distribution of Wate r
Fi i g
. .

t hat hav e bee n ad op t e d for th e S up p ly of Water

. .

M e t e rs Se rv ice Pip e s, and H ouse

t o C it ies an d T om II Wate r a n d t he F0 — . XV T he L a w an d E con om y of Wa t e r
.
tt n s
or s W k
.

M a t t e r us ua lly ass ocia t ed wit h it - III

— XV I C onstan t a nd In te rm itt e n t S up p ly
'

te . . . .

Ra n fali a n d E v a p oration XV II Desc rip t ion of Plates A en ic e s,

pp g
IV S p ri n gs a n . . .

t he wa t e r-be ari n g form a t ions of va rious d t s T ables of Rates of S up p ly , d o flu .

gn
vi
t rict S —V M eas ure m e n t a n d E s tim a t ion of the g c c , t oget he r w ith S p ec i fica ti ons of se ve ra l
k
. . .

Wor s illustrated. am on w hich w ill be foun d

.

flow of Wa t e r - V I O n the Se le ction of t he

— — g
—
.

V II Wells
S ou rce o f S n
v e ins IX
ly
.
V III Rese r
e Purifica t ion of Wat er
.

X
. .

.
— .
Abe rd ee n, Bide ford, : an t e rbu
H alifa x, L a m be th, Rotherham .
D u nd ee
him , an d
Pum p s . XI P um p in g Machin ery
. XII . . ot he rs .

The m os t s y s te m a tic an d v alua ble w or u on w a te r sup p ly hitherto p roduce d in E n glis h, or

p k
In an y ot h e r la n g ua g e M r H um be r s w or is charact erised alm ost t hroughout by a n k
F
. .

e x a us t rv e n e ss m uc h m ore dis ti n ct iv e of ren c h an d Ge rm a n than of E nglis h t ec hn ical tre at ises

g
.

We tula te M r
ca n c o um b N
e r on ha v in g bee n able to gi ve so la rg e a n a m oun t of la tor

i
.

m a tion on a s ub e ct so im p ortan t as t he w a te r su p l of c it ies a n d tow ns T he la t es . ti tty in

k g lo
.

n um be r, are m os: y dra w in gs of e xec ut ed w or s. a n a n e w ould ha ve com m a n d

of e v e ry e ngin ee r w hose p ra c ti ce m a y lie in t his bran ch of t he p rofe ss ion .
”
B m l dcr
t he at ten tion
— ‘

C a s t a n d Wr ou g h t I r on B r i d g e C on s tr uc ti on .

A C OM PL E TE AND PRAC TIC AL TRE ATIS E ON C AS T

AND WRO UG H T IRON B RID G E C ONS TRUC TION i ncludi n g Iron
F oun da tion s In T hree Par ts T he oret ica l , Prac tic a l an d Des c ri p t i v e By —
LL i
. .

WI IAM H UME E E , A-M In s t C E , an d M In s t M ?“ Third E dition , Re . . . . . .

v ise d an d m uc h i m p rov ed, w i th 1 1 5 D ouble Pla tes ( 20 of Win e]

.

! n ow fi rs t
, a n d n um erous Addi tion s to the Te xt
a pp e ar i n t his e dition ) In T w o Vols , . .

i m p 4to, £6 1 63 6d half-boun d i n m oroc c o

. . . .

“
A v ery t o the st an a rd lite rat ure of civil engin ee rin
v aluable con t ribut ion In add tion to d i
g
.

e le vations . p la n s a n d se c t ion s, larg e s cale det ai ls s re gi v e n . w hich v ery m uc h en Ia n ce t he m s truc

—
»

N o e ng in ee r w ould w ill i ng ly be without s o v al uable a fun d o f

—
t iv e wort h of t hese illustrat ion s .
C rw l E ng i n eer a n d A rch i tect tr y ou r It a l
—
i n form at ion
’ ‘ ‘

. .

Mr IIum be r s st ate ly la te ly issued ia which the m ost im port an t bri es ere ct e d

v olum es,
’
-

during t he last fi ve
.

ea rs, un de r t he d ire ct ion of the lat e M r B rune i, S ir W, C ubt tt , Ir H aw k

F —
.
.

owle r. M r H ernans , an d ot he rs a m ong our m ost em i nen t engrn eers. a re

.

S ha w , M r P e, . r . .
”
drawn an d in great detail E ng i n eer
'
. .
2 CROS B Y L OC KWOOD 6 C O S C ATAL OG UE
.
’
.

HUMBERG GREAT WORK ON MODERN ENGINEERIN

’
G .

C om p le te in Four Volum es, im 4to, p ri ce £1 2

r i al half-m orocc o, each
V olum e s ol s e p ara te ly a s follow s

A RE C ORD OF TH E PROG RE SS OF M OD E RN E NG INE E R

ING FIRST S E RIE S C om p ris in g C i v i l Mec han ica l Mar in e H draulio,
Works L
, , ,

B y WIL IA M
. .

Railw ay , B ri dge an d other E n gin eer in , &c U ME E E, , .

A-M In s t C E , 8t c Im 4to, w i th 6 ouble Pla te s , dra w n t o a l a r ge s ale,

c
pJ
. . . . . .

Photogra p hi c Por trai t 0 ohn H aw S h aw , C E , &c , a n d c op i ous . . .

de sc ri p tiv e L e tterp re s s , S pec ifi c a tion s, &c , £3 33 ha lf m oroc c o . .

-
.

L i st o f the P la tes and D i a g ra m s .

Tham es , Wes t
L on don E xt e rs ion Railway (5
a tes ); Arm our Plates : S us p e n si on
p lham es Bridge,
( 4 lates ); T he A lle n E n g i n e ; Sus
sion B ri
s ilwa y ( 3 i
e, Av on ( 3 p la t es ); U n de rg round
tes) .

H an ds om ely li thog ra p he d an d p rin te d It will fi n d fa vour with m an y w ho d es i re to p rese rve

—
.

i n a p e rm an en t form c op ies of the p lan s a n d e c ific a t ion s p rep a red for t he g uida n c e of the con
sp
t ractors for m an y im p ort an t eng in e ering wor s E n g rbze¢r k . .

H UM B E R S RE C ORD OF M OD E RN E NG INE E RING S E C OND

’
.

S E RIE S Im p 4 to, w i th 36 D ouble Pl ate s , Photogra hi c Port r a i t of Robert

s
. .

S tep hen so n, C E , M P , &c , an d c op ious

. . escrip ti v e L etterp ress,
. . .

S pecifica ti on s , &c , 1; 3 33 half-m orocco . . .

L is t of the P lates a n d D ia gra m s .

M r H um be r has don e t he p rofe ss ion g ood an d t rue s erv ice, by the fin e

.

he has he re brough t be fore the p rofe s s ion

"
d th p bl
an —P m d i l M h i y
e u tc . ca
c olle c t ion of e xam ples
ec a n c s
'
am -
m m
H UM B E R S RE C ORD OF
’
M OD E RN E NGINE E RING . T H IRD

.
S E RIE S Im p
. to, w i th 40 D ouble Pla te s, Photogra p h ic Por tr a i t of
.

M c lea n , E sq , a te Pres In s t C E , an d cop ious desc rip ti v e L e tt erp ress,

‘
. .
R
. . .
J . .

S p ec i fica ti on s , &c , f 3 3s half m orocc o . .

-
.

L ist o f the P la tes a nd D iagra m s .

MA IN D RAINAG E M E TRO
— PO L IS - 2\br tle S e we r, Rese rv oir an d O ut let ( 4 la tes ); O utfall
F p
. .

S ide M a p showin g Ia tarce tion of S e w ers ; S e we r, ilth H oist ; Se cti ons of S e w ers North
M iddle L e ve l Se w e r ( 2 p la te ; Outfa ll Se we r.
B ridge ov e r Riv er L ee ( 3p la tes O utfall Se we r.
s an d S out h S ides )
T H AM E S E M BANKMB NT
.

Se ct ion of River —
orth Woolwrc h Wall ; St eam boat Pie r, West m in st e r a p iates ).
.

B ud g e ov e r M a rs h L a n e ,
Ra ilwa an d B ow an d Bar in g Railw a y Jun c k L an di ng S tairs betwee n C ha t m as and
k ifi
t ion ;
k
utfa l S e w e r, B ri dge ov e r Bow an d
l
Ba r in g Rai lwa y ( 3 lat e s ); Out fa ll S ew e r,
B ridg e ov e r E ast L on on Wate rwor s ee de r k F
Wat erloo Bridges ; Yor G a te at ss ); Ovcr
flow an d Outle t at Sav oy S t ree t e w e r ( 3plat es );
S teamboat Pi er, Wate rloo B ridg e p lates);
E o

( 2 p la t es ); O ut fall Se w er, Rese rv oir ( 2 p lat es ); S

{
un ctton of S e w ers , Pla n s a n d e ct ions ;
O ut fa ll Se we r, T um bli n g B a y an d O ut le t ; Out
—
: a llie s, Pla n s an d S e ct ions ; Rollin g S toc ; k
F
.

fall S e w e r , Pe n st oc lrs S ou th S rde O ut fa ll

. . G ra m te a n d Iron ort s .

Se w e r, Be rm on dse y B ran ch ( 2 p la tes ); Out fa ll

Th e drawin gs ha v e a con st an tly in c reasi ng w hoe v er des ires t o ossess cle a r rep re
va lue , an d
scuta t ion s of t he t w o gre at w or s carried out by k our M etrop olitan Board wil o tain M r n um ber s p
—
‘

.
" ’

v olum e . E n g vn eer .

H UM B E R S RE C ORD OF M OD E RN E NGINE E RING

’
. FO URTH
S E RIE S . Im p 4 10 , w ith 36 D ouble P la te s , Photogra p hi c Por trai t of ohn
. J
F ow le r, E s q , la te Pr es In s t C E , an d OOp ious descrip ti v e L etterp res s,
. . . . .

S p e c ifi c a ti on s, &c , £3 33 hal f- m orocco . . .

the P lates a n d D iagra m L is t o f .

Abbe y M ills Pum in g St ation , Main D rain Mesop otam ia ; Viaduct ov e r t he Riv e r W e,
a e, Me t rop oli s ( r tes ); Barrow D oc s ( 5
p
Midla n d Railw a pla tes ); S t Germ ans k
g
.

) M i v d t S i d V 1 d C w ll w l W
fi
p re s ; an q u s a n e a n t a o
g' a n a uc t orn a a a at -
ought
ll
, , y 2 e s r ‘

p arais o R a i lw a y ’ 2 ( l L oc om o
a t es ) Ada m Iron C y lin der for D iv ing ; MI all Docks
C
°
s e
t iv e , S t . H ele n s a n al ailw R ( 6 la t es M ilro s Paten t E xca va tor ; Metro
y4 fi
2 p la t es );
C an n on S t reet S t at ion Roof, C a n g C ross a p
i tan is tri ct s ilw ay ( 6 p la te s); H a rb
Ra ilw a y ( 3 la t es ); Roa d B ridge ov e r t h e Riv er
M oira ( 2 p t es ); T e leg rap hic A p p a rat us for
k
orts , a n d B rea wate rs ( 3 p la tes )
ours
.

We g la d] w elcom e an ot he r y ea r s issue ’
of t his v aluable ublicat ion from t he a ble pen of
4 C ROS B Y L OC KWOOD é
} cos s CATAL OG UE .

S u r v e y P r a c ti ce .

AID TO S UR VE Y PRAC TIC E , for Referen ce i n S urv ey ing, L evel

li S etti a g oa t a n d i n Route S urvey s of Tra vellers b
o
y L an d a n a S ea W i t h
J
.

T a les , Illus tr a tion s , an d Rec ords B y L o w i s D A AC KS O N,

’
. .

Author of H y draulic Man ual , ”

Modern Me trology , Bi c La rge c row n 8 v 0 ,
”
.

1 2 s 6d c loth
. . .

Mr Jackson ha s p roduced a valuable w ale-m ea t »; for the s urve y or We ca n re c om m e"n d

k
. .

this boo as con tain in g an ad m ira ble sup p lem e n t t o the tea ching of the a c com p lis he d s urv e y o r .

A then a um .

Weca nn ot re com m en d to the s tuden t w ho k n ows som e thln of the m a t hem at ica l p rin ci p les
of the sub ec t a be tt e r c ourse t ha n t o forti f his p ra c t i c e i n the d un de r a com p eten t s urv e y or
w ith a y of M r Jac
. k '
so n s us e ful —B rei l d i n g New s
k
.

The a ut ho r brin gs to his w or a fortunate um on of theory an d p ra ct ical

“
nc e w hi ch,
a ided by a clear an d lucid st y le of writ in g , re n de rs the boo a v ery use fu l 0 ne
”
k . n a der .

L e v e ll i n g .

A TRE A TIS E ON TH E P RINC IP L E S AND PRAC TIC E O F

L E VE L L ING S howi n g i ts Ap p li ca ti on to p urp ose s of Ra ilw a y an d C i v il
.

in the C on s truc tion of Roa ds w i th M r T E L E O RD S Rules for the

'
E n gi n eerin
M
.

sa m e B y RE n E RIC R W S u m s ,
. In s t C E S e v en th E di ti on , W i t h
. . . . .

t h e addi ti on of L Aw s Prac ti ca l E xa m le s for Se t tin g out Ra ilw a urv es , a n d

C
’

p -
-

T RAUTWINE S Fi e ld Prac ti c e of L a y i n g out C irc ula r C urv es

’
i th 7 Pl a te s
an d n um erous Woodc uts , 8 v 0 , 8 s
.

6d c loth T RAUT WINE on C ur v e s, . . .

s e p a rate , 5 3 .

k
T he te xt boo on le v e llin g in m ost of our e ng in e erin g schools an d colleges
-
.
"

The ublis hers hav e re n dere d a subst an tial serv ice t o the p ro fe ssio n . esp ec ially to th e y
—
oun g e r
m em bers , g
y brin gi n g out th e p rese n t e di ti on of M r S im m s use ful m a r
'
E n g i neer i n g . .

T un n ell i n g .

P RAC TIC AL T UNNE L L ING . E xp la in in g in de tai l the Se tt i n g .

ou t of t he k
H e a di
w or s , S ha ft -s in
n k in
d r i v in g, Ra n in g the L i n es a n d an d
g
-

L e v el li n g un de r groun d, S ub xca v a tin g, i m be ri n g, an the C on s tr uc t ion

k k
of the B ri c w or of T un n e ls , w ith t he a m oun t of L a bour re ui red for , an d t he
C os t of, t he v ar i ous ri i on s of t he w or B FRE D E RIC S i n u s, k . K
M In s t C E T hir Ed iti on , Rev ise d an d xten ded by D KINNE AR C L A RE ,
. .

M In s t C E Im p 8 v 0 , w i th 2 1 Foldin g Plate s an d n um er ous Wood E n gra v

. . .

. . . . .

i n gs , 3os c loth . .

T he e st im at ion in w hich M r S im m s boo on tun n ellin has be en held for ov er th irty y ea rs

’
k —T h
g k
.

m ore truly e x resse d t ha n in t he wo rds o f the n t e Professor Ran ine

be e be st
'
cannot
source of i nform ation on e s ubj ect of tunn els is M r
‘
g
S im m s w or on Pra c ti ca l T un n e llin g
’
. F . W . k .

It has been regarde d from the first as a t e xt -book of the subj ect M r C lark has
k —
. .
"
adde d im m e nsel y to the val ue of t he boo E n g m eer
k
. .

T he addition al chap te rs by M r C lar , con tain ing as they do n um erous exam ples of m od ern
p racti c e, bring th e boo we ll up t o da t e
"
E n g i n eer m g k
.

.
— .

S ta t i cs , G r a p h i c d A n a l y ti c an .

G RAP H IC A ND A NAL YTIC S TA TIC S i n Theory , an d C ompari

son T he i r Prac ti ca l Ap pli ca tion to t he T rea tm e n t of S tre ss e s i n Roofs, S olid
G irde rs , L a tti ce , B o w s t ri n g an d S us p e n s ion B ridge s , B r ac ed Iron Arc h es an d
Pie rs , a n d ot h e r F ram e w or s T o w h ic h i s ad ded a C ha p te r on Wi n d Pres
k .

s ure s B y R H D S O N G RAIIAII, C E
. . Wi th n um erous E xa m p le s , m an y ta en
U . . k
from e xisti n g S tr uc t ures 8 v 0 , I6s c loth . . .

M r Graham s book w ill fin d a p la ce w herev er grap hic an d ana ly ti c s tat ics are used or st udied
.
'
.

-
[2ri gtru er .

T his exhaust iv e trea t ise is adm irabl ada p te d for the arc hit ec t an d e n g in ee r, an d will t en d
t o we an the rofes si on from a t e d ious an la boure d m ode o f ca lculati on T o p rov e t he a c c uracy of .

t he grap hi de m onstr a ti on s , t he a uthor com p ares them wit h the an aly t ic form ula gi ve n by Ran
k in e
" —
B u il di n g New s
k
. .

The wor is e xcelle n t from a p ract ica l p oin t of v ie w , an d has e v ide n tly be en p rep are d with
m uch ca re k
T he direc ti ons for w or in g are am p le . a n d a re illus tra te d by an abun dan ce o f w e ll
k
.
"
s e le c ted e xam p les It is an e xce lle n t t ea t boo for the p ractical draug hts m a n
.
- .

S t r a i n s , F or m u l as a n d D i a g r a m s f or C a l c u l a ti o n of .

A H AND Y B OOK F OR TH E C AL C UL A TION OF S TRAINS

IN G IR D E RS AND S IM IL AR S TR UC T URE S , AND TH E IR S TRE NG TH .

C on s i s ti n g of Form ulas an d C orr e sp on di n g D ia gra m s , w i th n um e rous de ta ils

for Pra c ti c al Ap p li ca ti on , &c B WI IAM H q E R, A- M In s t C E &c LL
y
.

C row n 8 v 0 , n ea r y 1 00 Woodc ut s an d 3 Pla te s , 7 3 6d cloth

. . . . .

Th i rd E di t i on
—
.
. . .

T he form ulae are n ea tly e xp re sse d, an d the diag ram s ood A th en e um

g
W h k
. .

c om m en d t his reall
y ha n dy boo t o our en g in ee r an d archi tect m adm a n - B ap
wk
 C IVIL E NG INE E RING . S UR VE YING , etc .
5

H y d r a u l i c T a bl es .

H YD RA UL IC TA B L E S C O E FF IC IE NTS and F ORM UL E ,

-
.

for fin di n g the D i scha rge 0 Wa ter from Orifiees Notc hes Wei rs P i es a n d ,
Ri vers Wi th New Forum 3 T able s an d G en eral In form at i on on
, , ,
‘

. n fal i ,

C a tchm en t Bas in s D ra in a ge S e w era ge Wate r S u p ly for T ow n s an d Mill

-

B y JO H N Ns e L s C iv il E n gi n ee r M R A Th i rd E di ti on care
, , ,

Pow e r .
, , . . . .
,

full y r e v i ed w i th con si dera ble Addi tions Num erous Ill us tra ti on s C rown
s
, . .

8 v o, 1 43. c a t l‘
k
A li e v alua ble to stude n ts an d en g in ee rs in p ra ctic e ; its st udy will p reven t the ann oy an ce of
a v oida ble failu re s. an d ass is t t he m t o se lec t t he rea die st m ea ns of suc cess fully ca rry in g out any
g iv en wo r c k
on n e c t e d w i t h hy dra uli c en g i n ee ri n g
”
—M rn i n g y oum l .
‘

It is , of all fish book s on the s ubj ect , the one n earest to com p leti on rom the . F
good arran ge m e n t 0 t he m a tt e r, t he cle a r exp lana t ion s , a n d abun dan ce o f form ula , t he care fully
ca lculated ta ble s , an d , a bov e all, t he t horoug h a c q uain tan c e wit h both t he or an d con struction ,
y k
w hic h is disp la y e d from fi r st to last , the boo w ill be foun d to be an ac q uisition - A r rl u ted
'

. .

R i v er E n g i n e er i n g .

RIVE R B ARS The C a uses

thei r F orm a tion , a nd thei r Trea tm en t f
o
by Induced Tida l S cour Wi th a D e sc ri pt ion of the S ucce ss ful Reduction
.

by th i s Me thod of the B a r a t D ubli n

D ubli n Port an d D oc k s Board
By I MANN, Ass i s t E n g to the
Roy a l 8 v c , 7 3 6d c loth
. .
J . . .

k—
. . . .

We recom m e nd in ha rbour w or s an d, in deed , those con c e rn ed in the im p rov e

m en t of riv e rs g en e rally
—
all in te re ste d
to rea d M r Man n s in te re sti ng wor on the trea tm e n t of riv e r bars
'
.
"
k .

'
The author s disc uss ion on w a v e act ion , curren ts . an d s cour is in t ellige n t
—E
an d in te rest in g .
-

a m os t v alua ble con tribution t o t he hist ory of this bra nc h of en g in eeri n g mg a n d

‘

n g rn eer

7 o nm ea l
IV S ” i n g 1
.

H y d r a ul i cs .

H YD RA UL IC M ANUAL . C on s is t in g of Workin g Table s an d

E xp lan a tory T ext In te n ded a s a G uide i n H y dr aulic C alc ula tion s an d Fi e ld
.

'
O p e r a t i on s B y L o w xs D A Ja c xs on
. Fourt h E d i tion , Re w ri tte n an d E u
. .

larged L arge c row n 8 v c , I6s c loth

. . .

The aut hor ha s ha d a wi de e xp e rie n ce in hy drauli c e inee ri n g , both in South Am e rica a n d

i n In d ia , an d has be e n a care ful obse rv e r of th e fa cts w hic h a v e c om e un de r his n oti c e , as w ell as
a p ainstakin g c ollec t or a n d c rit ic o f t he re sul ts o f the e xp e rim e n ts o f ot hers ; an d from t he g rea t
m ass o t m ate ri al at his com m an d he has constr'uct e d a man ual w hich m a y be acce p te d as a trust
w orthy guide to th is bran ch of the e ee r s p rofe ssi on We c an hea rt ily re com m en d thi s .

b d l "
v olum e to all who des ire to e a cq ua in t e w it h the la t est e v e op m en t of th is i m port an t s ubj ect .

The m ost us eful feature of this w or is its freedom from wha t is sup e ra nn ua ted, an d its k
gre at m odern exp erim en ts
"
Na tu n —
t horough ado p ti on of rec e n t e xp e ri m e n ts ; the te xt is. in fa ct , in gre a t p a rt a sh ort acc oun t of the

T r a m w a y s a n d t h ei r Wor k i n g
. .

TRAM WA YS TH E IR C ONS TR UC TION AND WORKING .

E m brac i n a C om re he n s i v e H i s tory of t he S y s te m w i t h an e xha us ti v e

p
An aly s i s 0 t he v ari ous M ode s of T rac t i on , i n c ludi n Horse -Pow e r, S te am ,
H eated Wa ter, an d C om pre s s ed Ai r ; a D e s c ri p t i on 0 the V a ri et i e s of Rol li n g
S toc k an d a m p le D e t a i ls of C os t a n d Wor i n g E xp e n s es : t he Pr ogr es s k
rec en tly m a de in Tra m w a y C on s tr uc t i on , &c &c B y D Ki n n e a a C AR , . L K
M In s t C E With ov er z oo Wood E n gra v in gs , an d I3Foldi n g Pla tes T wo
. .

. . . . .

V ols , large crown 8 v c , 3os cloth

. . .

'
All in te re ste d in t ram w ay s m us t re fe r to it , as all rail way en g in eers ha v e turned to the a uthor s
work Railw ay
k
An exhaus ti v e an d p ra ctical w or on tram w ay s in w hich t he h ist ory of this in d of locom o
"
, k
t ion an d a descrip tion an d cost of t he various m od es of la y in g t ram way s , are to be foun d
. .

The best form of rails . the best m od e of c on s t ruct ion , an d t he be st m e chan ical app lian ces
a re so fairl in di ca t ed in t h e w or k
un de r re v ie w , tha t a n y e n gin e e r about t o co n st ruct a tram m i y
a t on ce t o obt ain t he p ract ical in form a t ion w hich will be of m ost serv i ce t o him
”
w ill be e na .

A li en a t io n .

O bl i q u e A r c h es .

A PRAC TIC AL TRE ATIS E ON TH E C ONS TR UC TION OF

OB L I UE ARC H E S B y Joa n H ART T hi rd E di tion wi th Pla tes
Q
Im . . , .
.

p e ri al v o, 83 . c loth .

S t r en g t h G i r d er s of .

G RA P H IC TA B L E F OR F A C IL ITATING TH E C OM P UTA .

TION O F TH E WE IG H TS O F WRO UG H T IRON A ND S TE E L

GIRD E RS 6 s , for Parli a m e n ta ry
.
, a n d oth e r E s ti m ate s . By
J . H . War s a w
Buc x, M, In s t C E . On a Shee t,
. .
 C ROS B Y L OC KWOOD 6
'
6 ,
C O 5 C ATAL OG UE
. .

Ta bl es f or S e tt i n g - ou t C u r v es .

TAB L E S OF TANG E NTIAL ANG L E S AND M UL TIP L E S

L
é
or S etti n g-out C urv es rorn 5 to goo Ra di us B A E XAND E R B E AZ E L E Y, .

Ins t C E . Th i rd di ti on
. . Pri n ted on 48 C ar s, an d s old i n a c lo t h box,
.

w a i s tc oa t-p oc et s i z e, 33 6d k . .

i —
E ach table is f ia ted on a sm all card w hich , be in g p laced on the theodo li te leav”es t h e han ds
.

free to m an ip ula t e t e in s trum e n t n o sm all a dvan t age as regards the ra p idity of w or

,

k —E rrg i n t er
k k
.

'
Very ha nd y ; a m an m ay n ow t hat all his da y s w or m ust fall on tw o of these card s . w hich
he p uts in t o his own car d-case . a n d lea v e s t he rest be hin d - A ti eenam n r . .

E n g i n e e r i n g F i e l d w or k .

TH E PRAC TIC E OF E NG INE E RING F IE L D WORK , a lied

to L a n d H y dra ul i c, H y drogr ap hic, a n d S ubm a ri ne S urvey i n a n d L ev e i n g
and .

S ec on d E di ti on , Re v i se d, w i th c on s iderable Add i t ion s , an d a up p le m e n t on

Wa te rw or s , Se w e rs , S e w age , an d Irri ga ti on B y W D A IS H AS KOL L , C E
k . . V . .

Num erous Foldi n g Pla tes In On e Volum e, dem y 8 v c , 1; I 53 c loth

. . .

L a r ge T u n n el S h a f ts .

TH E C ONS TR UC TION OF L ARG E T UNNE L S H A F TS A

P ra ctical an d Theoretica l E ssay By H Wa r s o u B UC K, M In s t C E , J . . .

Res iden t E n gi n ee r, L on don an d Nort h-We s tern Ra il w ay . Illus tra ted w i th

. . . .

Foldin g Pla te s , roy a l 8 v c , Iz s c loth. .

Man y of t he m e thods gi v e n are of e xt re m e p racti cal v alue t o the m ason ; an d the obse rva t ion s
on the form of a rch. the rules orde rin g t he st on e . a n d t h e cons t ruction of the t e m p l"a tes w i ll be
—
for
foun d of c ons ide ra ble use . We c om m e n d t h e boo k t o t he e ng i n ee rin g p ro fessi on B m ld rrrg .
’ ‘

Will be rega rde d by c iv il e n ee rs a s of the ut m os t value, an d calc ula t ed to save m uch ti m e

nd obvia te m an y m
'

s ta lt e s.
" — '
C ol ret y Gua r d ia n .

F i e l d -B ook f or E n g i n eer s .

TH E E NGINE E R S M INING S UR VE YOR S , AND C ON

’ ’

TRAC TOR S F IE L D -B OOK C on s i s tin g of a S e rie s of T able s , w i th Rules ,

’
.

E xp lana ti on s of S y ste m s, a n d us e of T heodolite for T ra v e rs e S ur v e y in a n d

Plotti n g th e Wor W i th m in ute a cc ura c y by m ean s of S trai gh t E dge a n
k Set
S q ua re on ly L e v e lli n g w ith t he T heodoli te , C as tin g-out an d Re d uc i n g
L ev e ls t o D a tum , a n d P lotti n g S ec t ion s i n the ordi n a ry m a n n e r ; se tt i n -o ut
~

C u rv e s w i th th e T he odoli te by T an ge n ti al An gles a n d Mul ti l es, w it h ht

a n d L eft-ha n d Readi n gs of the In s tr um e n t : S e tt i n g-out urv ec w i th ou t
The odolite on the S y s tem of T a n ge n tia l An gle s b se ts of Tan ge n ts a n d 0 &
,

k
s e t s : a n d E a r th w or T a ble s to 80 fee t dee p c alc a ted for e v e ry 6 i n c he s i n
de p th B W D A IS H AS KO L L , C E
. . V W i n um erous Woodc ut s F our th . . .

E di ti on , n la rged C row n 8 v o, 1 23 c loth

. . .

“
T he boo ki
ha n dy , an d t he auth or i n
s ve ry t ha ve added that the se p a rat e tables o f si n e:
an d ta ng e n ts t o e v e ry m i n ut e w ill m a e it usaf
" — k
for m an y other p urp os e s, the ge n uine tra v e rse
ta bles e xis ti n g all the sa m e A th mcr u m . .

E ve r p e rson e ng ag e d in e n gin ee ri ng fie ld ope rat ions will es tim a t e the im p ortan ce of suc h a
k y;
w or a n d t e ai n u un t o f v a lua ble t i m e w hic h w ill be sa v e d by re fe re n ce t o a se t o f re lia ble ta ble s
p re p ared w it h t he a c curacy a n d fuln ess of t hose g iv e n in t his v olum e Ra il way News .
— .

E ar t h w or k , M e a s u r e m e n t a n d C a l c u l a t i on of .
A M ANUAL ON E ARTH WORK . B y AL E X .
J . S G RAH AM ,
.

C E. . With n um erous D iagram s . 1 8 m o, 2 3. 6d . c loth.

A g reat a m oun t of p ra cti ca l in form a ti on, v e ry adm irabl a rra ng ed; and availa ble for roug h
c t hn a t e s i s w e ll a s for t he m ore e xac t calc ulati ons re q uire in the e ngi nee r s an d con t ra ct o r s
'
‘

a
o ‘ce s.
"
j ‘r a s a rr.

S tr a i n s .

TH E S TRAINS ON S TR UC T URE S OF IRONWORK ; w i t h

P ra c ti c a l Re m ark s p n Iron C on s t ruc t ion B y F W S H E I D S, M In s t C E . . . L . . . .

S ec on d E di ti on , w i t h 5 Pla tes Roy al 8 v o, 5 s c loth .

—E ng i
.

k
.

The st ude n t can n ot fi nd a be tte r litt le boo on t his s ub e ct j .

”
n eer .

S t r en g t h of C a s t I r on , e t c .

A P RA C TIC A L E S S A Y ON TH E S TRE NG TH OF C A
is
.

IRO N A ND O TH E R M E TAL S B y T ri om i s T a a n G O L n C E F h
KN
.

E di ti on , in c ludin g H O D G ' , . .
I SO N S E xpe ri m e n tal Resea rches . 8vc , Iz s. c ot l h .
 C ROS B Y L OC KWOOD C O S C ATAL OG UE
’
8 (S . .

S ton e - w or k i n g M a c h i n er y .

S TONE WORKING M AC H INE R Y , and the Rapi d an d Econom .

cal C on vers i on of S tone Wi th H in t s on the Arran gem e n t an d Man agem ent

B y M Pow i s B AL E
.

of S t on e Works . . . With n um e oui i

Illus tra tion s L arge c row n 8 v o, 93 c loth .

—Cdli y
. .

T he boo
“
k should be in t he han ds of e ve ry m ason or stude nt of st one work o
.
“
ei
Gua r d ia n .

E n g i n e er R ef er en c e B ook
’
s .

TH E WORKS M ANAG E R S H AND B OOK OF M ODERN

’ ’

RUL E S , TAB L E S , AND D ATA For E n gin e e rs , Millw ri h ts, an d Boiler

g
.

Ma kers ; T ool Mak e rs , Mac hin i sts a n d M e ta l Wor kers ron an d Brass ,

Foun ders, ac B y W S H ur r ou, C iv i l an d Mec han ica l En i n eer Second

g
. . . .

E dition carefully rev i sed , w i th Addi tion s In O n e han dso m e ol um e , m edium

, .

8v o, p ric e 1 53 s tron gly boun d .

[j ust published . .

C onten ts
Rules for M odern St a tionary Whee ls —Warm in g —W &h
a nd
ions
ocom oti ve
and
E n g in es W i re C o r — . of
Iron S te e l, B ras s ,
, etah and
an d V e n t ila t i
an d v a rious
e t

n ub Ve rt ica l. Re tu rn T ube an d Porta ble M a teria ls

Wm Wh eeb,
.
. ,

E ng in e Bo ilers C him n e y s
—V Als o, T he In dicat or an d In dicator Diagram

—
—
Pum p s. Pi pe s. G li ders C
M ihwo rk l ron oun d ry W F
S
a nd Bras s
an d
ork
t o t he
.

W M — k
ari ous M em ora n da for th e
— oundry and
Wor s hop Rules for t he We ig ht of Castings
T he Ne w Pate n t L a w a n d C osts of Patents
F
Rules and Pract ical Da ta re la t
S tre n gth an d Weig ht of M e t a ls a nd L ega l M e m ora n da L ist of ren ch Words for — F
a te r ials
—— F
-

—
Whe e l C utt i ng S cre w C ut —
l ro n a n d Bra ss Cm i ng C un ln
W
M e t als E n g lish E ng i ne e ri n
E u lis h W
T e rm s re nch and
—
M ea sures An d ar
m
l Gea r hts a n

m
i nt R e ig h t o f Pul of ode m
m
t ical In form a tion for C 1
lop — m of S p an d M on i ce a Mec ha n i ca l E n gin ee rs .

T he v olum e is an e xc ee d ing ly use ful on e, brim ful wit h in ee rs n ot es , m e m oran da, and
’

rules . an d we ll w ort h y of be ing on e v e ry m echa n ic al e ngi nee s boo s he lf

— There s k .
'

v alua ble i n form a ti on on e ve ry p age Jl eel i a n i m l l Vor ld

k k
. .

The in form a tion is p re c ise ly tha t li e ly t o be re q uire d in p ra c tice T he wor forms

k
.

a de si ra ble addi ti on t o the li bra n o t only of t he wor s m an age r, but of an y on e c on nected wi th

gen e ra l en gin ee ring AIi n i n g eter n a l

.
— .

“
A form ida ble m ass of fa cts and fi res, rea dily acced ble t h rough a n ela borate index
S uc h a v olum e w ill be foun d a olut ely n e c e ssary as a boo o f r e fe re n ce in all sorts k
b wk An y ord ina k
k —
f or s c on n ec t ed wi t h t he m e ta l t ra des fo re m an o r w or m an can find .

"
all he wan ts in t he crow de d pa ge s of t his use ful wor Ry la n d 23 r on Tr a des C i rcula r . .

E n g i n e er i n g C on s t r uc t i on .

PA TTE RN-M AKING A P ractica l Treatise, em bra c in g the Main

T p e s of E n in e e rin g C on s truc tion , a n d i n c l udi n G ea ri n g, both Hand and
ac hi n e in e , E n gi n e Wor , S hea v es a n d Pul e y s , Pip e s an d C olum ns, k
S c rews , M ac hi n e Pa rt s, Pum p s an d C oc ks , the Mouldi n of Patterns in
L oa m an d G ree n san d, &c toge the r w i th t he m e thod s 0 E s tim atin g the
w e i ght of C as t i n gs ; to w h ic hi s a dded an Ap p e n di x of Table s for Wor shop
.

k
Refe re n c e B a F o a uu Au PATT E RN MAit n R
. With up w ards of Three .

H un dred an d ev en ty Illustration s C r ow n 8v o, 7 3 6d c loth U ni t published . . . . .

S m i th Ta bl es f o r M e c h a n i cs , e t c
’
s .

TAB L E S M E M ORAND A AND C AL C UL A TE D RE S ULTS

, . .

F OR ME C H ANIC S E NG INE E RS ARC H ITE C TS B UIL DE RS dc , , , , .

S e lec ted an d Arran ged by F u Sm m Third E di t ion , Re v ised and En

'
n ci a . .

largad , 2 50 p p , w ai s tc oa t-p oc . ke t s i z e , 1 3. 6d lim p lea ther

.
[f irs t published . .

It would, p erhap s. be as diflic ult to m a e a sm all p oc e t-boo se le ct ion of n otes and form ic k k k
t o sui t Au e nee rs as i t w ould be t o m a e a un iversal m e d ici n e ; but M r S m it h s waistcoat k ’

k
. .
”
ll b l d f l - E n i n eer
'

p o c lt e t co ec on m a y e oo e up on as a suc ces s u attem p t g

k
. .

A veritable p ock et t reasury of n ow ledg e - Ir on . .

Th e H i g h - P S tea m E n gi n e
r es s u r e .

TH E H IG H -PRE SS URE S TE AM -E NG INE An E x asitlar

o
f i ts C orn ra ti ve M eril s and a n E ssay tow a r ds a n Im p roved Sy stem of onstntc
t t on By E a u s r An a Au
r. T ran s la ted fr om the G e rm an ‘ ‘ th
'

Notes by
L tli
. .

M In s t C E , are With 2 8 Pla t es 8 v c , 1 63 6d c lo

, ,
D r PO E ,
. . . . . . . . . .

t horo ug hly i n t o the exa m i na ti on of the h

gfi m § i é
h aud i ts appen d
ages , an d dese rves a p lace in e ve ry sci en tific u m q fiii
 M E C H ANIC S G ME C H ANIC AL E NGINE E RING e .

S t e a m B oil er s .

A TRE A TIS E ON S TE AM B OIL E RS Thei r S trength, C on

s tr uc tion , E conom i cal Worki n
a nd By RO B E RT Wi L sou , C E . .
, la te In
s tor, Man c hes ter S team Users As sociation . Fifth Edi ti on . i z m o, 6s .

c oth
T he bes t t re atise that has ev e r bee n p ublishe d on steam boile rs E rig i n eer .
—
"
.

— all e m
“
T he a uthor show s him se lf pe rfe ct m ast er of his s ubj e ct, an d w e heartily rec om m e n d .

M in e St ea m p ower to p ossess them selves of the w ork, ”

&rla n d s Iron Tr a de C i m eta r
’
.

B oi le r g M akin .

TH E B OIL E R-M AKE R S RE AD Y RE C KONE R

’
. With E x
am le s of Prac tica l G eom etry an d Te m p la tin g. for the Use of Plate r s ,
p
S m i th s an d Ri v e ters B y Jo a n C o un r n n v , E dited b D K C L Ait it, . . .

S econ d E di tion , re v is ed , w i th Addi ti on s , rz m o, 5s ha f-boun d

—
. .

A reliable g uide to the wor ing boiler m ak er l r on k -

"
.

k
.

Bo ile r-m a e rs w i ll readily re cog n ise the value of this v olum e The ta bles are clea rly .

d d e d tha t the can be re f d i -

n a te “ facili t so t ha t i t cann ot be
{223
p ri n t e a n so a e rre t o w t h
ly
. r
d oubt e d t hat t he y w be ge n e ral ap p re c ia ted an d m uch f a ll/i n i ng ou m a l
‘

S t e a m E n gi n e .

TE XT B OOK ON TH E -
S TE AM E NG INE . B T . M .

"
G oo n n v z M A . B arri s te r a r L a w , Author of The E lem en ts of ec ha n i s m ,- -

Wi th n um erous Illus tra tion s C row n 8 v o, 6s c loth

.
,

&c S i xth E di tion

. . . . .

Pro fess or G oode v e has gi ve n us a t rea tise on the s te a m e n gin e w hich will bear com pari son
“

"—
wi th a n y t hing writt e n b H uxle or M a xwe ll, an d w e can awa rd it n o hi ghe r p rai se E ng m eer
y y . .

S team .

TH E S AF E US E OF S TE AM . C on tain in g Ru les for Uh

p rofes s ion a l S te am -
us ers . By an B us i nes s . Fi fth Edi tion . S e w ed , 6d .

If s te a m -use rs w ould but le arn this little boo k by heart. boiler e xp losion s w ould becom e se n
sa t io ns by t he ir rari ty .
-
E ng ti s li M ech a n i c .

C o a l a n d Sp e e d Ta bl e s .

A P OC KE T B OOK OF C OAL A ND S PE E D TAB L E S , for

E ngi n eers a nd S tea m users B y Ns on Fo n a v Author of B oi le r C on - .
,
" Poc ke t si z e s Gi l c loth
s t ruc ti on , a ; 4s lea ther
o
. . . . .

C on ten ts
—
—
T a ble i De c im als of T ons in cwts
Ih —T able 2 C onsum p t ion p e r D ay p e r l
. . an d
—
C um brae ) T able 9 D ecim al E q uiv a le n ts
.

T able ro Kn ots p e r H our in ft

.

o f Tim e
— ei
—g
. . . . .

— T a ble 3 C ons um p ti on p e r H our p e r I

. . m in T a ble r r C onstan t s for I H P .T a le
M ea —
. . .

T able —
T a ble 4 C onsur p tion p e r D ay p e r sq ft
.

g
. . i s D e cim a ls of t s in lbs T able r
sures of We ight ; also M isc e llan e us
. .

onsum p t ion p e r fl our p e r

—
g ra te es ult s
o
k
.

sq .ft gra t e
. .

—
able 6 S t owage of C oal an d
T able 7 Kn ots p e r H our ( M ea
. C om bus t ion, Air re q uired, S t o i n g, arc .

X
C om osr t iou T i m e and S p eed E xam p les
—
. . .

s ure M ulc h T able 8 Kn ots p e r H our ( C loch .

F i r e E n g i n e er i n g .

F IRE S F IRE E NG INE S , AND F IRE -B RIG AD E S

,
-
. With
a Fir e-E n gi n es , th eir C on s t r uc tion , Use , an d Ma n a ge m en v Re
H i s tory of
k
m ar s ou Fire-Proof B uildin gs , an d t he Pre se rva tion of L i fe from ir e
S ta tis ti cs of the Fi re App lian c e s i n E n gl is h T ow n s ; Fore ign Fi re S y s te m s ;
H in ts on Fire B ri gades , are &0 B y C H ARL E S F T YO UNG , C E Wi th . . . . . .

n um e rous Illus tra ti on s , p p , de m y 8 v o, £1 4s cloth . . .

T o such of our reade rs as are in te res ted i n the s ubj e ct of fi res an d fi re ap p ara tus we ca n m ost
hea rt ily c om m e nd this boo k
It is really the on ly E nglis h wor we now ha ve up on t he subj e c t
. k ,

.
“

E n g i n eer i n g .

It dis p lay s m uch e vide n ce of ca re ful resea rch ; an d M r Youn has p ut his fa cts n ea tly .

t og e the r It is e v id e n t e n oug h that h is ac q ua in t an c e w i t h the rac tical e tulia of t he c onst ru c tion o f

.

st ea m fi re e ng in es old a n d ne w, an d the con diti ons wit h w hi it is necessary t he y should com p ly .

i s accurate an d full
"
E n g i neer
,

.
— .

G a s L i gh t i n g .

C OMM ON S E NS E F OR G AS - US E RS : A C atechis m of Gas

L ighti ng for H ouseholders Gasfitters M i llowners Archi tects E n g i neers etc
WIL S O N
, , , . , .

By RO B E RT: " C E , Author of A T reati se on S te am “

B oiler s
,
Wood E u
. . .

S e con d Ed i ti on . C row n 8 v o, se w ed , with Foldin g Plates a n d

grav m gs , 2s 6d . .

ll
g as-use rs w ill de cidedly be n e fit,
—E both in p oc k et and com fort if the y will av ail them selve s
of Mr, l
’
i son s counse ls . ngi n eer i ng ,
m CROSB Y L OC KWOOD s c ar s
a CA TAL O GUE .

THE POPULAR WORKS OF MIOHAEL REYNOLDS .

( Known
’
as Ta r E n e m a D ruvn n
. s Ferr it e
L oc o m o ti ve- E n gi n e Dr i vi n g .

LOCOMOTI VE E NGINE -
D RIVING A P ractica l Ma ual fo n r
E n gi n ee rs i n cha r e of L ocom oti v e E n i nes B y C H AE L Ra v n o s, e er MI w M mb
B dS C R
.

f
o t he S oc i e t y of g i n ee r s form e r ly m o ti v e I n s e c t or L a n p
x
. . . .
, .

S i t h E di ti on In c ludin g a Ke v T o r u n L oc o u o r rv a E n e m a
.
'
Wi th Illus .

tra ti on s an d Port rai t of Author C rown 8 v a , 4s 6d c loth

pp pp
. . . .

M r Re y n olds has su lied a wa n t an d has s u lie d it w e ll We can c on fide ntly rec ommend
t he
of
b
loc om oti v e
.

ook. n ot on ly t o the p .

rac tical d riv e r, but to eve ry one who ta kes an i n t e res t i n t he

e n gi n es
”
The E n g i n eer
e rform ance
.

p
p
. .

"
M r Re y n olds has o e ned a n e w c ha ter in the lite rature of the da y Of the p racti m l utility
p
b p —
. .

o f M r Re y n olds s ook we ha ve t o s ea k i n t e rm s of wa rm com m e n da tio n A th en am m

’ ”
. . .

“
E vi de n tly t he w ork of on e who kn ows h is su j ect thoroug hly ”
S er v ice Gaz ette b .

W
.

e re t e ca uti ons a n d rules

h i ven in the oo k t o ec om e art of t he e v e ry -da y w orking of b b —
our en g ine -d ri v e rs . w e m i ht hav e e we r dis tress in
g g a c cide n ts to e p lore
"
gS w ts m a n . .

T h e E n i n e e r , F i r em g gi n e an , an d E n - B 0?
!
TH E M OD E L LOCOMOTI VE E NGINE E R . F IRE M AN, and
E NC INE -B O Y C om ri s in g a p
i s toric al Noti c e of t he P i on ee r L ocom otive
. H
E n gi n es a n d thei r In v e n tors , w i th a roj ec t for t he e s ta bli s h m e n t of C erti fi p
ca te s of Q ua li ca t ion in t he Run n i n fi g S e rv i ce of R a il w a y s B y M IC RABL .

Re vuon p s, Author of L oc om otiv e-E n gin e D riv i n g ”

Wi th n um erous Illus .

t ra tron s a n d a fi n e Portra i t of G e orge S te hen son C row n 8 v o, 4s 6d cloth p

pp
. . . .

F rom the t e chn ical k n ow le d e al t o the ra ilwa y m an of to-day m ore

“
of t he a uthor it w ill a
0

b
fo rc i ly t han a n i wr itten r S m iles
"
b
T he v olum e c on ta i ns autom a tion of a ted!
. .

—
n ical k i n d. an d cts t t e ve ry ri ve r should be fam ilia r wi t h E ng l zs h M ech a n ic
p—
. .

“
We should be g lad to see this b
ook
i n t he oss ess ion of e ve ry on e in t he kingdom whe nas

—
"
e v e r la id. or is to lay . han ds on a loc om otive engi ne Ir
p p
.

"
Re le te with in form ati on an d g ra hi c detail for the railway m an . Ra il vva r Ser v ice Gaz ette

S ta ti on a r y] E n gi n e Dr i vi n g .

ST A TIONA R Y E NGINE D RIVING A P ra ctica l M anual j br

E ngi n eers i n c ha rg e 0 S ta t iona ry E n i nes B y M rc n a e r RE NO L S . Y D . Second
ith Pla te s a n Wood c uts
.

E di tion , E n lar ged C row n 8 v o , 4s 6d cloth

p
. . . . .

bj ious oints
T he a ut hor is t horoug hly
p p the va r
“
a cq ua in te d w it h his s u e ct s. a n d h is a dv i ce on
t re at e d is cle a r an d ra ct ica l an e xcee di ngly useful
o ne for t he c lass fo r whom i t is
H e has rod uce d a
s e c ia lly i n t e n de d
.

p .
m a n ua l w hich is

Our author leav es n o s ton e un t urn ed H e is de te rm in e d tha t his rea de rs shall not only know
“

"—
b
.

s om e th i ng a bout the s ta ti ona ry e n g i n e but all a out i t E : rg i rreer

q —
. . .

An e ngin e m an w ho has m as te re d t he c ont e n ts of M r Re y n olds s ook w ill re uire but little

'
b
p
e x e ri e n c e w ith oile rs a n d e n gi n es b
efore he ca n be t rust ed t o look a ft e r them E ngli sllb
.

.
”

—
ec a m c .

T he bo
ok sh ould be p ossess ed by e v e ry in te llige n t an d am b tiou
i s e ng ine m a n .
”
Bn ilder .

C on t i n u o u s R a i l w a y B ra kes .

CONTINUOUS RA IL WA Y B RA KE S : A P racti ca l T eatise o

r n
t he severa l Sy stem s i n Use i n the Un i ted Ki n gdom ; th e ir C on s truction and
. p
Pe rfor m an c e W i th co i ous Ill us tra ti on s an d n um erous T a ble s B y MIC HAEL .

Re v n ow s L arge c row n sv a , os c loth.

p p p
. .

A a ular e x la na t ion of the diffe ren t ra ke s It w ill be of grea t assista n ce in form ing public b
O p
a clea r e x osi t ion of t he rake b q
b
in io n. a n d will be st udi e d wi th e ne fit by thos e w ho t a ke a n in te re st in t he rak e
p ue st i on as it re la tes t o the ri v a l s y st em s
"
E n g t £s h M echa n ic
it n
.

—
b .

W
.

f in e i le an d relat iv e c onnection of the b

p
v a rious a rts o f eac h a rt ic ula r p
r itt e n wi th s uffi cie n t t e c hn ical deta il to e n a le t he
ra ke t o be rea d i ly g rasp e t
”
b et h a n i m t Wor ld f .
'
.

—I m
May be rec om m e n ded t o all w ho des ire t o study t he su bj e ct of con t in uous b ra kes . ri .

E n gi n e Dr i vi n g I/if e-
.

E NGINE DRI VING LIF E ; -

or , Sti rr ing Ad ven tures and I nci
den ts i n the L i ves o f L ocom o t i ve-E n
g i n e D r i vers . By Mi a m i. RE NOLDS Y .

E i ght h T h ousa n d C row n 8 v o, 2 s c loth

fi b
.

W
. .

“
b
T he ook from rst t o last is e rfe c tly fas c ina ti n g
p ilk '
ie C olli ns m os t thrillin g conc . ions
are t h ro wn in t o t he s had e 9 tr ue i n a de n ts, e udless i n a; e rr va rie ty rela ted i n e v ery page m
19t M a il .

D ri v i n g
w ho w is he s t o g e t a re al i n s ig ht in t o ra ilwa life ca n n ot do e t te r than rea d Engine
n
{
on e
y
ife fo r h i m s e lf ; a n d i f h e o n c e t a ke s it n he w ill fi n d t ha t t he a uthor ’s en thusiasm and
b
$
8 1 lo v of the en gi n e -dri v i n
e
p
g rofe ss ion w ill ca rry i m on till he has read eve r ag e - Satrm ta
y
p .
)
 12 CROSB Y LOCKWOOD 6 CO S CA TA LO G UE
.
’
.

C i v i l A r c hi te c tu r e .

TH E DE CORA TI VE PA RT OF CI VIL A RCHITE CTUR E

R F R S Wi th I ll t i
.

By Sir ILL IA H A BE S, W M C M Nt a d us ra t on s, o es . n an
x J os e r a
. . .

E am in ati on of G r ec i an Arc hi tec t ure, by w r, F S A . E di ted by

W H
. .

L e ap s
. 66 Pla tes , 4to, e rs c loth
. . . .

De s i gn i n g, M e a s u r i n g, an d Va l u i n g .

TH E STUDE N T S G UIDE
to the E of M E A S UR PRA CTIC
ING AND VAL UING ARTIF IC E RS WORKS
'
C on tai n in g D i r e cti o n s for .

ta kin g D im en s ion s Abs trac ti n g the sam e , an d bri n gi n g the Q uan t i t i e s i nto
B ill, w ith T able s of C on s ta n ts , a n d cop ious Me m oran da for t he
,

a l ua t i on of V
L a bour an d Material s i n th e res pec ti v e T rades of ri c kla y e r an d S later B o

J
,

C ar pen ter an d oi n e r, Pain ter an d G laz i er, Pa pe rha n ge r, &c W i t h 8 P lates

D RD
.

an d 63 Woodc u ts O ri gin a l ] edited b E WA D O D SO N, Arc hi t ec t

. Fi fth .

E di ti on , Rev i sed, w i th co era ble Ad i ti on s on Me n s ura tion an d C on s true

tion , an d a Ne w C ha pte r on D ila pi da ti on s, Repa irs , an d C on tra c ts , by E
R
.

Wr n n n a u T A N, M A C rown 8y o, os
pb
. .

W ll f lfil
.

its ti tle -pa e . an d w e can t horoughly re com m e n d i t t o t h e class

e u
for whose use it has ee n com ile d
s the
Mr
'
rom ise of
p p
arn s add iti ons an d re vi si ons ha v e m uch in c re a s e d the
use fulness of t he w ork, an d ha ve es ec ia lly a ugm e n t e d its va lue t o st ude n ts
”
. . g
W
.

b
T he w ork has e e n ca re fully re v ised an d edited by M r E n d am T arn . M
h A
p . a n d c om

p
“
y
b
. . . .

rises se v e ral v alua le a d di ti ons o n con s truct ion . m ens uratio n. dila
m atters .

ing an d v aluing a rt ificers w ork that has y e t e en u lis hed

’ ”
i da ti o ns an d re a i rs a n d ot he r

B u il d m g News
p
T his edi t ion w ill be foun d t h e m os t com le te trea t ise on t he rin ci p les of m en s ur
b p b
p .
— p .
O

M ig ht be re ad an d st udie d w it h ad van tag e t z alm ost e v e r n e ha vi n g a n y c on ne c ti on w ith

p
buildin g o era tions, from t he archite ct down wards B u il d m g or ld t— fi .

Poc ke t E s ti m a tor .

TH E POCKE T E STIMA TOR f or the B UILDING TRA D E S

B
.

Method of E st im a ti n g t he
e i n g an
KJ
E as y B ui ld i n g c o llec v ari ous ar ts of a
i
t v ely , m ore e s ec ia lly a li ed to C p '
oin e rs w or k pp
By A C '
te r an
s
B
. . .

"
a r r o n , Author of Q ua n tit ie s a n d ea s urem e n ts T h i rd E di ti on , e ure .

fully re v i sed, 33 Woodcut s, lea the r, w ai st coa t oc k e t s iz e , rs 6d p -

. .

C on tain s a g ood deal of in form a tion n ot easily t o be o taine d from the ordina ry p ri ce books b
p —B 1d i g N w
“
.
"
T he ri ces gi v e n
'
are a c cura t e, an d up t o d t
a e. m n e s.

bo p p ibl t m k it —
"
This ok is as c om lete as it is oss e o B i ld i
a e . u ng a n d E n gi n eer i n g Ti m es .

B u il d e r ve y or s Poc ke t Te c h n i c a l G u i d e
’
s an d Sur ’
.

TH E POCKE T TE C HNICA L G UIDE A ND ME A S URE R

F OR B UIL D E RS AND S UR VE YORS C i i g C pl E x pl . on ta n n a om e te an a
t ion of the T e rm s us ed in B uildi n g C on s t ruc ti on , M e m oran da for R e fe r en ce ,
T ech n i ca l D ir ec tion s for Meas uri n g Work i n a ll the Buildi n g T ra d e s, w i th a
T rea ti se on t he Mea s urem e n t of T i m be r, C om le te S ec i ca ti on s , &c . &0 p fi
p
. .

B y A C B a r on . S ec on d E di ti on , w i th rg ‘ loodcu ts , lea th er, w a is t c oa t

. .

poc ke t si z e , rs 6d
— p
. .

An excee din g ly han d y oc ke t com p a n ion t horoug hly re lia le

'
B m lder s li ’eekly Rep or ter b ’

p
, . .

—
'

This n eat little c om e n di um con ta ins all t ha t is req us i te in carry in g out con tra c ts fo r ex
c av ating, tiling . b
ricklay in g , p a v in g, & c B r tt‘rs le Tra de y ea r n ed .
” '

H an d bo ok of Sp e ci fi c a ti ons .

TH E HA ND B OOK SPE CIFICA TIONS or P r ac tical OF

d B ild
,

G idu h A hi
t et t ot E gi Se y rc i d wi g p
ec n n ee r, urv e or, an u er , n ra n u
S p i fi ti
,

ec d C ca t t f W k
on s an d C t ti I ll t t d by
on ra c s o r or s an on s r uc on s us r a e
x d b i t A hit
.

P rec e e n s
d t f B i ldi g lly o u d E
n s ac t ua e ec ute e m n en rc ec ts a n u
gi n e ers B P f T L D N D N P &
ro e s sor N w E di ti i O AL SO c e on , n
f T xt
. . . .
.
,

O n e ar e l g i 8 w i t h pw d of . p g
, v o, d 33 P l u ar s o a es o e , an a tes ,
£1 r rs6d l th c o
p fi
. . .

k f k
t io ns for
E xchange.
p b Mf
In t s w or forty - our S ec i ca tions o e xe cut e
hi
a rts O th e ne w
f

r T it e.M
H
P
li b
d
ouse s o f Pa r a m en t,
T he la tt e r, in
i
f
di
wor s a re

p
S ir C harles
cular, is a ve ryd
h
v e n.
R
ncl u n g t e sp e ci ca
fi
rry , an d
k
or t he n e w
c om le t e a n re m a r s
o

fi D d
g
b q
. . .

doc um en t bd
t e m o ie to a en t e xt e n t, as onal son m e n t ions . the
‘
ill O f ua n t ities
g
r
b
. .

w it h t he de s c ri p ti on of e w or It is va hi able as a re cord. an d m ore v al ua le still us e

book o f c u ts S um
”
ec i t t o sa y that Donaldson s
.
' ‘
H
—
an d ook of S p ecifications
'
b
m us t be ti g ht by all archi tects B m lder . .

B oi l er an d F a c tor y C hi m n ey s .
BO ILE R A ND F
A CTOR Y C HIMNE YS Thei D aught power r r -

d S t bil i wi h Ch p W
C E t
an a L i gh i g C d t By R t ter on
y th f T
; a a t n n - on uc ors . O B E RT IL
“ ”
s on , S B il u C 8 3 6d l h
or o re a t i se on tea m
b b k f i ki d l f f l M u n r—
. .
, o ers . r . v o, s, . c ot .

A m ost valua le
‘

L l G oo o ts n fu l
Ck m td . o use u o nta
i ee oca overn m m t r e.
 DE CORA TI VE A RTS , etc. 1 3

D E C O RAT IVE ART S , et c .

W oo ds a n d M a r bl e s ( I m i ta ti o n of ) .

SCHOOL OF PA INTING F OR TH E IMITA TION OF WOODS

AND M ARE L E S T a ught an d P rac tis ed by A R VAN D E R B ua c an d P
, as . . .

V a n D E R B v a c , D irec tors of the Rotte rda m Pa in ti n In s ti tuti on Roy al folio, .

1 8 } by i s } ii i , I l lus tra t ed w i th full-s iz e C oloure d P a tes ; a ls o 1 2 lain P la te s ,

. p
c om p
ris in g 1 5 4 Fi gures , rice 2 1 2 3 6d p . .

L is t of C on ten ts
i n troduct ory C ha te r
—b p
T ools re uire d for
W ood Pala ti n O se rva tion s on the difle re n t
M e thods of q
orki ng - Ye llow S ien na M ar le
Proce s s of Work in g Jun i e r : C ha rac t er is tics
W — p b
—b
'

s cie s of
ar ble in
P a in ting
ood :
n e ral
aln ut
T ools
t R e m i M ar le :
—W
O se rv ati on s on
a i re d fo r Ma r le
a ra t ion of t he
o f t he N

b
a tu ra l ood : M e t hod of i m ita ti on
b
W
Pain ts : Proc ess of
.

P
orkin gb “ ood G ra in in W
Pre p a ra tio n of S t iff a n d F lat Brus hes : S k e t c
ditle re n t G rai ns a n d Kn ots : C iaz i
—
'

i of
oo d —
As h : Pa i n o f Ash B re che re
b
c ia )M a r le
— p B reche i ole tt e Process of Work
—
i n g Ma le Process of Work ing The differe n t

:P e m es of Whi te Mar le : Me t hods of orkin g b W

Whit e Mar le wi th L a c dy e Pain t in g b —
pp p
.

a i n tin
i
o

W h it e ‘arble w ith Po y - a in t Mahogan y :

L is t of P la tes .

V a rious T ools req uire d for ood Pa in t in g W

1 .

W —
a, 3 aln ut : Pre lim i na ry S
po f G rain in g
-
.

a n d F in is he d S ec im en
b
M a r le Pain
6 S t Rem i
4 00 15
a n d Met hod of M a n i ulat ion
used for .

p p
p —
a rble : E a rlie r O e ra t ion s a n d

—
. .

i n ished S e c im en 7 Met hods of S ke t chin g .

d iffe re n t G ra ins , Kn ots . ac 8 . 9 Ash : Pre

li m ina
M e th
S
of
an d
it e t chi
in ished S
M ar le
‘
im e n
ra i ns
Fio
i x. 1 2
.

b
.

— .

b W
.

B r e che Mar le : Pre li ork in

an d F
in is he d S e c im e n x3
St
p of
a p le : M e t h
'
—
s .

—
e p—
o f Prod uc in g th e diffe re n t G ra in s
M a le : Pre lim inary S t
i s, I
s an d
:
B ird s
in is h e d
w i
p ec im e n xo M e t hods of
fe re a t S e c ie s of
b
p W
.e t c hin g th e dif
hite M a rbleh i
M a r le : Preli m i na ry S tag e s of roc ess a n d
i s h it e . W
p
A c om re he nsive guide t o t he a rt The e x lan a tions of the rocesses , the m an i ula tion an d
.

m an age m e n t of t he c olours , an d the bea ut ifu ll e xe c ut e d la tes w il n ot be th e leas t va ua ble to the

p p
s t ude n t w ho aim s a t m ak in g his w ork a fa it hf t ra nsc ri p t of na ture - B m ld i n g New s
” ' '

p
. .

“
S tude n ts an d n ov ic es are fortuna te who are a le t o ecom e the ossessors of s o n oble a b b
C olo u r .

A GRA MM AR OF COLO URING . Ap plied to D ecorat iv e

Pa in ti n g an d t he Arts By G n oa c s Fi s L D Ne w E di ti on , a da ted to the us e
. . p
of t h e O rn a m e n t a l P a i n te r a n d D e s ign e r B y E n n i s A D a v i n s o u Wi th New . . .

C olou red D i a gram s a n d E n gra v i n gs ram o, 35 Gd c lot h b oa rds

p p p —B m ld
. . . .

‘
T he b
ook is a m os t use ful r es um e of the ro ert ie s of igm ents .
” °

er .

G l a s s Pa i n t i n g .

GLA SS STA INING A ND TH E A RT OF PA INTING ON

G L AS S F th G fD rom e erm a n o r G a s s a a r a n d E m a n u a i O r r o F a ou e a a c
'

App di x
. . .

p
.

Wi h T A E n s u en nm c ram o, as M c loth li m
'
t an en on as a r or . . .

D e c or a ti o n .

E LE ME NTA R Y DE CORA TION A G uide to the Sim p ler

x
.

Form s of E v e ry da y Art , a s a li ed to the In te rior an d E te ri or D ecora tion ofp

D w e llin g ouse s , &c By H
AM E S W Fa c s v , Jun . W it h 68 C uts i s m o, as .

p
. . .

c lot h li m
p b —
.

b
As a t e chn ic al guide - ook t o the de c ora t iv e a in te r it w ill be foun d re lia le B u ildi n g New s .
‘

H ous e P a i n ti n g, e tc .
HOUSE PA INTING GRA INING MA RB LING A ND SIG N
I A D D N F th E diti
, , ,

WRITING A P ti l M l f By E , r ac ca an ua o LL S AV I S O our on .
Wi th C l
. . .

d Pl t dW d E g i g o l th b d
—
o oure m a es an oo n rav n s. is o, s. c o oa r s
p i l
.

"
A
m ass o f i f i f h f l
n orm a t on, o E g use to t e am ate ur an d o t o t he ract ca l i sli
’

v a ue m an . n
M ech a n ic
S i pl i p i p
.

“
l bl
m y i n va ua i l lli g d highly
to the y oni ter en te r n g u on t h s a rt cu ar ca n an serv ce
i 1 5
e ,

able h h i
to t e m an w o s practisii i g G 5 u r m t m 'e a z ette.
’
 CR OSB Y LO CKWOOD s co s CATA LO GUE
’
14 . .

DEL/M10TTE 8 ’
WORKS on lLt U/ltl/VATION A LPHA BETS .

A PRIME R OF TH E A RT OF ILL UMINA TION fo the U e ] ,

r s s
B gi wi he nners t a R di m
u t y T ti th A t P
e n ar i l Di t
i f
rea se on e r ra c t ca rec ons or
i x i d
t s e e rc se, an n um e rous E x m pl t k f m I ll um i
a t d MS S p t di
es a en ro
,

na e .
, rin e n
G old an d C olours . B y F D a u m or r a
.
' '
. S m all 4to, 93 . elegan tly boun d, cloth
an t i que
p
.

exam le s of an cien t M S S re com m e nded t o the studen t.

T he hich. with mi di w
b
.

E n o w le dg e. as we ll as tas te .
"
A th en e um . —
ood se ns e. the a uthor c hooses fr om c ollec t ions ac c ess i le to all, are se lec t e d Wi th j udgm ent a l

ORNA M E NTA L A LPHA B E T5 A ncient a nd M edie va l from the

x
, ,

E ig hth C en tury , w i th Num era ls ; in cl udin g G othic , C hurc h-T e t, large and
s m a ll, G erm an , I tal ian , Ara bes ue , In i tia ls for I llum i n a t i on , Mon ogram s, q
C ros ses , &c . &c , for t he us e of Arc hitec tura l an d E n in ee ri n g D ra ughtsm en,
. .

Mi s sal Pain ters , Mas on s , Decora ti v e Pain ter s, L i t ogra p hers , E n grav ers,
.

C a rv ers, &c , &c C o lec ted an d E n gra v ed b F D a u u o r r n , an d ri n ted ill

l . .
' '
. p
New an d C he a er E diti on Roy 8v o, oblon g, 2 3 6d ornam ental p . . .

s.
F or those who insert e nam elle d se n ten c es roun d gilde d chalices. w ho laz o n s ho le gends over
p
rs , w ho le tte r ch urc h walls Wi th ithy se n t en c es from t he De calog ue, t his
b
b
p
sm zo
o -d ook wi ll be use
0
p h‘ ’m m e

E XA MPL E S OF M ODE RN A L PHA B E TS Pl ain a n d O rnam ental

li h S x n I l i P
,

i l di g G O ld E
nc u n e rm an , n s a o t a c, e ct i v e , G reek, ebrew, H
H
, ,
Co urt an d, E n ross in g, uscan , Ri b an d, G othic , us t ic, a n d Ara os;
g
w ub se v eral O ri gi n a l D e s i s , a n d an An al y s is of the Rom an an d Old E
p
Al habe ts , la rge a n d s m a a n d Num erals , for th e use of D ra ugh ts m en , os
v e y ors , Mas on s , D ecorat i v e Pa in ters , L i thogra h ers, E n v e rs , C arv ers, ac p .

C ollec ted an d E n gr av ed by F D E L AMO T I E , an d p ri n ts i n C olours New .

‘ ‘
.

an d C he ap er E di t i on Roy al 8 v o, oblon g, as M orn am en ta l boards

p p p
. . . .

The re is com rised in it every oss i le sha e i n to w h ic h the le tte rs o f the a lp habet and
‘
b
n um erals c a n be form e d. an d the ta len t w h ic h ha s ee n exp e nde d in the c onc e p ti on of the various b
p —
la i n an d ornam e n tal le tte rs is w on de rful ”
S ta n da r d
p
. .

b
T his v olum e has orn e the t est of rac t ica l use , a nd is in v aria ly spoke n well of by those who b
p osse ss i t
”
y ew el ler a
. n d M eta l -
w or ker . .

ME DIA? VAL A L PHA B E TS AND INITIA L s F OR IL L mm .

NA TORS B y F D E L AMO T T E , Illum in ator, D es i gn er, an d E n av er on Wood

. . .

C o n ta i n in g z i Pla te s an d Illum i na t ed T i tle , rin ted in C O d an d C olours .

Wi t h an In troducti on by W IL L IS B a oo xs m al l 4to, o s c loth gi lt J . . . .

A v olum e in whic h the le tt e rs of the b rifle d in g ildin g an d ail the colours

of the p ris m in terwov e n an d in t e rt w in e d an lp
a ha e t c om e forth
in te rm ing led
”
im . .

TH E E MB ROIDE RE R S ’
B OOK OF DE SIGN . C on tainin g
In itia ls , E m blem s , C y he r s , M o p
am s . O rnam e n ta l Borde rs . E c cles iastical
D ev i c es , Media v al an d Mod e rn ba ba ta an d Na ti on a l E m blem s Col .

le cted by F D E L AM O TT E , an d rin ted i n C olours

. O blon g roy a l 8y o, i s 6d , p . . .

orn am en tal w ra er pp
p
.

T he designs are rac t ica l- n ot des that can n ot be done in e m broi de ry 3an d the b ook will
b
n o dou t be foun d e xc ee di ng ly use ful in e la dy s w ork-room an d In sc hools
”
Newca s tle Conra il '
.
— .

a rt of
The book w ill be of g re at ass is ta n ce to la dies a n d o ung childre n w ho are e n dow ed with the
p
ly in g the n eedle in this m os t ornam e n tal and us ul re tty work
”
E as t A n g l ia n Ti m es p .
— .

Wood C a r vi n g .

INSTR UCTIONS IN WOOD CAR VING for A m ateurs with -

DY
,

Hi Pl t
n t s on t i mbl m t Design . B y A LA . Wi th T en large a e s, as. Ge . n e e a ic
pper
w ra
p
.

— t he wood-carve r. so w ell as a b ook ca n im it, m a y be learnt from A

‘

p bli ti
T h h di craft of a rt
“
e an

—
'
La
”
dy u on . A tk em t u m
pl i
s ca .

"
T he dire ct ions given are a n an d eas ily un de rs tood. E-ng l isli M echa n i c.

L e tte r g
P a i n ti n .

TH E ART OF L E TTE R PA INTING M A D E E A SY By

Wi th i s i nli pa ge E n grav in gs of E xam ples
.

F
us s G am e B a n a n oc u .
-
, 1 3. cloth
im p

p
.

q
wb —
Th e s y s te m is a sim but uit e 0
le
‘
on e nai an d w e ll w orth the r6 fi ii attientlou of lctttl
‘

painters . It can be ea sily m ast c;ed a nd t w er é

d .
"
s w; u ng
1 6 CROSB Y LOCKWOOD 6 CO S C .
’
A TA LOG UE .

Ti m b er M er c ha n t ’
s C om p a n i on .

TH E TIM B E R
M E RCHA NT S A ND B UILD E R S C OM
’ ’

P ANION C on ta i n in g Ne w a n d C opious T ables of the Red uced W e i ght an d

Meas ure m en t of
D ea ls an d B att en s , of all s i z es , from On e to a T housan d
Pi eces an d t he re la ti v e Pri ce tha t each s i z e be ars r L in ea l Foot to an y
gi v en P r ic e r Pe te rs burg S tan dard un dre d ; t he r i c e p er C u be Foot of H
q
S uare Ti m r to a n y gi v en Pri c e p er Loa d of Fee t ; t he r o o rtion ate p p
V alue of Dea ls an d Ba t te n s b th e S ta n dard, to uare Ti m b e r by t h e L oad q
o f so F e e t ; the re adie s t m e of as ce rtai n in g t he Pr ic e of S ca n t l in g p er
L i n ea ]Foot of an y s i z e , to an y gi v en Fi gure pe r C ube Foot Al s o a v a riety .

of oth e r v a lua ble in for m a tion B y Wi L L t A i t D o w s t tt c , T i m be r M e rc hant

. .

Thi rd E di ti on , Rev ise d an d C orrec ted C row n 8 v o, 3s , clot h

p
. . .

E v e ry t h ing is as con c ise an d c lear as it can oss i ly be m a de The re can be n o d ou t that b— b

p
‘

b
.

e ve ry ti m e r m e rc han t an d builde r ought to Il a ll A dv er ti s er

”
ossess ir . .

We are gla d to se e a third edit ion of these ad”m ira le ta les. w hich for corre c tn ess and b b
p
s im lici ty of a r ran g e m e n t lea ve n othin g t o be des ire d Ti m ber Tr a d es y ou m a l . .

Pr a c ti c a l Ti m b er M er c ha n t .

TH E PRA CTICA L TIMB E R ME RCHA NT B ein g a G u ide

f B ildi g C B ild
.

for t he use o u n t S
on ra c tors , yurv e ors u ers , &c , c om ri s in g p
ur os es c on n ec ted w i th tfie Ti m be r T rad e , M a r k s of
p p
.

use ful T a bles for all

Wood E ssa y on the S tren gt h of T i m be r, Re m a rk s on the G rowt h of T i m be r,
&c y W Ri c i i Aitn s o n
. Fca 8 v o, 3s 6d c lot h
. . p . . . .

T his han dy m an ual c on ta ins m uc h v alua le in form a tion for t he use of tim e r m er chan t s . b b
h tn lde rs. fores te rs, an d a ll others c onn ect e d wi th the g rowt h, sale. a n d m a n ufa c ture o f tim er b .

j o ur n a l of F or est ry
—
.

b
T o t im e r m e rchan ts or use rs this com pact t re at ise will be foun d v e ry use ful
"
Il ti ¢rer a l ed . .

Ti m b er ght B ook
F r ei .

TH E TIMB E R ME RCHA NT S SA W
, M E , A ND ’
ILL R S '

IMPORTE R S F RE IGH T B OOK AND ASS IS TANT C om p ri s in g R ules ,

’
.

T a bles , an d Mem oran da re la ti n g t o t he T i m be r T ra de B y W IL L IAM .

Ri c n a a n s on , T im be r B rok er ; to
"
e the r w i th a C ha ter p on
“
S pee d s of Saw
M ill Ma chi n ery , by M P om s . AL E , Bi c . r am o, 33 6d . . c loth .

Ta ble s f or P a ck i n y C a se M ke r s
a .

PA CKING CA SE TA B L E S ; -
show in g the n um ber of S u p er
h i l F
o si B x P ki g Cee t n o es or ac n - ases , from s i x in c he s s q uare an d upw a rd s
Ti b B k
.

By V R
c la t X . i c a a n n s on , m er ro er. S econ d E di tion . O blon g 4 to, 3s 6 d

—G
. .

Will save m uch la our an d cal c ula tion b

—1
to m ak ers an d users of p a ckin g ca ses.
"

I
-
r orrr .
n va lua bl l b
e a our-sav in g ta ble s.
”
r on m on g rr

S u p er fi c i a l M e a s u r e m en t .

TH E TRA DE SMA N S G UIDE TO SUPE R F ICIA L ’

ME A
S URE ME NT Ta ble s ca lc ula ted from r t o 200 i n c hes i n le n t h , by r t o 1 0 8
.

g
i n c hes in brea dth F or the use of Arc hitec ts , S urv e y or s , E n n ee rs , T i m be r
H
.

Me ha i ts B uilders, &c. B y Ja n n a AWKING S Third di ti on F ca p ,

a
gi
.

c otfi
. .

33 .

F or es tr y .

TH E E E ME L N TS OF F ORE STR Y . D es ign ed to affor d In

form a ti on c on cern in g t he P lan ti n g an d C are of Fore st T rees for Orn am e n t or
fi
P ro t , w ith S ugges ti on s upon the C re ati on an d C are of Woodlan ds B y F . . B .

H ov o it . L arge crow n 8 v a, ros. c loth.

Tim b er I m p or ter ’
s G u i de .

TH E TIMB E R IM PORTE R ’
S, T IMB E R M E RCH ANT S A ND ’

B UIL D E R S S TAND ARD G UID E

'
By t n a nn E G u n n r C om p ri s
H p
. . .

i n g a n An a l s i s of D ea l S ta n dar ds , om e a n d Fore ign , w i th C om a ra ti v e

V
alue s an d a b lar Arran ge m e n ts for fi i n
u
a n d North Am eri can D ea ls i n c l din
g N e t t L an ded C os t on B a l t i c x
al l i n term ed ia te E x F
u g s es
In s uran ce , &c , &o s to ether w i th c ep ious I n form a ti on or t he Re t a i le r
, re i gh t ,

g . .

an d B ui ld e r S econ d E di tion t caref0 11Yrev i se d an d correc ted i z m o, 33 ad

.
. .

c loth board s
p
.

b
E v ery thin g i t re ten ds t o be : uilt i t 'i-ii duall it lea ds on e from a fore s t to a
g
y,
a m ak ewe i ht, a host of m s t r a c on ce rn in k gzg t ree n a i l. a n d
g ri c s. colum n s. ciste rn s, & c
"
E n g l is l e b .
—
 NING A ND MINING I D US TRIE S .

M IN IN G AND M IN IN G IND U S TRIE S .

M in in g in th eUn i t e d K i n gdom .

B RITISH MINING : A Treatise on the H istoty D iscoveiy , Praetical .

D evelopm en t, a n d F uture P ros cts of Meta lliferous M i n es i n the Un i ted Ki ng

dom B Ros e s r
.
'
NT ,
g HU
Kee er of M i n i n ’ Records ; E di tor of p
Ure s iction a ry of Arts , Man ufac tures , an d Min es , &c U w ards of 95 0
’
. p
p p , w i th 2 30 Illus tra ti on s
. S u e r roy al 8 v o, 3 33 c loth . p - . .

Sy n o s is o
p f C on ten ts
BO O KI Rp I BOOK R
P AC T IC AL Mi NING III R — p
.

—
H IST O IC A L S KE TC H O F B IT IS H C ha I . .

p
. .

M NN I I G C ha
l l M i n in —
M in ing Pre v ious t o t he
. . p ts cove oi M ineral L od es a n d t he O e n
II p
R om an In v asiom
—III
.

duri n g t he i ng of m es - Pra c tical O e ra t ions fo r

—
. .

Rom an O c en tion i n i n g t o t he the E xt ra ct i on of Meta ll ife rous 0 res Il l

IV M in in
.

— Ven tila tion a n d D ra in a

.

of M in e s. & c
.

— .

E l htee n th
an Co pp—
e n t ury
e r t o the E n d of t he
V M in ing for L ea d, S ilv e r, & c .
for T i n
.

ig ht e e n t h
.

D re ssm g M e tallife ro us res : Pre a ra ti on for

Disc ov ery an d E xtracti on of
IV

— ge p . .

C e n tu . S m e lter V
—
Iron Ores from V eins a nd other Dep osi ts
. . .

t o the n d of t he E i gh t ee n th C e n t u
b
G o ld, Plum ago, ron O re , a n d S un ries to
t he E n d of the E ig htee n th C e n t ury
I VI
BOO K IV T H E T
.

E P O S PE CTS O F . FU —
UR RI
.

B RIT IS H M INING
BOO K II ON T H E
L IP B RO US D E POS ITS
. F R— p I
O MAT ION O F M E T AL
T he Roc k s
C ha
E xa m ina tion of t he Pro a e E xha ust ion o f
M e talli fe rous M in e rals l l On t he L im its
S um m a ry ,
b
—
.

—III
C ha
o f M m ing D istricts. an d t he D ist ri uti on of b
. . . .

of the M e talli fe rous Z on e

M e ta lhfe rous De osits l l M e c ha n ics o f p — re c e of O res a t G rea t De t hs or in Ne w
T he Oc c ur
p . .

M in e ra l L ode s, a ults, C ross C ourse s & cF n

D is t ri c ts IV m rov em en ts an d E c onom y
.

— I p —
III
— . T h e L a w s re la ti n g t o M i ne ra l D e p os us
b
l V Re m a rka le Phe n om e na o se r v e d in
i n Work ing B riti s h M in es
b
. .

V Ge n e ral S um
.

A e ndix Glossa ry
. .

— pp — .

M e talli fe rous O re De os its

.

p n i ar
of
a n d C on c lus ion
e rm s

p
. .

b
O n e of the m os t v alua le w orks of re fe re n c e of m ode rn t im es M r H un t. as kee e r of m in in g
pp
“
. .

re c ords of the Un it e d Ki n g dom . has ha d o o rt un it i es for suc h a t ask n ot e nj oy e d by a n y on e e l

a n d ha s e vi de n t ] m a de the m ost of the m T he la ng uag e and st y le a do ed a re ood, an
g ?
t he trea tm e n t 0 th e various su j e ct s la ori o b b
.

”
us, consc i e n tious an d sc ie n t ifi c n g m eer mg . .

“
A m ass of i n form ation n ot e lse w he re a v a ila le, an d of the g rea t est v alue t o th ose who m a y
— b
be in t e rest e d in our gre at m in eral in d ust ri es E n gr n eer
‘

. .

b
A s oun d. usi n e ss-like collect ion of in t e resti n g fa c ts T he a m oun t of in form a tion
pp
“

b
.

M r H un t has rought t oge t he r is e n orm ous T he v olum e a ea rs likely t o con v ey m ore

p b
i ns truct ion u on th e su j e c t than an y work hithe rto u lis hed
”
M rm n g y ou m a l
.

pb .
— ’ ’

b b
.

—b
T he w ork will be for the m in in g in dust ry w hat D r Perc y s c e le rated trea tise has ee n for the
—
’

b
.

"
cal a ook tha t cann ot wi th a d van tage be om i tt ed from t he li rary
‘

me l r on a n d Coa l .

-
T r a d es e erie w
bb
Pro a l n o one in this c oun try was et t e r ualifie d t han M r H un t for un de rtak in g such a b q
p p
“

q
.

w ork . B roug t in t o fre uen t a n d c lose associ a t i on d uri n g a lon g li fe ti m e with the ri n c i a l g ua r
d ians of our m in e ral an d m e tallurgi ca l in dust ri es . h e e nj o ed a os it ion e xce t i onally fa v oura le
for c olle cti ng t he n e cessary in form ation T he use w hich e has m a de of his o . ort un i ties is s uffi y
p ppp b
us t b een u lishe dpb
ri tis h M in ing . M r H un t tre
In . p
c ie n t ly a tt es te d by t he dense m ass of in form a t ion c row ded in t o t he han dsom e v olum e w hi c h ha s
la c in g e fore t he re ade r a ske t c h of the re sen t os iti on of
b
b
a ts his su j ect so full an d i llus t ra t es it s o am ly tha t this sect ion re ally p p p
form s a li ttle t rea tise on ra c ti ca l m in in
i n form a ti on on m i n
.

'
s u j e c ts , a n d w e
pb he ook is. in fa ct, a t reasure -house of s tatisti ca l
ow of n 0 othe r wo rk e m body i s o g rea t a m ass of m a tt e r
b
o f t h is ki n d
p e re
b
W . t he on ly m e ri t of M r H u n t s v olum e it w ould
b
'
s ufl c i en t t o ren d er it
.

p
gi ca l in dust ri es of this c oun t ry
"
A tlt en a u m —
i n dis e nsa le in the li ra ry of e ve ry on e i n t e re s ted in the dev elo m en t of th e m in ing an d m e tallur

p p
. .

The litera ture of has hithe rt o ossessed n o w ork p roa c hin in im ortan ce t o th at
b T he re is m uc h in M r H un t s ua ble w or that ev er y share holde r
—
p
’
w hich has ust ee n ublish
b—
.

i n a m in e ould re a w ith c lose a t ten t ion T he e n t ir e su j e c t of ra cti cal m in in g from the fi rs t

.
"
s ea rc h for the lod e t o the la te st stages of dress g the o e in r is d ea lt w i t h in a m ast e rly m an n e r .

C oa l an d Ir o n .

TH E COA L A ND IRON INDUSTRIE S OF TH E UNITE D

KINGD O M C om pris i n g a D e sc ripti on . C oal Fi e lds , an d of the Pri n c i of the

p a l S e a m s o f C oa l w i th Re turn s of the i r Produc e an d i t s D i s tr ibution , an d

V
,

An a ly s e s of S ec ial ari e t ie s p
Also a n Acc oun t of the occ urren c e of Iron
V H
.

O res i n e i n s or S e am s An al y ses of eac h Vari e ty ; a n d a i s tory of th e

°

Ris e an d Progre s s of Pig ron Man ufa cture s in ce the y ear 1 7 40 , e hi bi ti n g the x
E con om ics in troduced i n t he las t Furn aces for i ts Produc ti on an d Im ro v e B p
m en t B y Ri c n a a n M ean s , As si s tan t Ke e e r of M in i n
. Re c ords W i th p
p p
.

M a s of the C oal Fields an d Iron s ton e D e osi ts of the n ited Kin gdom .

8 v c , f I 83 c loth
p
. .

T he b
ook is on e w hi ch m ust find a la ce on t he she lv es of all in terested in coal and iron
”
—E
p roducti on, an d in the iron , st ee l. an d ot her m e tall urg i c al i n dus t ries . n g m eer .

O f t his b
ook w e m a y un rese rv e dly sa y t hat it is the bes t of is : class w h ic h we hav e e ve r m e t .

A book of re fere n c e w hic h n o on e en ga g e d i n the iron or c oal t ra des s h ould om it from h i s

li bia ry — ”
Ir on a n d C oa l Tr a der Rev i ew .
’

b b
.

the p p
re
An trea tise a n d a va lua le work of re fe re n ce
e xhaustiv e
a ration of the w ork has in v olve d m ust ha v e e e n en orm ous
"
T he am oun t of la our w hic h
M i n i ng y our n a l b
.

.
— .

c
1 8 CROSB YLOCKWOOD 6 CO S CATALOG UE .
’
.

M e ta l l if er ou s M i n e r a l s an d M in in g .

TR E A TISE ON ME TA LLIF E RO US MINE RAL S AND

MINING B D C D Mi i g E gi
. & A h . . AV IE S , n n A n n ee r, c . ut or bf “

Illus tr a te d w i th n um e r o u s Wood
,
"
T rea ti se on la te an d S la te Q ua rr in g .

E n gr av i n gs S e con d E di ti on , c a re l ly Rev i se d C row n 8 v o, 1 23 6 d c loth

p
. . . . .

Ne it he r t he
—
rac t ic al m in er n or t he g e n e ral rea de r interes te d in m in es. can hav e a b e tt e r b ook
for his c om p an ion an d his guide
”
M m m g oun ta l. y
p
.

A b k that be d l
use ful t o t he ge olog ist.
pb racti cal m in er, an d l
’

w ill n ot on ly th e the in e t u
—
‘
oo rgs
”
but als o v e ry i n te res t m g t o t he ge n e ral u li c Ir e n
p
. .

As a his t ory of the resen t s tat e of m i n i ng t h roughout t he w orld this ook has a re a l va lue b
a n d it s u
p l
s uc h li m i te d s
p p
i es a n ac tua l w an t for n o s uc h in form at i on has hithe rt o
"
a ce . —Atl ,

t en a u m
een roug ht t og e t h e r Wi t hi n
.
b b
,

E ar thy M i n er a l s an M in in g
d .

A TRE A TISE ON E A RTH Y AND OTHE R MINE RA LS

AND MINING C D av m s , E Q S . Un ifor m w i th , an d form i n g a
By D . . . . .

p
C om an i on V olum e t o, t he sa m e Author s
"
’
M e ta lli fer ous Mi n e r al s an d
Min in g W i th 7 6 Wood E n grav i n gs
. C row n 8 v o, i z s 6d c loth . . . .

R
— —I —
PA T
—
S ilic
.
S um m a ry of C on ten ts
fl um m a L im e - Magn esia
a .
—
hate of L im e
—
PA T III C a rbon an d C om p . R pb
.

R
G ucina e conl a
b
T horia w it h som e of
R II p oun ds of C a rbon S ul h ur P A T IV
b — —
—
. .

t he i r c om in a tions . PA T C hlori de of Arse n ic C o alt

. M oly den um An ti m on y
Sod ium ( C o m m on Sa m Nit rate of Soda
— —
Borax Ba ry ta C y p w m Al um S hale Phos — a n d M ang an ese
S u stan ces
C lasa i fie d L is t of M in e ral
— b
p p p
.

It is ess en t ially a rac ti cal w ork, in te n ded rim arily for th e use of ra cti c al m e n We
b
.

p —
do n ot rem e m e r t o ha v e m e t w i t h a n E n glish w ork on m i
a m oun t of in form a ti on a ck ed in e q u y c on v e ni e n t form
"
Ar
m a tt e rs tha t con ta in s t he sam e
ny . .

Un der gr ou n d Pu m pi n g M a c hi n e r y .

MINE DRA INAG E B i g C om p l t d Pr . e n a e e an ac t ica l T re a tise

on Direc t-Ac tin g Un der oun d S team P um in g Mac hin ery , w ith a D e sc ri p p
t ion of a large n um ber 0 th e be s t kn ow n E u i n es , t he ir G e n eral U t i li ty a n d
p
t he S ec ial S here of t heir Ac ti on , th e p ode of t he ir A lica t i on , a n d pp
p
the i r m eri ts c om a red w it h other form s of Pum in g Machin e ry B y S r s rgn s u p .

M t c ii E L L 8 v o, 1 5s c loth
. . .

‘
w m be hig hly est ee m ed b
c olliery own ers an d les sees, m in in g en i n eers, an d s t u den ts
q ui re t o be a c ua n te d w i th the q i b s
ne ra lly
a m ost v alua
w ho re

C M Q U Gua r dia n .
b le w ork, an d stan ds alm os t alone
m eans of se curin g t he ra in age o f m in es
e st
in the literature of st eam um ing m a c h i n ery p p .

.
”
It

M in in g Tools .

A M A NUA L OF M INING TOOLS For t he Us e o f M i n e

B Wi L L i Ai t Monoan s L ec ture r on Prac
.

Man a Agen ts,

rs , , S tuden ts &c .
,

ti c al i n in g at the B ri s tol S c hool 0 Min es . ram o, 33 . c loth boa rds .

A TLA S OF E NC RA VINGS to Illus tra te the abov e, c on ta in

i n g 2 35 Illus trat ion s of Mi n in g T ools , draw n t o s ca le .
4 to, 6s . c loth boards .

p S tuden ts in the scie nc e of m in in g . and ov erm en . ca ta ins. m anager an d v iewe rs m a ga in

ractical kn ow ledg e and use ful hin ts by the st udy of M r h orga n s m an ua l
' s
,
C oll i ery Gua ta n . I .
— ‘

C oa l M i n i n g .

COA L A ND COA L M INING : A R udim e n ta ry T eatise on

r By
W R N
.

NW S
A I G TO &c , C hi e f In spec tor of t he Mi n e s of
uv r n ,
'
M A,
New E dition , Rev i se d an d C orrec te d Wi th n um er ous I llus tra
. . . .

t he C row n . .

ti on s ram o, 4s cloth boards

. . .

As a n outlin e is giv en of ev e k n ow n coal-field in this an d other coun tries, as well as of t"he

p p
ri n ci al m e t hod s of w orkin g , the
M i m n g y o ur n a l .
k will dou tless in terest a v ery large n um er of rea ders b b .

M i n i n g S u r ve y i n g .

TH E MINE RA L SUR VE YOR A ND VA L UE R S COMPLE TE '

G UID E B y W IL L IAM L INI E RN, Min i n g a n d C iv il E n gin e e r

.
‘ ‘
. W i th Four
Pla tes of D ia gram s , Pla n s , &c ram o, 4s c loth boards . . .

C
n t o
"
b
a in s m uc h v al ua le in form a tion gi ve n in a sm all c om p m
—
an d w hi ch, as far as w e have
test ed i t, is th oroughly trustwort hy Ir on a n d C oa l Tra des Rev i ew . .

S u bte r r a n ve y i n g e ou s S ur .

SU B TE RRA NE O US SUR VE YING , E lem en tary an d P ractica l

T ti
rea se on , w it h an d w i t out the
h Ma gn etic Nee dle B y T n ou a s F E NWi c s ,
.

S urv e y or of M i n es, an d 1 IIO M A8 Bu s s, C E . . Illus tra ted ram o, 3s c lot h . . .

20 C ROSB Y LOCKWOOD 6 CO S .
’
CATA L O GUE .

NATURAL PH IL O S O PH Y AND S C IE N C E .

E le c tr i ci ty .

A MA N UA L OF E LE CTRICITY : Includi g G al n va n ism , M ag

ti
ne D i M g ti m E l t
sm Dy i M g E l t i i ty
e- a ne s ec ra- na m cs , a n o- ec r c and the E l ectri c
T l ' ph B y H NR M N A
, , ,

ee a Ph D FC S F E I O D, our th E di ti on
Wi tfis W d t 8 £ 4 l th
. . . .
, . . . .

oo oo c u s . v o, 1 3 c o
p
. .

dl l i i d i my l i gal van s m "are n ot 0 n a sci en tifi c se nse,

Th
ppl lv e n e e ctr c ty an
“

but ,
e acoounts
g
w hi ch is a rarer i i — thing . are o u ar an d n te res t n g . L¢
m eet.
com ete

Am ongt he num e rous wr ite rs on the a tt racti v e a n d fascinat in g sub

i uthor of the p rese n t v olum e has occu i e d our es t at ten tion
b b —
It is w o
li rary of e v ery p u lic i nst itution . an d w e ha v e n o dou t it will be deserv
of a p
j e ct of electri c it y , the
la ce i n t he
a tron ise d by th e
b
b
.

w p
fi
scie n ti c c om m un ity
”
M i ni n g j our n a l . .
y p

Tex t B E l e c tr i c i t y
oole of .

H STUD NT ’
S T E X T -B
OOK OF E L E CTRICITY
a
T E E y .

H e rm it M NO An Ph D FC S New E dit ion carefully Re v i s

W ith an I n troduc ti on an dAddi ti on al C h a ters , by W H R
. . . .
. , .
,

P EE C E , M I C E . . . . .

Vice-P res iden t of t he S om e of T ele grap E n gi n e ers , &c Wi th 47 0 Ill u s t ra .

tion s C row n 8 v o, m 64 c ot h
p
. . . .

b
T he origin al la n of this ook has ee n carefully a dhered to so as to m a k e it a refle x o f the b
p
“

ex
‘

state of elec t r ica l sc ie n ce. ada te d for s tude n ts. isc ove ry see m s t o ha v e ro D
with m arv ellous st ri des ; neve rt hele ss it has n o w p pa re n tly ceased. an d p racti eal a p p ea
ti ons ha ve com m e nc e d t h e i r caree r
'
and i t is t o g i ve a a i th ful accoun t of t hese tha t thi s fres h a—
d N
oad s valua le t ext ook is h un c hed forth.
'
b ”
b
E xtm d f r orn In tr oducti on b H ’
. H .

g
iti on ( r. -
y
e
p "m . 0

“
W e can recom m en d D r. N b
oa d s ook for clear st y le. gr eat ra n e of sub e ct. a good i n de x.
’

an d a p let hora of woodcuts . S uch c ollect ion s as t he rese n t are in dis e n sable A them z u m p— g i
f—
—i
.

“
An adm irable text -book for eve ry st ude n t b e ginn er or ad van ce d o e le c tr i ci ty .

R
A m ost ela bo ate r com pil ation of the fa cts of ele ctrici ty an d m ag n et ism .
—q
"
ula r S c ie n ce

Dr . Noad s text book has earned

'
for itself the re utat ion of a truly scie n tifi c m an ual for the
-

l i nde n t of ele ctric i ty , an d we gladly ha il this n ew am e n d e d edition, w hi ch

p b
the fron t M r Pree c e as rev iser. w i th the assi st an ce of M r H R Kem e a n d r
. .

p
rin it on ce m ore t o
P E d w a rds.
has ad ded all the ra cti cal res ults of re ce n t in v en t ion a n d re se arch to the adm i ra le the o re t i cal
. . . p . .

an y
pb
e x osi tions of the a thor, so that the
u ook is a out as c om le t e an d ad van ced as i t is
ook to be wi thi n t he lim its of a text-boo Teleg ra te y oum a l
b oss i le for b—
.
p b
D r. L a r n er d ’
s db ooks
S c h ool H an .

NATURA L PHILOSOPH Y F OR SCHOOLS B y D r L ARD NE R

S i x h E di i
. . .

328 I llus tra ti on s t on ne . o O tV l 3 6d l . .

, 3. . c oth.
A very c onven ie n t class- ook for j un ior s tude n ts in b
p
ln clear an d re ci se t erm s. g ene ral n ot i ons of all the p r
B r i ti sh Qua r ter ly Rev i ew .
riv ate schools.
n ci p al di v isi ons
It is in te n ded t o c on v e y
of Phy s ica l S c ie n c e
"
.
.

A NIM A L PHYSIOLOGY SCHOOLS B y Dr L ARD N R F OR . . E .

With 9 l ll t ti S d E di ti O V l 3 64 l th
d —
1 0 us ra on s . . ec on on . ne o .
, 3. . c o .

ll g d d '
C ly
to
i lear ill
wr tt e n, w e G d arran e . an e xce ll e n tly us t ra te .
”
ar en er s C h r on icl e .

D r L a/r dn er s E l e c tr i c T e l e gr a p h
.
’
.

TH E E LE CTR IC TE L E GRA PH By D r L ARD NE R Nw . . . e

E diti on Rev ised an d Re-wri tten by E B B Ri G RT
. . . r4o Ill us t t a
ti on s S m all 8 vo, as Gd cloth
p
. . . .

“
On e of the m ost readable b ooks extan t on the E le ctric Teleg ra h .
”
- E ng ti s h M ech a n i c .

F i el d F or ti flc a ti on .

A TRE A TISE ON FIE LD FORTIF ICA TION , TH E A TTA CK

OF F ORTRE S SE S , MIL ITARY MINING , AND RE C ONNOITRING B .

C olon el I S Maca uL Av , late Profe s sor of For tifica ti on i n t he

. .
Woo
w ie h S i xth E di ti on , crown 8 v o, cloth ; w ith s ep arate Atlas of re Pla te s, i z s
.

plete
.

com .

L i ghtn i n g .

TH E A CTION OF LIGHTNING a nd the Mc a ns o f Df e en di n

g
R
,

L ife an d Property from B y Maj or A PA NE L L , R E

.

i ts Ej ects . . . . xz m o, 7 s 6d . .
 NA TURA L PHILOSOPHY A ND SCIE NCE . 2:

G e ol o g y an d G en es i s .

TH E T WIN RE C ORDS OF CRE A TION or Geology and

R
,

d W d
l tK
G i th i P / t H
y l C d B G W
en es s y e r er ec a rm on an on er u oncor . EO GE
V ux
.

V i c TO R LE Nm Ill t ti l p 8 5 a u e rous us ra on s ca v o, 3. c o
d di p
. . .

A l bl ib i
va ua h d f
e c on tr i
ut on to t e e v i en ces o re v ela t o l i f h an s oses v c on c us v ely o t e

an p il
a rgu m e n ts o those w ho wou
f
p d— R
ld
s et
n o so histry s e ft une x ose .
d
G
"
W
od s
‘
k i W
o r s ag a ns t
Tlre ock .
d N difli i h k d
'
s or . o cult y s s ir e .

k bl p li i h bi b dd d i
i p
Th
“
e rem ar a
e ec u a r of t his a uth or s tha t
i e com f
nes an un oun e a m ration o
b dd d
s c ie nce w it h a n un oun e W R b
ly p i d
a m ra ti on o the
f ri tt e n ec ord . T he two m ulses a re a la n ce t o a
d

f h h pp
n i ce t i
; a n d th e conse ue n ce s tha t diffic ult ies w hic h t o m in ds le ss even
ld b o se wou e se rious
ki d —
y q "
fi n d i m m e d a te solut ons o t e a
i i i es t n s. R iL on don ev ew .

T he B l o wp ip e . '

TH E BLO WPIPE IN CHE MISTR Y MINE RALOG Y A ND , ,

G E OL OG Y C t i i kn ow n Methods of An hy drous An al sis m an y

on a n n a ll
W ki g E x m pl y Lieut
.

or n a es . an In st ruc t i on s for Ma ki n A aratus pp .

0 0 1 2 8 1 l t A Ros s , R A , F G S Wi th 1 20 l l ustrati on s C rown 8 v o,

c1o ; 3 a
. . . . . . .

33 . .

C on tents
C R AP 1 Man ufa cture of Die A a ratus late Reactions of Metals an d l x On pp —
ra —
fi
. . . .

relog i cal Mine ralogy a n d a

.

pp
l l C onstructi on of Py rolog ical
S u orts an d A pam t us
pp
A arat us V — &
IV On
the S truct u re a n d Ma
11 1
uxilia ry ra vi tom e te x i nn er C alcium
"
.

&c — Xl
cv S
.
fic
te A
.

W
.

—V l . Balls, C hem ical ate r tionale

I .

F . .

—V I
m en t of ne s . On . Olog ica l
M in e ral
e of O ute r an d nner Ball orm a ti on in Boric

m —Vl l l Fi t Op ti
te
ym
. im l
l
. On Reagen ts an d
rs era ons :
e
um in i um
p
.

Th tud i ti oe s consc e n ously t hrough t he c ourse of e x e rim en tation he re laid down

“
t wh g e s en o
w lli
b tt i i ht i t i e e r ns n o n or a ni c c he m ist ry an d m in eralogy than if he had got up an y of
‘ ’

—
g
a
t xt bo k b "
th e th e day
e - o s o . an an y n um e r of e xam in ations in t he ir con t e n ts C h em i .

m l News .

Th e M i l i ta r y S ci e n c es .

A IDE ME MOIRE TO TH E MILITA R Y SCIE NCE S

- . Fram ed
fr om C on tri buti on s of O fi ce rs an d others con n ec ted w ith the di ffe re n t S e r
v ic e s O ri gi n ally edi ted by a C om m i ttee of t he C or s of Roy al E n n ee rs
. p ‘

Sec on d E di ti on , m os t c a refully re v is e d by a n O fi ce r of the C or s, w it m an y p

Addi ti on s ; con tain in g n early 35 0 E n gra v in gs a n d m an y hun dred Woodcuts
x
.

T hr ee V ols , roy a l 8v c , e tra c loth boa rds , an d lett ered, £4 ros

p
. .

ndious en cy clo e dia of m ilita ry k n ow le dge t o whic h we are greatly indeb

”
A com t ed
'
“
.

lzd m bm g h em e w
—V l
‘
'

p
.

The m ost com rehensive work of re fere n c e to th e m ilitary an d collateral sciences .

’
o ien
k er S er v ice Ge n tle.

A s tr on om y .

A STRONOMY B y the la te Rev RO B E RT M AI N, M A

x
. . . .
.

form R adcliffe Obse rv e r a t O ford Thi rd E dition , Rev ised an d C or

e rly .

p
rec ted t o the re se n t ti m e , by W i L L i Au T H NNE L NN, B A , form e rly Y Y . .

of the Roy al O bse rv atory , G r ee n w ic h ram o, as cloth li m p

p p —
. . .

A soun d and sim le treatise. very carefully edite d an d a ca ital ook for begin ners
”
I( rw , b .

rece n t e di tion see m s to hav e e e n carefully an d ac c r b— u ately b rought down to the req uire
The
m en ts of p
rese nt tim e by Mr. L y n n .
"
Edua z t ion a l Ti m es .

G e olo gy .

GE OLOG Y Phy sical , an d H istori cal . C on s istin g of Phy s ica l

w hich Se ts fort h the le a di n g rin c i les of the S c ie n ce ; an d H is
d
’
C c olo
tori Ge ology , w hich trea ts of the in er an d O rgan ic C on di tion s of the
”

E arth a t each s ucc ess iv e e oc h , e s ec i al re fere n c e be i n g m ade to the B ri ti s h p p

S erie s of Rock s B y RAL P H T ATE . ao , are Wi th ov e r 2 5 0
. . .

I llus tr ati ons i s m o, 5 s cloth boar ds . . .

an d well arrange d
"
\ Sch ool Boa r d Ch r o ni cle .
—
The fulness of the m atter has eleva ted the book in to a m anual ’

.
. Its inform ation is exhaustiv e

C on c holo gy
'
.

MA NUA L OF TH E MOLL USCA A Treatise on Recen t and

F il S h ll
oss B D S P W DW RD A L S With A p di by R
e s r OO A en x AL PH
H
. .
. . . . , .

T AT E AL S F 8 Wi th n um erous Pla tes an d 300 W . . c ut s. an dsom e ly

din cloth boards , 75 6d
. . .

boun . .

A valuable storehouse Qt conchologicgl an d geologi WW Q WW '

" T IM W i fi '‘

35
'
05
are ( 0 an
 CR OSB Y LOCK WOOD a CO .
’
5 CA TALOG UE .

Dr LA RDN
. ER S HA NDBOOKS
’
f N A TU R A L P H I LOS OP
oH Y .

The follow i n g five volum es, ou eac s com e e n se , a n o th g h hi pl t i i t lf d t b p e ur

c ha sed sepa ra tely , form A C ou p L E T E ou Rs E or AT AL H IL O S O H C N UR P P Y Th . e
It has been the a uthor s a i m to su ply M a n u a l s for
’
sty le i s s t udi ous ly popula r . the
S tuden t, t he E n g i n eer, t he Arti sa n , a n d t he s uperior classes i n chools
O

TH E HA NDB OOK OF ME CHA NICS . E n l arged a n d a l m os t t e

w r i tt en by B E NJANIN L oe w y , Wi th 37 8 I ll ustrati on s . P o s t 8 v e,
6s c loth
p
. .

b b b
le n ity of the orig inal has ee n re ta in e d, a n d Cha te rs w hic h ha d e c om e o s olete
p
“
T he e rs
b
hav e e e n re p a c e d by othe rs o f m ore m o de rn c ha rac te r he e x la n at ions t h ro ug ho ut are
b
.

e e n t ak e n to s how t h e a
s t udio us ly

p hy s i s t
c o t
op ula r, a n d c a re has
e in d u s t ria l a rt s , a n d t o t h e ra c t i c a l us in es s of l i e
li
p ”
M i n i n g y o ur
-
p
ca tion of the v arious bra n c hes of
ri a l b p —
q
. .

b b
,

'
“
M r L oe w y has
. ca re fully rei ise d t he oo k . and roug ht it up t o m ode rn re uire m e n t s .

A a tu r e
p b b
.

“
Nat ura l h il osO p h y has had fe w e x on e n ts m ore a le or e tt e r sk illed in t he a rt of p op u
la ris in g t he su j c e t t ha n D r L a rdn er a n d M r L oe u y is doin g g ood se ri ice in tt in g t his t re a t ise
a l t l t h e ot he rs o f t he s e rie s, for use a t t he
'
re se n t t i m e
.

S col m za n p — fi . . .

TH E HA NDB O OK OF H YDROSTA TICS A ND PNE UM A TICS .

New E diti o n , Rev i s e d a n d E n lar ge d by B E NJAMIN L O E W Y , W i th

2 36 Illus tra t i on s P os t 8 v e , ss c loth
p
. .
,

F or t h ose w h o d es ire t o at tain a n a c cura te k n ow le dg e of hy s ical sc ien ce wi th o ut t h e p ro

p
“ ‘

"
foun d m e t h od s o f m a t hem atical i n t est ig ation. t his w ork is n ot m e rely in t e n de d, but w e ll a da te d
—
’
.

C h em zca l New s .

b
The v olum e be fo re us has e e n care fully e dite d. a ug m e n t ed t o n ear y t wi ce t he bul k o f t he
’

—
form e r e d it i on , a n d all th e m os t re ce n t m atte r has ee n a de d
d It s a va lua le t e xt ook
i -
"
b . b b .

N l
p p
a u r e.

C a n dida te s for ass e xa m ina tions will fin d it, w e thin k. s ec ia lly s ui te d to thei r req uirem en ts
}

E n g l i s h Al ech a n i c
. .

TH E H A ND B OOK OF HE A T . E di ted an d a lm os t en t i r e ly re
w ri t te n by B E NJAMIN L O E W Y , F &c . 1 1 7 I llus tra ti on s P o s t 8 v o , 6s . .

c lo th
p
.

T he s ty le is
or lurk in g do u ts b b
alw a y s cle a r an d
e h in d .
"
I: n g m eer m g —
re c ise . a n d c on v e y s
.
in s truction without lea v in g an y c lo udi n ess

b ook on t he s u bj
A m ost e xha us t i v e it trea ts, an d is so a rra n ge d t h a t it can be on w h i c h
p
“
ect
un de rs t oo d by all w ho de s i re t o a ttai n a n a cc ura t e k n o w le dg e o f hy s i ca l sci e n c e M r.
—
.

L oe w y has in clude d a ll t h e lat es t d is cov er ies i n t h e v a ri e d la ws an d e ffe c ts of h e at

”
S t a rrda r d
p —
.

b
.

A com le te a n d han dy t e xt ook for t he us e O f s tuden ts an d gene ral reade rs

“ ” '
-
1 : n g l is h .

TH E HA NDB OOK OF OPTICS . B y D IONYS IUS

form e rly Profe s s or of Na tura l Phi lO s op h y a n d As tron om y i n Un i v e rs i ty
C ol le ge , L on don Ne w E di ti on E di te d by T O L V E R A ING , B A L on d ,
. . . H RD . . .

of U n i v e rs i ty C olle ge, L on don W i t h 2 9 8 Illus trat ion s S m all 8 v o, 448 .

p
.

a ge s , 5 s c lo th . .

W ritt e n b b b
—M on e of t he a le st E n g lish s c ie n tific w rite rs, beaut iq an d ela ora tely
”
y illustra t e d .
’
eclsa m cs ag a s m e.

TH E N BHA D OOK OF E L E CTRICITY MA GNE TISM A ND

L RD N R R R
. ,

AC O US TIC S By D N w E di ti E di d by G r. A E e on . te GE CA EY
R B A F C S Wi h 4 Ill t ti
. . EO
F O STE S ll 8 5 l h t 00 us ra on s . m a v o, 3 c ot
p
. . .
, , . . .

T h b k e b oo b c ould n ot d ha v e ee n e ntrus te d t o a n y on e e tte r calc ula te to reserve the te rse an d

luc id st le of L a rd n e r. b i k
—
w h i le c orre ct in g his errors an d ri n g n g up his w or t o the p res en t st ate of
c kn owledg e
”
c ien t . P op n la r S ci en ce Rev iew .

D r. dn e r s H a n dbook of A s tr on om y
L ar
’
.

TH E HA NDB OOK OF A STRONOMY Fo m i g C om p r n a an ion

phy B y D NY U L RD N R
.

h H
to t edb k fNt l Phi l " an oo o a u ra oso IO SI S A E
p hy d A
.

f N
,
f ly P f
or m e r l Phil o y i
atura U i
ro es s or oso an s tron om n v e rs i t y
d E di d by E D W N D
n
C ll g L d
o e e, F h E di i
on on R i d ourt t on e v se
. an te I U NxIN, .

Roy al O bserv atory , G re en wi ch Wi th 38 P la tes a n d u w ards a t p

p
.

1 00 W oodc u t s In O n e V ol , s m a ll 8 v o, 5 5 0 a ge s , gs 6d c lot h
p—
. . . . .

bb —
Pr o a ly n o ot her book c on ta in s t h e sam e am oun t of i n form a tion in s o c om en dious an d w ell
a rra n g e d a form c e rta i n ly n on e a t t he ric e a t w hi ch t h is is O dore d t o t he
p ubhc
’
pA the n e u m
'
.

p b
.
.

We ca n d o n o othe r th a n ron o un ce t his work a m ost v alua le m an ual of ast ron om y , a n d we

s t r on g l
i
r e c om m e n d i t t o a ll w ho w is h t o a c ui re a
a ti ce w l li t hi s s u li m e s c i e n c e b g e n e ra l but at t he sam e t im e corre ct a c na lut
— q — —q
Q u a r ter l_
y y ou r n a l If S eiem
pp
'
.

“
O n e of t h e m os t d es e r ve dly
o n ] t h e s t ud e n t o f t he e le m e n t a r
o ula r oo ks o n t he s u j ect b
We w ould re com m e n d n ot b
y p ri n c ip le s of t he s c ie n ce . but h e w ho a im s a t m as te rin g t he
h i ? e r a n d m a t he m a ti ca l bf a B C he s O f aSt rOB O ID b i h h b "
Y n ot t o e “ t out t i k i d h im P r a ¢1 {
t

s “ O s
.

’ r e e -

ca l M a g a z i n e
.

.
24 CROSB Y L OCKWOOD G o
CO S .
’
CATA L OG UE .

MATH E MAT I C S , G E O M E T RY, TAB LE S , et c .

P r a c ti c a l M a th em a ti cs .
M A TH E M A TICS F OR PRAC TICAL M E N B ei n g a. C om
k
.

l
m on -p ace B oo of Pure an d Mixe d Mathe m ati cs D es i gn ed c hiefly fo r th e
Ci il E gi
.

Use of v A hit ec ts , an d S urv ey ors

n n eers , Pa rt 1 P o ur: M a m a
rc . .

MAT IC S : co m i
r si n g A i th
r m e c . Al e bra, G eom e
ti Men s urati on , T r i gon o
m e t ry , C i P p ti
on i c ec t on s , ro er es C urv es Part e s n Ma r n a u a n c s :
D d
.

c om p ris in g M ec han ics i n en c rai S ta ti c s . y n am ics . H dros ta ti cs , y ro H

d y n am ic s, Pn e um atic s , M ica e n t s , S t re n oi a te ri als i th a n l W
x
.

Ap pe n di of co ious L ogari thm ic an oth er T ab es . B y C a m r a p s G E G -

R
o ar , L L D , F E n arge by H E N LAW. C E l d
4t h E ti on , ca r e RY di
ll d
.

l l
. . . .

fu Rev i se by J R. Yov n o . form er y Professor of Mathem a ti cs , B e fas t

W l l
.

C o ege i th 1 3 P ates , 8 v o, £1 rs c oth

. . .

“
The en
m athem a ti l y h h
ee r or arc itect wi e re fin d rea d
diffi c u t t a t m ay arise in his
ll h
t o hb an d ru es for so vin g nea r y e ve ry
T he ru es are in all cases exp lam e d by p
h l l l l
x p h cc
y p
m eans of e a m les. in w ich eve r st e of the rocess is c earl w or ed out - 8 m lder
”
p
.

l y k
bl b k hp P
. . .

On e oi the m ost servicea e oo s fo rofessor Youn g ha s

“
ract ical m ec an ics

t he n um erous hica l errors w i c ha d

h hh
m odernise d t he nota tion throug out. in trodu e a few p a ragra hs he re an d t e re . an d co rre c te d
the e es of the form er E di tor
gg
T he o o k y
.

h . b
te as t is p oss ible to m ak e it
x bh k
rs n o w as
T e t - oo for him w ho. a v in
re fre s h is m em or u on t em
g y p hh
8 m ld rng New s
It an ins t ruct i v e boolt for the studen t a n d a

—
on ce m as te re d the s u j e cts i t tre ats of, nee ds occasiona
'
to
.

b .

lly
k h l —
. .

“
As a sta n dard wor on m at em atics it has n ot been e xce led “
A rtis a n . .

M e tr i c a l Un i ts a n d S ys t em s , e t c .

M OD E RN M E TROL OG Y : A M a n ua l of the M etri ca l Un i ts

a nd Sy stem s of the P resen t C en tury i th an A n di x c on tai n in g a p rop os e W d
l
.

E n g i s h S y s te m B L ow i s D A Ja c xs o n , A In s t C E , Author of Ai d
’

’y
.

l
. . . . .

to S urv e y Prac ti ce. &c L a rge c r ow n 8 v o, 1 23 6d c oth . . . .

bj
h
The h baut
as
k h h
roug t t oge t e r m uc
pp
or
b
h l bl
v a ua e an d
y i
l i
in te rest ng inform at on
pl
T he .

m ai n o e ct of the w or a
yh
s s tem s of w e
y
ears to
h ll h
ts an d m easures w hic are un fortuna t e
k y l st ill h
e t he discuss ion of a re m ed for the e v i s of the c om
y y p
h
in use in t is coun tr . T o ro vi de
ex

s uc
M l a re m ed
h i
r G a ds t on e . to w om t he w or
.

d
c ons ide ra tion of all in te rest e
k h p
b
a ser ous tas , an d on e w e

l
is ins cri e d.
wort of the a t ten ti on of a g rea t state sm an s u c
W
h
e ca nn ot b
—N
as
ut rec om m en d t he w ork t o th e
in t e ractica re form of our w eig ts an d m easures.
”
a tu r e .

q l l ll
F or t he arge co ection of m eas ures
l b y
s cien ti fic e uiva en ts. in term s of the m e t ri ca s st em
h h l hh
roug t tog e t e r. t he aut or su
h ppl
ies th e F ren c h
bl
out a dou e se t o f

g h q l
S ci en tific a ue ’
h h ll
E n lis e uiva e n ts. t e firs t of w ich he ca s the ‘ C orn m e
Vl h b
H e a so v es t rou

T ere is n o dou t as t o the g rea t am oun t o

M
f l b
g
h
a our t a t m ust h ave b
easure s. an d the se con d t he
.

d
k by
e v ot e d to t he calculat on
i ng t he w or
i
com p arison —
.

p '
y
an d t e uxta osition of the tw o values aflords an eas m ean s of c he ck
”
A
h j
tl een ¢rm r
ee n

h qiy
. .

b
For e x aust i ve ta le of e u valen t ts an d m easures of all sorts. an d for clea r de m ons tra
O

ir—
tions of t he e ffec t s of the various s stem s
h
t rea ti se is wi t out a t h e A ca dem y .
ha ve b
een p p
ro ose d or ado ted, p M J
r ac ks on s .
‘

Th e M e tr i c S ys t e m .

A S E RIE S OF M E TRIC TAB L E S i whi h the B i ti h S t d , n c r s an

dM ar d W ight
eas ures an d w i t h the f th M t i Sy t
s a re com tp t an os e o e e r c s em a res en
i U n th C ti
s e on t 8 C e D w
on nen C E S d E diti R i d o n t n o, econ on .
61 t
e v se
d E l g d gl y b d
. . . .

an 8
n ar e v o, ros . s ron oun

R y l —
. .

h T yh b
e ir ac cura c ifi d by P as A ee n ce rtA e rofessor i ry . the stron om er - o a
"
B u ilder
l by ih h h h ll p—A h dy k f
. .

M s T a les. w ic are w e
‘
D ow in
r. ut j i t e r. com e us t in t m e as a rea re c oner or
-

t he conve rsion 0 one s stem n to t e ot er. t m

G e om e tr y f or t h e A r c hi t e c t E n g i n e er e tc , , .

P RA C TICA L G E OM E TR Y f th A hi t t E gi d , or e rc ec . n neer an
M echa n i c G i v i n g Ru es for t he l
e in ea t ion an d A p i ca ti on of v ar i o us Dl l
l B E W
.

G eom etri ca L i n es . Fi gures an d C urv es n an , M A . Arc hi t e c t ,

ld d W
. . . . .

Author of T he S c i en ce of Bui in g, &c

“ ”
econ d E i ti on ith Ap n
d D Wi th 1 7 2 I lus
. .

ic es on ia gr a m s oi S tra in s an d Is om e trical Proj ec tion

d
tr a ti on s , e m y 8 v o, 93 c oth l
.

b h b b p bl h —h h
. .

l l
ru es a i d
k
Np oo w it the sam e o j ects in vie w has e v e r ee n u is ed in w i c the clearnees of the
l down an d t he "
i lustra ti v e diagram s a v e e en so sa tisfa ct or S cotsm an h b y
h l p l b h h lh h
. .

T is is a m an ua for th e racti ca m an . w e t e r arc i te ct . en lnee r. or m e c an ic

obj h b
ec t of th e a ut or e in
m k
g Th
g t o a void all a st ruse form u a or oom i cated m e t ods, an d to ena bl
but a m oderate n owledge of eom e tr to w r out e ro e s e uired " E n l i rl k l
b h .

— :
fiz xz z r g. g y eo p l m q .
 M A TH E M A TIC S ,
G E OM E TRY, T A B LE S ,
m . 25

C om p re h en si v e We i ght C a l cu l a t or .

TH E WE IG H T C AL C UL A TOR B ein g . a Se r ie s of T able s

u n a Ne w
C o m re he n s iv e P a n , e hi bi tin g a t O n e Referen c e t he e ac t
an d l x x
l
a u e of an y e igh t W
om 1 lb to 1 5 t on s , at 300 Progres s iv e Ra t e s , from r l
e
D
. .
.

to t 68s p er c w t , a n d c on tain i n i rec t An s w ers, w hi c h , w i th thei r

g
C l dd l d
. .

om bi n a ti on s, c on s is ti n g of a si n g e a iti on ( m os t y to be p e rform e at
s ight ) , w i ll
a flord a n a ggre ga te of
'

An sw ers ; the w ho e be i n g c alc u l

la te an dd es i gn e d d
to e n s ure c orrec t n e s s a n d p rom ote es p atch By HE N Y d R
ld D d
.
”
H u ma n , Ac c oun tan t, S h effi e , Author of The “
i s c oun t G ui e An e u
l d ll d l d l l
.

t i t e y Ne w E i ti on , c are fu y rev i s e Roy a 8 v o, s tron g y ha f boun , £1 sr -

l f b ll i i h be
.

k y
.

A usiness st of the
W h l b k d if h k hi ld b b
rac ti ca l an d use fu w or of refe re n ce f
“
or m en o gene ra t s t e
kh d
t
in we
h pl
e re fore re fe r to
qu— y
v e se e n .
it wit
e av e
easure .
fre en t
Iron m on g er
e e n as e suc a wor as t s cou
;
e o ta i n ed. an d

p l l b y d pl h
.

O f rice ess va ue to us in ess m e n i ts a ccurac an com e ten ess a v e se ure for it 0 d

b k
h h l fi — fim
e p uta ti on w ic qre n de rs it
oo in all m e rcan t i e o ces
uit e un n e
”
She e
for us t o sa y on e wor n ts ra se. i t is a n e cessary
en den t
.

di i p i
c

l b h b b p p
. .

A n e n orm ous a m oun t of a our m ust re ara t ion of t he table s

b
M
h h ave ee n est owe d u on t he
ut t he res ult is a se ries whic g i v es the an swers soug t m ore rea ily than an y of i ts re de ce ssors
”
p .

i ni ng y ou r n a l .

C om p re hen s i v e D i s co u n t G uid e .

TH E D IS C O UNT G UID E . C om p ris i n g s e v e r al S e ries of

l
T ab e s for the us e of Merc han ts, Man ufa c ture rs , i ron m on ge r s , a n d othe rs ,
by w h ic h m a y be as c e rt a in e the e a c t Profit ari si n g from an y m o e of us in g d x d
D iscoun ts , e i ther i n t he Purchas e or S a e of G oo s , a n d the m e tho of ei th er l d d
l
A te ri n g a Ra te of D i sc oun t or A v an c in g a Pric e , so a s t o p ro uc e , by on e d d
op e ra t ion , a sum t ha t w il rea i se an y r e q uire l
p rofi t a fter a ow i n g on e or l d ll
m ore D
i s c oun t s : to w hi c h are a e T a b es of Profi t or A v a n ce from r} t o dd d l d
l D
90 p e r cen t , T a b es of i s coun t from I} to 9 8 } p e r c en t , a n d T a b es of C om
. . l
m i ss i on , &c from t t o 1 0 p er cen t B y H E N Y H ans e n , Acc oun tan t , Author R
W C d ll d C d
.
,
.

of T he e i ght a]c nl ator

”
New E i ti on , carefu y Rev ise an d orrecte
D d
. .

em y 8 v o, 544 p p half-boun , {I t 53
A h b ll l l l llb
.

y
.

p d les
h b
v alue in t ose
ll t
h geb k b p ly p l —
ese ta s an d c ea r
we a rran
are
usin e sses for w hic t
rin te
oo has e e n es ecial
an d the co le ction wi
com i e d
”
e foun d of great
E ng m eer i n g ~

Ab k hy i W h ly b pp h byy b P h
. .

oo such as t s can on usin e ss m e n, t o w om t he sa v in g of tim e

h bl
“
e a recia te d
R Y
hyp h h l k
m eans sa
t roug out t e w or
of m on e

p
p ly e a v e t he l ng h aut ori t
p p
h k
are cons truct e d u on st ri c t
. of rofessor
a ccura te ri n ci
oun g t at t h e ta le s
T he w or is a m ode of
.

l
t
p—
ogra ica clea m ess, an d m ust rov e of gre at v alue t o m e rc an ts, m an ufact ure rs, an d g en e ra .

trade rs y
B r i t is lr Tr a de ou m a l
M h l b lll l y b h b k—ll d b k xp h
. .

uc t im e an d a our w i be sa v ed the use of t is oo e v e n t o the m ost e e rt a ri t

m e ti cia n T he g re a t ta ct ica uti it of t e D iscoun t Guide w i n o ou t m a e i t a stan da rd
‘ ’

k
w or of re fe re nce
.
"
on dore Com m ercia l Recor d
. .

Ir o n d M e ta l T r a d es C a l c u la t or
an ’
.

TH E IRON AND M E TAL TRAD E S C OM PANION B e in g

’

C C
.

a al c ul a tor c on ta i n in g a S eri es of T a bl es up on a Ne w an d om p rehen si v e

l x d l d ld
,

P a n , for e p e iti ous y a sce rta i n i n g t he Value of a n y Goo s bought or s o

by W
e i ght, fro m i s p e r c w t t o 1 1 23 er c w t , an d from on e fa rt hin g p e r
d ll d l x d d
. . . .

p ou n t o on e sh i in g p er p oun E a c T ab e e te n s from on e p oun to

dd l D l C
.

1 00 ton s T o w hic h a re a p en e
p R u e s on ec i m a s , S q uar e an d ube Root ,
d l l W
.

M e n s ura ti on of S up e rfic i es a n d S oli s , &c ; a s o T ab e s of e i gh ts of

l l d l
.

M a te ria s an d othe r Usefu M em oran a B y T n o u a s D ow n rs S t ron g y

d
boun i n leather, 396 p p , os
. .

l bl pply hi l k h b
. .

‘
A m os t use fu se t of ta es, an d will su a want, for n ot ng i e t em e fore e xis te d.

Will bl ki bl l l Al h h
s p e ciall
wi he l
sa v e t he
p
l
oun d use fu in e ver ot e r usin ess i n w
osse ssor t he t rou

cy h b
a da t e d t o t e iron a n d m e ta t ra de s. t he ta l
n g n um erous in tri ca te ca cu a ti on s.
es con t a in e d in t is an d
m e rc andi s e is oug t an d so d
e of m a
t oug
i tt e c om an ion
w eig t. hi h h b hh h y l l
l by h p

P ra c ti c a l G e om e r t y .

TH E GE OM E TR Y OF C OM P ASSE S ; or , Problem s Resolved

g y the m ere D escri p ti on of C i rcles a n d the use of C oloured D i agra m s a n d

y m bols
By O RB L IVE r as s C l d Pl t C
o oure a es . row n 8 v o, 3s 6 d l
c oth .
l h h ll by l
.

y k
.

p
. .

stud y A
y—use fu
wor . w i c w i
ve r
”
of g eom e tr
b e va ued all w ho are ursuin g the use fu an d fas cinating l

k blh —l k— M yN
Ir
b
.

'

of geom e t r y— l h
Th e tre a t ise is a g ood on e, an d rem ar a e
for t he uci d c aract e r of i ts tea c ing
i e all
"
r B rn e s con tri ution s t o the s cien ce
B u i ld i n g ew s
.

p ble h l b k ll ly k W byh ly l l
. .

m s in t is us e fu be aut ifuuy co oure d an d un c o oure d

w ll b be ex
T he ro oo a e c e ve r w or e d out
d agram s
i it i .no dou t
r
t ens i ve ci rc ulat ed, e ig h re com m e n d ir
"
C q m t r i dg y .
— '

g
M 71 35 .
 26 C ROS B Y L OC K WOOD } C O S C ATAL OG UE
é .
’

I N D U S T RI AL AND U S E FU L A R T S .

S oa p - m a ki n g .

TH E AR T OF S OAP M A ING : A P ractica l H a n dbook of the - K

Ma n u f acture of H a rd a n d S oft S oa ps Toilet S oa ps G e In c l u in g m a n y Ne w d
,

l
,

W
.

Proc e s s e s , a n d a C ha p te r on t he Rec ov e ry of G y ce rin e from a s te L e 3

RW l l l
.

B y AL E XAND E AT T Aut hor of E ec t ro-M e ta ‘urgy Prac tic a l y T rea t

&c W ll
it h n um erous I us tr a t ion s l
C row n 8 v o, 9s c oth
.

k llh p y l h y ly h l lN l
. . .

p
.

to t he t e c n o ogi ca stude n t, but to t he ra ctica

“
T he wor wi rov e v e r use fu n ot m e re .

p borle r w ho wis
”
es to un de rs tan d th e t of his art . Ch em i a rl ew s .

llb y h x ll h xy pl
eor

h lp l hll
-

xh
"I
t is re a an e ce ent e
b k am e of a te c n ica m an ua . e n te rin as it does, t o ron y an d
e
d on e ,
a us ti v e
and ly
ot
b p
ese rv es t he c ons idera h h h ll b l
i n t o t he t e or and
le
ra c t i c e of s oa
ci rcula ti o n wi t
m an ufac t ure he
w i c it w i dou t ess m ee t .
. oo is we
— ’
lt
an d
n ow ledg e.
o n e s t ly

Mr W b k h p l h h has alm ost n o it e ra tu re i n l

l l h ic
h
’
. at t s oo is a t oron ly ra c t ica t reatise on an art w
our a ng ua
g e. W e c on g ra t u a t e
"
t e a ut or on t h e suc ce ss of his en de a v our t o fill a v oid in E n g lis
t o hn lcal h te ra tu rc a t u r e.

l ly ly pp p h pl
.

C ea r b
an d c on cis e written. an d a ea rs to e com re ensive an d com e te .
I . n ( an eer m g.

L ea th er M a n uf a c tu r e .

TH E ART OF L E ATH E R M ANUF AC T URE B e in g a

C
.

Pr ac t ica l d
H a n book , i n w hi c h th e O p e ra ti on s of T a n n i n g, urry i n g, a n d
L ea the r D ll
re s s in g a re fu y D e s c ri be , a n d t he Pri n c i p e s of T a n n i n g E x d l
l d
p a in e , a n d m a n y Re c e n t Pr oc e s s e s i n t ro uc e ; a s a s o M et hod s fo r t h e d d l
E s ti m a ti on o f T a n n in , a n d a D e s c rip ti on of th e Ar ts of G ue Bo i i n g, G ut l l
D re s s in g, 81 0 B y AL E XAND E AT T , Au thor of S oa p Ma k i n g.
- " E ec tro RW l
ll W ll C
.

Meta urgy , ac ”
i th n um erous I us tra ti on s
. row n 8 y o, 1 2 3 6 d c h i li . . . .

[j ust p ubli s hed

h bly h
.

E ve r y pi l
tem of use a n d in te rest to t he le a t
p
er
h
t ra de has e e n t ouc p
ed u on . a n d t h e de s crir .

é }
” ’
t ons an t e x anati ons of the various giv en Ta n n er ! a n d C a m
’

roce sses a re e x a us t i v e . er s
a a r na

l bl b k p b y k
o

m ost uc i d an d rea da e oo u on dlfli cult an d in trica te s u j e c ts E ver ro c ess o f

23
32 8
r
t he m ost p ri m itive t o the m ost re ce n t, is fu
r er .
an d ac cura tel
n own
y
descri e d d eath sh -
lly .

y b .

B oo d S h oe M a ki n g
t an .

TH E ART OF B OOT A ND S H OE M A ING -

K A Pra c tica l
C Cl
.

d l d
H an book i n c u in g Meas ure m en t, L as t Fi tti n g, utti n g O ut, os i n g a n d - -

D d l d
.

M aki n g, w ith a e sc ri t ion of the m os t ap p rov e M ac h i n e ry e m oy e

J p l
B y O H N B L E NO , ate E i tor of S t C ri spi n , a n d The B oa t a nd S hoe da k er
.

W ll C l
. . .

[j b h
.

i t h n um e rous I ustra tion s row n 8 v o, 5 s c oth us t p u l i s e d

y b k h h l
. . . .

A i n c udes all th at nee d

b b
h h l b
acc oun t of t he a rt an d sci e n c e of
ver c om
e sai d a out le a‘ e rs an d ot e r m ate ria s, as w e
t at a v e a t te r!
fi
as a out
o ot m a in g. w ic
le te
h
a n d-t oo s a n d t he v a ri ous m a c i n es
ee n i n trod uce d t o su p em en t or su erse de the old-fas i on ed han di wor .
"
l p l ll bp h l h hk
II p B es a te

D e n ti s tr y .

M E C H ANIC AL D E NTIS TRY : A Practica l Tr ea tise on the

C ons tructi on of the v a r ious ki n ds of Artific ia l D en tures om p ri s in g a l so Use C
ful For m ul ae, T a bl e s a n d Rec e i ts for G ol Pl ate la s p s Sol ers &c &c d C d
.

C R H U N R S gE diti R With d
.

d
.
, ,

By HA LE S TE e c on on , ev is e up w ar s of 1 00
W d E g i g C w 8 7 6d l h
. .

oo n ra v n s. ro n v o, s c ot
k yp —M
. . .

"
‘
T he w or
is v e r R
ract i cal f on th ly ev i ew o D en ta l S urg ery
h
. .

A W e ca n st rong ] re c om m e n d M r H un te r s t rea t ise t o a ll

'

s ude n t
t
n a ut ori ta t iv e t rea tise
re p a ring for t he
zf f M
p
ed i ca l S ci en ce
y
rofe ss i on of de n tist r , as we
.

as t o e v e r m ec an ic a de n t is t
"
D u bl m y h .

l .
—
y ou r ): o
k h l i h —
.

A
'
wor in a c on c ise form t at fe w cou d re a d w t out gain in g i nform ation from B r th s h
“
.
" -
om ri a l o f D en ta l S ci en ce
b b k h bj i h hi h —M di
.

"
The es t oo on t e su ec t wt w c we are acq uai n ted. e ca l P r ess an d C i r c ula r .

B rewin g .

A H A ND B OOK F OR YO UNG B RE WE RS . By H E RB E RT
E D WA R D S W Ri G H T B A C row n 8 v o, 3s 6d l
c oth
l ll hh l ll
. .
, . . .

T is li tt e v o um e , con ta in in g su c

t g
o
ua r
y p p
re c m m e n d i ts e f t o e v e r
ra n
y bre w e r
a
u il,
a rg e a m oun t of
an d m a n y w 0 h
c od se nse
a ve p
in so sm a
asse d t ha t st ag e
a com
.
’ p
-
ass , oug h t
~
B r e w er s
- ’

b l l hl b ly b y h
:

k y y k
.

T he is
l ba p h b k p l l w rit te n , a n d t he a ut or h as s ucc e ss ful
oo ve r c ea r roug t hi s s c ie n t i fic n ow
e dg e t o e r u on th e va ri ous
t he r a din
e
fi b h l
o f s uc a oo
roc e sse s a n d d e t ai s of
a s t i s i s c a c u a t e d t o do
w hat i s t o e don e, ut w h i t s ou d be don e
re wi n g T o t he oun g s t ude n t o f brc wi n
00 d’ for it wi oa d hi m t 0 in “ we n ot 0 n
.

ll l y
F
y
28 C ROS B Y L OC KWOOD ( Sv C O S C A TAL OG UE
.
’
.

C H E MI C AL MANUFA C TURE S do C O MM E R C E .

A lk a l i T r a d e, M a n uf a c tu r e o f S ul p hu r i c A c id , e t c.
A M ANUAL OF TH E AL KAL I TRAD E , i n c ludin g t he
Man ufac ture of S n ] hur ic Ac i , S u p ha te of So a, an d B lea c hin d l d P ow d er
kl d
.

a i Man ufac t urer , N

3; {
O I-IN L o u /i s , e w cas tle-up on -T y n e an L on on
ll W D
.

it a z I us tra ti on s a n d orkin raw i n gs , an d con ta i n i n g 386 p a ge s of

T ext . up er-roy a l 8v o , £2 u s 64 c oth
. . .

T hi s w or p rov i e s ( 1 ) a om p e te H an b koo d
for i n te n di n g A ali an d C l d k lk
l d
S u p h uri c Ac i Ma n ufa c ture rs , an d for t h ose al rea y in the fi e w h o es ire t o d ld d
l
i m rov e thei r p a n t, or to bec om e ra c t ic all acq uain te w i th the a te s t p roc es s es d l
an gd l
e v e op m e n t s of t h e tr a e : ( 2 a H a n y V olum e w hi c h M a n ufac t ure rs c an d
d
p ut i n to the ha n s of their Man agers an d Forem en as a us efu gui e in t he ir da i y l d l
d
roun s of d ut y .

Sy nopsis of C on tents
h p— h l Pl y —
W k
C a
or s
I C oice of Site an d Ge ne ra
lph p .

II S u
.

uric Ad d
a n of
l l l Rec ov er of
F inis hin
A ai
x Soda C
zII C a usti c — XI Re fin ed
—XIII B i-ca r bon lk l g —
. .

—
P
. . . .

t he Nit ro e n C om oun ds an d T re a tm e n t of
. .

XIV B lea chi n XV

ll y —
Sm a
g
P ri te s IV T he Sa t C a e roc ess .
a te of S oda
Uti isa tion of T an
. as t e
.

lx ow d e r
k P
I Ge n eral Re lk kW .

. .
. .

m
V L e s la tion up on t he No ious Va Four A
.

tion . v
—
I T he H a
.
'
urs Q ues
'
m ar s
'
n di ces t rea t in g o f Vi e
ve s
P—
an d
l — x on es Pro Su l ph uri c Acid ( m
P ti ons. An e m om e te rs
p
u on the Noxious Vp
( nau
s ea
l
v ia t ion an d
V II T he Ba .

S a tin g D o wm Q i
ng
lx
ro ce
s s
b
Car
V II L i i
.

ona ti ng or
F ore i
ues t ci n .
tl L egislation a our:

l l
.

l bl
va ua
h
T he
e m ass
i aut or
b p bl h
of in form a tion t a t. t o our
i l k
n ow ledge, has
ll eenk—
has g v e n t he fu es t, m os t rac tical. an d. t o all
h p o c on ce rn ed n the a a i tra de . m st
u is ed i n an y a ng uage .
"
.l! n

pr
ap
h b k p
o v e d form s of a
b
T is oo s writt e n
i ya rat us a re h ac
p i b
a m anufa c ture r for m an uf ture rs
i v e n. an d t ese a re a ccom an e d
k h b
The w or in g de tai of t he m ost
n o less t an 2 w ood e u
.

m
y lly fu by h g
g ra v g s. all of w h ic m ay e use
b
l l h
for t he p u
l
of construction y
ve r ste
f
in t e m a n u a c
v e ry t lun g y hm h
.
.

t ure is v e r des c ri e d in t is m an ua , an
t e n ds to i n troduce econ om
z i t/ m ut a n t
ea c im ro vem en t e
in to the techn i ca de tails of t
am e d
ll
trade rece ves the fu est att en ti on
"
.

h h l h l
.

T he p ile rs w ho, on s ort n oti ce. wi l read up an y c on ce iv

l l bj xpl p
ab e su ec t but a
a n d um i nous e
a ut

h bl p pl
ra ct ica l m an i n t he
.
or is n ot one of t
W
es t se nse of the word
b
h l
ose c e v er c om
y
e fin d e re n ot m e re a soun d .

hly
“ ll l C h
ra l k by p b
an a t ion of t he c e m ica
a ve a m os t i m ort an t
over loo e d
ri n ci
l l h — l
es of th e tra de.
k l c
k
ea rin g on t h e s uc c es fu c o duct of a a i w or s but w
p h n
e ve n the m os t e x e ri en ce d tec n ologi ca aut ors
”
hm
i h
ut a n oti e of n um e rous
c
a tt ers

C h em i ca l Rev i e w
are
.
.

C o m m e r c i a l C h e m i c a l A n a l ys i s .

TH E C OM M E RC IAL H AND B OOK OF C H E MIC AL AN

AL YS IS P ti l I t i f h d t
or, i i
r ac f h I ca i i n s ruc t on s or t e e e rm n a t on o t e n tr n s c or
C i l V l
om m e rc a fS b di M f a ue o i T d di h
u s ta n c e s u se n an u a c tures , n ra es , a n n t e
A By A N R N Y A h i l I t d R ’
r ts . f P O MA D ut or o Ch “
ra c t ca n ro uc ti on to ose s e
d Edi Ch l A ly
.
,
i m
y s tr f R T anti tor o Nw os e s
’ “
re a se on em i c a na si s
”
e
E di i E l g d x RY M N
.
,

t on , d t g t
n ar e w tt b y H N an o a re a t ete n re- ri en , E or m,
With Ill C w 8 6d l th
.

Ph D F R S . .
, . i
. . n um erous us tr at on s . ro n v c , rz s. . c o .

W
l h b k l
e rec om m e n d t l y l
is oo to the ca re fu p e rusal of e ve r on e
y b t ly
l kt rn a’' e r u
g
p bl b afi r m e d to e
g l
re com m e n d it t o o ur rea ders as a u cle, a i e
of un i v e rsa in te re s t. a n d w e s t ron g
h ph
t he ouse w i fe as to t he lp
a rm a ce ut ica —M T
ra c ti t ion er
”
ed i ca l i m es
i n di s en sa e to

l l pp
. .

“
A Th
d
an ll
E sse n t ia t o t he a na
the w odc is we e di t lly
ts a oin te d un de r t he n e w
an d care fu —N
w ri tt en
”
at ur e
ct. e m ost re cen t
. .

Dy e Wa r es an d C ol ou r s .

TH E M ANUAL OF C OL O URS AND D YE - WARE S Thei r

P roperti es , Ap i ca tions, Va lua tion , Im
pli t D y l B
ri ties, and S ophi sti ca tion F or th e
D By J W S d
.

u se of & ers , R S n e rs , r sa t e rs , ro er s, c. L AT E ec on
E d i ti l y E l g d C w 8 7 6d l h
. . .

i d dg
on , e v se an rea t n ar e ro n y o, s. c ot

T hi b k d ip i f b t S i H d d C l Ch m i
. . .

t i s oo c on a n s a es c r t o n o a ou x un re o ours , e
l
c a s , and D g u d i th T i t lAt
ru s d th i S seAp p l i ti d n e n c ori a r s , an e r ourc e s, ca on s , an
p oss i bl I p i e m ur ti e s .

A pl y l p p i h
l ll h
h l
e t e e n c c o e dia of
h h
'
T i t e m a l ar ia ti n cton a he n form a tion
‘

c om ven res e ct n g eac

p
.

an d re cise . an d t he
l bl ph
a rt i c e i s fu
ia
a nd
e t o so
D r ugg u t '
wi h l p i l
is ti ca ti on, ll bl —
are gi ve n
m e t ods of de t e rm i n ing the v a ue of a rt cies s uc
t c earn ess . an d are ra ct ca as we as v alua e
as t es e. so
”
C l re m i s e .

y ll l k h h k
.

P rac ti cal d &c wi

ln a h h d i
t he a gu ge w i c cove rs p re cis e l t h
e
l ly
d
h l l
e rs,

—
sa m e g roun di l
w e com e t he w or in i ts im rov e form
i T ere s n o ot e r w or i n
p p ig r
. ,

0 te c n o og ca studen ts re ar n fo .
.

exam m ati q us in d ein an

y g p r n t in
g t wi l
p rove excee ding
f Cl f l N
use u .
”
w tem ca e s.
 A G RI CULTURE LAN D MANA G E ME NT , , et c .

Y ou a t t C om p l e t e Gr a z i er
an d B ur n ’
s
'
.

TH E C OM PL E TE G RAZ IE R and F ARM E R S an d C ATTL E

’
,

B RE E D E R S AS SIS TANT
'
A C om p e n d ium of H us ban d ry ; e s p e c i a ll y in
d d w ith th d l
.

t he Fee i n g, an d G e n er a e a ri n g,
n
e p a rt m e n t s c on n ec te e B re e d in
Ma n a ge m e n t Of S toc k ; the Ma n a ge m e n t Of t e D ai ry , Ste Wi t h D i rec tion s
Cl d
.

for t he u ture a n d Man age m e n t of G ras s L a n , of G ra in an d Root C rop s ,

t he Arr a n ge m en t O f Farm O fli c e s , t he us e of Im p e m en ts an d Mac hin e s , an d l
on D rai n i n g, Irr i ga t ion . W
arp in g, &c ; an d t he App icat i on an d Re a ti v e l l
l W l d
.

V a ue of Ma n ure s B y IL L IA M YO UATT , E s q , V S T w e fth E i tion , v e ry

l l d
. .
. .

c on s ider a b y e n a rge an d br ought u to the p r e s en t re uirem e n ts of Agri

l
c u tura l Pra c tice by RO E T S C O T T U RN, Au thor of B R utli n es of M o e rn d
Fa rm i n g, "“
L an e dd
E s tates M a n a ge m e n t ,
"
Farm Ma n a ge m e n t ,
” “
T he
L es son s of My Fa rm , 8re
”
O n e arge 8 v o V o um e, 860 p p , w i th 2 44 I us tra l l ll
l d
. .

t ion s , £1 i s ha f boun -

— b k h
. .

F a rm er s M ag a z i n e
” '
T he sta n dard an d te xt oo wit t he fa rm e r an d graz ie r
-

h h l k b l h i l
. .

A trea tise w ic wi l
e n dures —M ”
N
L a n e E x r es s Fi rst ot ice )
p (a rk
j re m a in a stan da rd w or on t he su e ct as ong as B ri tis ag r cu ture

b k l h p l
. .

dea s wi t all de artm e n ts of a r icu ture an d con tains an im m ense am oun t of

v a luabl y k l y p h
T he oo
e in form a ti on
b h g .

p
l x ll bl l
It is. i n fac t . an e n cy clO p az ia of a g ri c u t ure p ut in t o re a da e fom i , an d it
y p—
t hi c b
a er. an d s t ro
N i )
L a n e E x r es s Secon
pl l b
i s t he onl w or eq ua l com re e nsi v e roug t dow n to rese n t da t e
kp p oun d, an d dese rve s a y y l M
It is e ce e n t
a c e in t he i rar of e v e r ag ri cu t uris t
ri n te d on
"
a rk
.

p ( ot ce
l k i ll y plp lly y l b l
.

Of great v a ue to the farm e r, m ore es e c ia

T h is esteem e d wor s we worth of a —N
t o the oun g ca t t e ree der an d fe e de r
a c e in th e h bra ri es of agric u turists
”
or tl r B r it i s h .
.

A
h l bl bl
valua f l
hf
e re
p
k rtol o
h
p lly'
in te l g n ce for all w ho m a e agricu ture a p ursui‘ an d es e ci a for
'

t ose w ho aim a t
s o va ua e a na ture t
l l l b t e
w it h e im rov e m e n ts o f th e ag e
k T e n e w m a tt er is o f
vo um e is n ow a m os t e n tit e d t o e c ons idered as a di s tin c t wor
. .

M o d er nF a rm in g .

O UTL INE S OF M OD E RN F ARM ING B y R S C OTT B U RN

C — —C a ttl e
. . .

l
S oi s , Man ure s , an d rop s Par m i n an d Fa rm i n g E con om y S hee p
a n d H ors e s —
Man agem e n t of t h e a i ry , Pi gs an d Pou try l —Util i
,
sa t i on of
.

T ow n - S ew a ge , Irri a t ion , &c S i th E i ti on In O n e Vol , x d ha f l

d l g pp
. . . .
,
boun , p rofuse y Il us tra ted, rz s
h b h h hy
.

The aim of the aut or has een t o m a e his w or

h
a n d in t is ai m he has succeeded to a degree w i c
k k
h h e n titles him to m uc cre dit
"
p
at on ce com re e ns iv e an d t rustw ort
.ll or m n
.

r — ‘

g .

w ic hh
“
E m in en t ly lh
ca culated t o en h te n t he
it treats, an d en c e it should n d a a ce
h
g pl
t icultural c om m unity
'
e ve ry fa rm er s library is —
on t he v a rie d sub ects of
”
C ity
j
h l h b k —
.

No farm er s ou d be wit out this oo ”

B a n bury Gua rdia n . .

A g r i cu l t u/r a l E n g i n e e r i n g .

TH E C OM P L E TE TE XT B OOK OF FARM E NG INE E RING -

C l k
.

omp ri s in g Practica T re a ti se s on D rai n in an d E m ban in g ; Irr i ga tio n an d

W ater S up p y ; Farm Roa s , Fen c es , an l G a tes ; Farm B ui in gs , B a rn d ld
l
Im p e m e n ts , an d Machi n es ; Fi e Im p em en t s an d Machin e s ; a n d Agric ul
. .

ld l
t ura l
S urv e y i n g, L e v elli u &c B y Prof O H N S C O T T , E i tor of t he J d
l l l
. .

’
F a rm ers G a z ette, ate Pro e ss or of Agr ic u ture an d Rura E c on om y a t the
l C l
Roy a A ic ultural ol ege , C i ren ce s t er, &c , &c. In On e Vol , p a es,
l d
. .

wih 600 llus trati on s, xz s ha f-boun [j us t p ublis ed

h h kl h — b h
. . .

.
A CO PYof t is wor s ould be t reasure d i i ? in eve ry li rary w ere the ow n e r t he re of ‘3 in ‘

"
an y wa y C onn e ct e d w it an d. Fa m and H om e
W h
k l ll llh britt e n ll w it
g rea t car . as we as w it
e
y
w or w e ; w e a v e foun d hi m a v e r t rus t w ort
n ow e dge an d a ilit T he a ut or has don e hish khy l h b yh . h
T he v o um e w i
—M
m e n din g it f
l g uide w e re v e r we
e of rea t v a ue t o ag ri cu t ura s tuden ts. an d w e ha v e m uc
a r k [ i m E x r es s
l l
a v e t e ste d his s ta t e m e n t s
Ieasure m rec om hp .

p
h dy l lik ly lly
. .

— W g F or
'
B ell s
i a i
eek ly
ky oun ag r cultur st
l es sen g er .
we n ow of n o an vo um e so e to be m ore use fu studie d .
’

Am a teu r F ar m in g .

TH E L E SS ONS OF M Y F ARM A B ook for Am a te ur Agri

cu l tu i r s ts . B e in g
In tr oduc ti on to Fa rm Pra cti c e
an B y RO E T S C O T T B R
W l
.

i th n um erous Il us tra t i on s .

[A Nem a n d E nla rged E di tion i n prepa ra tion .

 CROSB Y L OC KWOOD a C O s C ATAL OG UE
'
3a . .

A T e x t- B oo k of
g l i s h A g r i c u l tu r e E n .

TH E F IE L D S OF G RE A T B RITAIN : A T e xt B ook - oi
Agri c u tu re l a d a p te d to the Sy l l a bus oi
'

the Sc ien c e an d Ar t D e p a rt m e n t
C
.

F or E l em
,

en tar y an d A d v an ce d S tu d e n t s. B y H UG H L E ME NT S ( B oa r d ot
T ra d e) 1 8 m o, as . 6d c ot h l
h —Ag
. . .

A m ost com p re ensi v e v olum e, gi vin g a m ass Of in form ation .

”
dl a ra l Eeorw m i rl
r ia

l h b k h h pl h h
.

eased us m ore. or w i c c on ta i n s
h k l
I
It is a ong t im e s in ce we av e see n a w ic
oo has
” '
s uc a v ast a n d use ful fun d of n ow e dg e . -
E a uea t w na l Ti m es .

A g r i c u l tu r a l D a ta .

NOTE B OO K o f A G RIC UL T URAL F AC TS an d F IG UR E S ,

for F a r m ers a n d F a rm S tud en ts B y P a i u n o s e M C O N N E L L Fe ow o f th e C ll
d l l l l
.
,
H i ghlan an d Agric u t ura S oci e t a te P rofes s or of Agri c u t ure , G la s go w
V e te ri n ary o e ge C ll
Roy al 3am o O ion g, e a the r, w i th s trap , 43 y; l
ll l bl h y h
. .

to bec om e
h b h bh h h l b l
'
It is fu i n form a t ion
of v ery Farm e rs v a ua e . sons a n d ot e r out hs w ho wis

h
fa rm e rs a t om e or a roa d, m ig t. e v en e fore t e ir sc
w it the facts an d fi gures furn ishe d in t is in te res tin g
oo educa t ion is co m le t e d,
an d v alua e i tt e k.
'
e c om e fa m i i a r
bl l l
A berdeen F r ee —
H u d s on s L a n d V a l u e r s P oc ke t- B ook
’ ’
.

TH E L AND VAL UE R S B E S T AS S IS TANT : B e in g T a ble s

’

on a v e m uc h Im p rov e P an , for a c u a t in
g the V a ue of E s ta tes ithd l Cl l l W
l d lC
.

T ab e s or re uc in S c otc h , Iri s h, an d Prov in c i a us tom ar y Ac re s to S ta t u t e

Meas ure , &e B y H e n son , C E e w E i ti on Roy a az m o, ea th e r , gi t N d l l l
d l d
. . . .

e ge s , e a s tic ban , 43.

h l pl bl
T is n ew e ti on in c udes t a es for a sc e rta in in g t he v a ue O f l ase s for a n y te rm of e a rs :
di
ots O f roun d o f c e rta i n a c res in form s, s ua re , rou n d , & c , w i t h
l e

q y
v al ua bl b l l
an d for showi
e ru es
how t o la out
or asce rt ai n in g t e p ro
y
ble w ort O f st an din g ti m er to a n a m oun t ; an d is o f
luc a lc ula le v a ue to the coun t ry ge n t e m an an d rofess ion a m an
h
" y
F a r m er s y on r n a l l p
h l .
b— .
.

E wa r L a n d I m t p
’
r osv er s P o c ke t- B ook ’
.

TH E L AND IM P RO VE R S P OC E T B OO OF F ORM UL /E ,
’
K -
K
TAB L E S a n d ME M ORAND A re a i red i n a ny C om p uta ti on rela ti n g to th e
P erm a n en t Im provem en t of L a n ded roperty B JO H N E w a n r L an S ur v e y o r '
d
l l gi l
,

dg
.

an d A ric ultura l E n gin ee r Roy a 32 m o, O on g, e a th er, t e es, w it h

l
.

e as ti c an d, 4s
h dy l l l —S;
.

A com p e n dious a n d an it t e vo um e . ed a tar .

C om p P B ook
l e t e A g r i cu l u r a l t S u r ve yor ’
s oc ke t - .

TH E L AND VA L UE R S A ND L AND IM P RO VE R S C OM
’ ’

F L E TE P OC KE T B O OK -
C on s i s ti n g of t he abov e Two W ork s boun d to
l dg
.

ge the r . L ea the r, gi t e es, w i th s t rap , 7 5 6d

b b l
. .

'
We
l consi der H udso n
p
'

hl ks on er on m att e rs re a t in g to t he v a lua
oo to
'
be the
M r. E w a rt s w ork g rm t ly
es t re a d y bk -re c

h
t o n o f a n d a n d c ro s we
l—N
a v e e v e r se e n , a n d i ts co m i n a t ion wi t
e n ha n c e s t he v a ue a n d us e fu ne ss of t he at te r -m e n t on e .
"
or m o
It is m ost use fu as a m an ua ll i d l
fo r re fe re n ce . f E n g la n d F a r m er .

P o a t to C ul tu r e .

P OTA TOE S H ow to G row an d S how them A Pr ac t ic al G uide to

Cl
.

t he u ti v a ti on an d G e n e ra l T re a tm en t of t he Potato By J AM E S Pu n t
W ll d d C
.

l
.

ith I ust ra tion s S ec on E it i on row n 8 v o, as c ot h .

ll l l l h l
. . .

" p
A
bj — we writte n i tt e v o um e T he a ut or gi v es g ood ra ct i ca i nst ructions un de r both
- .

"
div s ion s
i of his su e ct . Agr i euleu r a 1 Ga z ette .

G ARD E NIN G , F L O RI CULTURE , e tc .

E a rl y
F r ui ts , F l ow e r s a n d V e g e t a bl e s .

TH E F ORC ING G ARD E N or, H ow to G row E arly F rui ts

W l
,

l
F ow e rs , an d V e e ta b e s l
i th P a n s , an d E s ti m a te s for B ui in g G as s ld l
C l l l l l
.

h ous e s , Pi t s a n d r a m e s on t a i n i n g a s o O ri gi n a P an s for D oub e G a z in g,

d l
.

a Ne w M e t hod of G row i n g t h e G oose be rry un e r G a s s , &C , &c , a n d on V e n t i

d W B y S AM E L Woo n ll U
. .

la t io n , P rote c t i n g V i n e Bor e rs , &c i t h I us trati on s

l
. . .

C ro w n 8 v o, 3s 6d c oth
b a ly ll l h
.

k
. .

A g ood
h l bl
“
an d f fi T he bOO k is wri t t en
t a t w as in som e deg ree va ca n t
—G
oo . ir s a a ce .

wi t g re a t ca re , a n d C o n t a i n s a g re a t e a l of v a ua
” ’
te ac hin g a r de n er s Ili ag a z i n e
h
e

k x
.

M W
.

l V bl — bo o
‘

r oo d 5 is a n on n al an d e a us t iv e a n sw e r to t he q ue s t i on
‘
H ow to G row E arb
a
.

F rui ts, F ow e rs an d e g e ta es r h La n d and IVa ter .

 H AND B OOK OF H O USE PROPE RT Y : A Popula r an d Practica l
G uide to the P urchas e M or tga ge Tena ncy a nd C om puls ory S a le of H ouses a n d
L a nd . By E L T Aa
,

c x,
,

Arc hi tec t an d
,

S urv e y or T hi r d E di i t on , rz m o ,
l
. . .

3s 6d c oth
hly p i l —
. . .

The advi ce is thoroug ra ct ca Iaw y our n a l .

ll hh h l l k k l y
. .

T his is a w e -wri tt e n an d t We of all

q
[n tere sted in uestions affe c ti n g
oug tfu w or
ouses an d a n d .
.

”
—L
c om m e n d
"
a n d Ag en ts Recor d
the w or
.
to the carefu stud

I n w oo d s E s t a te T a bl es ’
.

TAB L E S F OR TH E P URC H AS ING OF E S TATE S F reehold , ,

C opy hold, or L ea sehold ; An n ui ti es , A dvowson s , G a , a n d for t h e Re n e w i n g o f

L e a se s he un er a t he ra ld d C
h urc he s , C o e es , or ot h e r C orp o ra t e bo i e s , d lC ll d
for T erm s of Ye ars c e rt a in , an d for L i v e s ; a so for V a lu in g Re v e r s ion a r y
E s ta te s , e fe rr e D d
An n uit ie s , Ne t Prese n ta t i on s , &c : to e t he r w i t h S M A T S
'
x R
l d x
.

F iv e T a b e s of C om po un In te r es t , an d a n E te n s ion O the s a m e to L ow e r
a n d In te rm e i a t e Ra t e s B y W INw oond 2 2 n d E it i on , w i th c on s i e ra b e d d l
dd l l
. . .

A i ti on s , an d n e w an d v a ua ble T ab e s of L ogari th m s for t he m ore D ifli c u lt

C om p u ta t i on s of the In te re s t of Mon e y , D i sc oun t, An n ui ti es , &c , by M F E DO R
C d l l
. .

T H O MAN, of the S oc iéte r é it M obi i er of Pari s xz m o, 8 3 c oth

h ll p h ll
. .

p
.

Tos e in t e rest e d in the urc ase a n d sa e O f est a tes, a n d in t he a dj us t m e n t of c om e n sat i on

l
‘

cases. as w e as in t ra nsa c t ions in a nn ui ti es . i fe insura n c es, & c ., w il fi n d th e

"
— resen t e di t i on of p
e m i n e n t se rv i c e E n g m eer i n g
bl l l p b bl
. .

In w ood s T a e s s ti l m a in tai n a m ost e n v iab e re uta ti on

'

byl
fai to
e a dd i ti ona c on t ri buti on s
O f th e utm os t utili t
"
l M F ed or T om an. w ose
Ill i n i n g y ou n ea l y—by.
. h
.
h .

ll
T he n ew iss ue has ee n e n ri che d
ca re fu y arran ge d T a es can n o t

H ow t o In v es t .

H INTS F OR INVE S TORS B ein g an E xp lan at ion of t he M ode

Of T ran sa c tin g B us i n e s s on th e S t oc k E c ha n ge T o w hi c h are a e C om x dd d
l l l l
.

m e n ts on th e F uc tua t i on s a n d T a b e Of Q ua r t er y Av era ge r ice s of C on s o s

s i n c e ”S l
A so a C op of th e L on on D a i y S toc k an S hare L i s t By d l
W Ri
ll PL A F O D , w or n B rok er Y R C l
.

AL T E row n 8 v o, as c oth
ll k y b—k by ly k h h
. . .

“
A e e at i - w rit te n oo . on e w ho e v ide n t n ows t he sort Of in form at ion w ic th e
L loy d s New
" '
Invest or is i e to w an t
bl p l —B
.

An in v al ua e g uide to in v es tors an d s
”
e cu ators . u ll ion i s t.

A C om p l e t e E p i t om e of t h e L a w s of th i s C o u n t r y .

E VE R Y M AN S O WN L A WYE R : A H an dy book of t h e
’ °
-

l
Pr i n c i p e s of L a w a n d E q u i t B y A B ARRi S T E R T w en t s ec on d E di t ion
C y d
-

d l d
.

ll l
. .
.

are fu y r e v i s e a n d broug t own t o t h e e n d of t h e as t c as i on , i n c u i n g

S um m ar ies of th e L a te s t S ta t ute L a w s i th Note s an d Refe re n ce s to th e W
C d l l
.

Authori t ie s rown 8 v o, p r ic e 63 8 d ( sa v e a t ev e ry c on s u ta ti on ) , s tr o n g y

d l
. . .

boun i n c oth
—
.

p
C om ris ing T H E RIG HTS AND W R U R
ONG S O F IND IV ID ALS M E C ANT ILE AND C o st
—
— — R — U Y U
.

W N W P W
— C O NT R
T L AW G A M B AND
—
R U Y—
M R A L A C R M A L A A S H L A CO
—
E C I L I I L I
R U
W R— U
w P M N W IR L A WS O F B ANK B E T S AND
Y
'
Fi sH E R v L A s OO E S L A S IT S T I- PT C
AG E S C H E Q E S B IL LS
— UR R R
A ND NO T E S- C O NT AC TS AND AG E E M E NTS C O P
— RR R
IG H T
— ANC E — R
. ,

E L E C T IO NS AND RE G i S T R AT i O N INS L i B E L AND S L AND E M A IAG E AND

R R —
—R M E C H ANT S H IP P ING
P R AC T i C E T AD E M A KS AND P AT E NTS —
D i v o RC E
R
M O T G AG ES
R —U
S E TT L E M E NTS
T E S P AS S N IS ANC E S. & c —
S TOC K E XC H ANG E
T RANS F E R
—W R Y—W
OF
R
.

L AND , & C AR ANT IL LS AND AG E E M E NTS , si c & c

’

l l — —W k —
. . .

A so L a w for L an d ord an d T e nan t M ast e r an d Se rvan t or m en an d Ap re n ti ces H eirs

—D i —II b d d Wif —E t d W d
—
,

d T
— b
-
d L g
—
e v see s an e a tees us a n an e xe c u ors an rus t an ar
W
dV d — —F dly S — C l
P d e —w D d
—P h
M i d d I f om en a n d A g t L d B
n a n ts
n w S a rt n e rs an en s e e r, orro e r an ur ti e t or an
a rr e

—M d l P i i C p i d A
—F —C r Sh
ss oci a ti ons oci e t i es m en
& —
C d
B k k
re i t or u rc as e r an en or an es an om n en
hw d
— l —S arm e rs on t act ors t oc an
Cl a re
—
ra c t t on e rs,
B k
i u rc

k
ro
p
—S p
e rs
—
ar

kO
—
ens
k
ll
o rts m e n
M
p F
— P
i
e

b d
k
i ca
H
— D
am e
y — A
R
c
l y
ee
d
H
C
c
Ag
e rs
— (
an
arr e rs an
. e rs
orse ea e rs - u t i on ee rs ouse e nts
.

bl —S —S ld & & & w S w

I
nn ee & B
e rs, C . a e rs i e rs. c . a n ro e rs urv e ors ai a s an arri e rs on
s ta es ea m e n o i e rs. c. c.
Op o of th P r ss i ni ns e e
l
.

N E g li h
lb g kl q i hh y q ii f di i f d h m k yw l wi p t Wthll byp f d l h f
o g
n h t t b w
s i t h t
t s oo h
m a n oui b k
n orm a t i on on un n o n a
nA p
e son
y r pe f
r e ct o y i f
n n orm e
u e d
on
re e re n ce t o t is
ou .

e a m a t te rs. w u re soun o ma re oi n s, i ,
oo , ac u re t e n e cessa r n orm a t on, an t us on oc ca s ons sa v e e e x e nse an oss o
f i l y
t i m e o a v s nt t o a a w er - E gi
an

pl h L w i t I pl i l g whi h ll
n ~ n eer . .

"I i d d
h l b
t s a c om
S ouh
d
yb
f E
d e
e te c o e o
in the an ds 0
n t
sblB
e v er
aw, t en nr a n an a e,
us in ess m a n , an d all w 0 w is h c a
t o a bohsh a w ers l y
can un er an
i .

l
A use fu p an d c on cise e it om e of t he la w , com pil ed h wi t c ons ide ra bl ”
—L aw H ag a n i n e
— pl p
e care .

Wh p s l h y hh hly k
.

p
g i ble t o n o
qn -
p
y l l
at
b
it
k r ofe s es
rofe ssi on a re a de rs .
oin t re ui res re a d —
so ut i on .
"
T he oo
'
B ett s L i e
to be a c om e te e
y h
it om e Of t he a w s Of t is c oun tr , t
is a han d on e t o a v e in re a di n ess w
oroug
en som e
i n t elli
notty
f .

1 . O G D E N AND C O .
, RRi NTE Rs , 1 7 2 , S T .
JO H N S T RE E T , E . o.